Home

2014 Chrysler 300 Owner`s Manual - Dealer e

1. 0 Security Alarm Theft Alarm Service Service Engine Soon Malfunction Indicator SmartBeams Mob eere ea e oe ee e cix rat Daytime Brightness 508 INDEX MMM Theft Alarm Security Alarm 317 Tire Pressure Monitoring TPMS 313 Traction Control ssc tiaga tamena idni as 416 Tumi Signal sek ot ah end t Re eras C CR 102 Vanity Mirror 4 sess eau seria dawg EN 114 Warning Instrument Cluster Description 312 Loading Vehicle 234 0 2422345 944 4 nereti Es 466 Capades s c pee d a ox pa ale dcos ed aod 468 TIKES oce FW teer ds ice us e ar RU ee 425 Load Leveling System cce ceca llle 305 LOCKS sein P 30 Automatic Door 0000s 33 Auto Unlock uo sea ae edie RE wee ee 33 Child Protection 000000 e eee eee 33 DOOF bsc each ea onan SE eden 30 Power Door lessen 32 Low Tire Pressure System llle 444 Lubrication BOd Ys e ess kem e e een 527 Lug Nuts a gata wean a sed Se rere hoa m drea A 485 Maintenance Free Battery secere ames nenea 521 Maintenance Procedures 000 516 Maintenance Schedule llle 568 Malfunction Indicator Light Check Engine 315 Manual Service llle 582 Master Cylinder Brakes llle 537 Memory Feature Memory Seat 195 Memory Seal eee 195 Memory Seats and Radio 0 0 195 Methan
2. 572 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Sx A IM Mileage or time passed whichever comes first o o ole e eilele s Sls s s s g eng pm g88888888 858353 8 8 8 u S 3 F 3 E 8 8 S E 8 s s OrYears 2 3 4 56 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Or Kilometers o e S Sy 8 2 SeS SS N 2 2 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 38 8 E s 9298 28 355922J 3 fy Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years fed or 150 000 miles 240 000 km whichever comes X X S first E Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if P using your vehicle for any of the following police X L taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Id five speed only EE Change automatic transmission fluid and filter X rs five speed only Change transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet off road or X X frequent trailer towing All Wheel Drive Only es MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 573 Mileage or time passed whichever comes first eisisisisisisis s s sisi sis Se Se SS Se 2 amp 9 Eee Ge ala v aoloR 9cj5 s9r ax zx OrYears 2 3 4 56 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Or Kilometers o o o lolo8 8 8 amp 8 8 8s 8S Ss S8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Niol cici g w o scztio ci cwcdc lsctieo ev o0 oolrs S S S S Si alata Change the rear axle fluid and on models equipped with All Whe
3. 523 Body Lubrication 0000000 Windshield Wiper Blades Adding Washer Fluid Exhaust System o csse RC srake Cooling System 0 eee eee 531 Ht Brake System sss ed pidge ann 537 510 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Automatic Transmission 539 W BULB REPLACEMENT 560 All Wheel Drive AWD If Equipped 541 Low Beam And High Beam Headlamp 560 Rear Axle veces naa rade des aia Dd 541 Front Turn Signal Lamps 561 Appearance Care And Protection From Rear Backup Lamp And Turn Signal Lamps 562 CCOITOSI T A ose Sois are OE ie OS en Reg Yn xs 542 E ERN ERE TREE TTE 563 TUDE ethene paucis esene ieu ets ini B FLUID CAPACITIES 5 3 ERA te Sones dma 564 Front Power Distribution Center Fuses 549 E FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE Rear Power Distribution Center Fuses 553 PARIS uice onset each b nara ded onerat 565 W VEHICLE STORAGE cosad ieact eem Keke ees 558 zu TRE 565 E REPLACEMENT BULBS 558 Chassis i299 e eere e eset ets 566 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 511 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 3 6L 074438716 1 Power Distribution Module Fuses 5 Air Cleaner Filter 2 Engine Oil Dipstick 6 Engine Oil Fill 3 Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 7 Remote Jump Start Positive Battery Post 4
4. 0000 277 Sunroof Maintenance 05 282 DOCUEILY 6945 Sup ces pikis ers Ee a b es 277 Ignition OFF Operation 4 282 Troubleshooting Tips 000 278 E COMMANDVIEW SUNROOF WITH General Information 4 279 POWER SHARE E E AEE asi es 255 POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED 279 Opening Sunroof Express 284 Opening Sunroof Express 280 PONE SIIMOUL CS DISDUDNTOS A ids Opening Sunroof Manual Mode 280 Closing Sunroof Express 284 Closing Sunroof Express 280 M M 254 Closing Sunroof Manual Mode 281 Open ROWER SNAG CSEXDIGSS wit ae Pinch Protect Feature liess 281 n EE EE E ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 Closing Power Shade Express 285 Door Storage sod cue emm ern 298 Closing Power Shade Manual Mode 286 Rear Seat Armrest Storage If Equipped 298 Pinch Protect Feature 0 06 286 Cargo Area Vehicles Equipped with Wind Buffeting ccce 286 BRI SUUSPEEEOKUNG Rear eal Sunroof Maintenance sis ss ra less 286 CARGO BREA FEATURED Cugteenerresea es Ignition Off Operation sss 287 eS Mae lE EQUIDEU saper pd tad nte dd WI ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS M iu KE B CU
5. The System will choose an alternate route that does not include the next tum 0415002146 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181 NOTE SEATS 1 You can also say Find City Find Favorite Find Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the Play by Category Find Play by Name Find vehicle Recently Found Where to or Go Home WARNING 2 You can say Find Nearest then Restaurant Fuel Transit Lodging Shopping Bank Entertain e It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or ment Recreation Attractions Community outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in Auto Services Hospitals Parking Airport these areas are more likely to be seriously injured Police Stations Fire Stations or Auto Dealers or killed NOTE Available Voice Commands are shown in bold Do tiot allow people o ride 1n any area of your face and shaded grey vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed e Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly 182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Power Seats On models equipped with power seats the switch is located on the outboard side of the seat near the floor Use this switch to mo
6. The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in REVERSE or when the Electronic Speed Control Sys tem is on The following messages will be displayed on vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Informa tion System EVIC if the pedals are attempted to be adjusted when the system is locked out Adjustable Pedal Disabled Cruise Control Engaged or Ad justable Pedal Disabled Vehicle In Reverse 032036861 Adjustable Pedals Switch Press the switch forward to move the pedals forward toward the front of the vehicle ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223 NOTE e Always adjust the pedals to a position that allows full pedal travel e Further small adjustments may be necessary to find the best possible seat pedal position For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat you can use your Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter or the memory switch on the driver s door trim panel to return the adjustable pedals to pre programmed positions Refer to Driver Memory Seat in Under standing The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information CAUTION Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the pedal controls Pedal travel may become lim ited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the adjustable pedal s path WARNING Do not adjust the pedals wh
7. 243 Cleaning The ParkSense System 262 Precautions While Driving With ACC 245 ParkSense System Usage Precautions 262 E General Information edoctus 250 M PARKVIEWG REAR BACK UP CAMERA Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control Mode 250 e qe etur ent tebieec ede pitqee abo a Turning ParkView On Or Off Forward Collision Warning If Equipped 252 With Touch Screen Radio 267 ME Re V BERI WI OVERHEAD CONSOLE isses 267 ASSIST IF EQUIPPED 1 3 ieee ie Scr 255 Front Map Reading Lights 268 ParkSense Sensors lesen 256 i Courtesy Lights eere bene 269 ParkSense Warning Display 256 Sunglasses Bin Door 000 269 ParkSense Display lees 257 ll GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED 270 Front Park Assist Audible Alerts 261 Before You Begin Programming HomeLink 271 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MENEEEEEEEREREMEMEEEEEEEEEEMMMMNMNKEEEEENENE Programming A Rolling Code 272 Venting Sunroof Express 281 Programming A Non Rolling Code 274 Sunshade Operation 00 281 Canadian Gate Operator Programming 275 Wind Bulffeting sss choke aad Sade as Res 282 Using HomeLink
8. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi cator light The Homelink indicator will flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink has received the frequency signal from the hand held transmitter Re lease both buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to rapid ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 275 5 Press and hold the programmed HomeLink button and observe the indicator light e If the indicator light stays on constantly program ming is complete and the garage door device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position 2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Do not release the button 3 Without releasing the button proceed with Program ming A Non Rolling Code Step 2 and follow all remaining steps Canadian Gate Operator Programming For programming transmitters in Canada United States that require the transmitter signals to time out after several seconds of transmission Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig nals to time out or quit after several seconds of trans mission which may not
9. under Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information Using The Panic Alarm To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off press and hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one second and release When the Panic Alarm is on the headlights will turn on the park lights will flash the horn will pulse on and off and the interior lights will turn on The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button a second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph 24 km h or greater NOTE The interior lights will turn off if you cycle the ignition switch to the ACC or ON RUN position while the Panic Alarm is activated However the exterior lights and horn will remain on You may need to be less than 35 ft 11 m from the vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted by the system Programming Additional Transmitters Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be performed at an authorized dealer Transmitter Battery Replacement The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032 battery en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 NOTE Perchlorate Material special handling may apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back housing or the printed circuit board 1 Remove the emerge
10. 0 00000 411 Traction Control System lille 410 Electronic Power Distribution Center Fuses 549 Electronic Speed Control Cruise Control 224 Electronic Stability Control ESC issue 412 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 265 Emergency Deck Lid Release isses 45 Emergency In Case of Freeing Vehicle When Stuck 500 Hazard Warning Flasher lisse 484 Jacking s ce RARE eR beIREES 487 JUMP Starting iussa bees ca ege x dd 496 Overhi ating ues m oru 484 TOWING ied eite eC Pe de a eben dca 506 Emergency Trunk Release 0004 45 Emission Control System Maintenance 513 Ir D ace Gis AG Eo ala RS eal A a ens 512 Ait Cleaner amp 12 224 dm kemi amitas 521 Block Heater 3 2 ke RR RR uh 377 Break In Recommendations 97 Checking Oil Level i dtr doh tara ae 517 Compartiment 4 65454 e244 oon y RR RS dads 511 Compartment Identification 511 Coolant Antifreeze lesen 531 Cooling sus ads hein eee Mika gee EE ls 531 Exhaust Gas Caution 0000004 98 Fails to Start ii cased eee s 375 Flooded Starting 2 cee ee cee mn 375 Fuel Requirements 000 455 Jump Starting eee a gae E ee 496 Oll tiie age are OS s YER d PE Eas 517 Oil Change Interval seem IRR em 330 Oil Filler Capes iue Co eee eed a Ge coke 519 OIL SElECHON sg 2 5 He Sarde lth
11. 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE To remove the emergency key slide the mechanical latch on the back of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand 0202008030 Emergency Key Removal NOTE You can insert the double sided emergency key into the lock cylinders with either side up 0202003287 Mechanical Latch On The Back Of The Key Fob E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 Ignition Or Accessory On Message Opening the driver s door when the ignition is in ACC or ON engine not running a chime will sound to remind you to cycle the ignition to OFF In addition to the chime the ignition or accessory on message will display in the cluster NOTE With the Uconnect system the power window switches radio power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to the OFF position Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time for this feature is programmable Refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information WARNING e When leaving the vehicle always remove the Key Fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injure
12. 534 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Mix a minimum solution of 50 OAT engine coolant that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Stan dard MS 12106 and distilled water Use higher concen trations not to exceed 70 if temperatures below 34 F 37 C are anticipated Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion ized water when mixing the water engine coolant antifreeze solution The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system e Please note that it is the owner s responsibility to main tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated NOTE Mixing engine coolant antifreeze types is not recommended and can result in cooling system damage If HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency have a authorized dealer drain flush and refill with OAT coolant conforming to MS 12106 as soon as possible Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine coolant antifreeze and to ensure that engine coolant antifreeze will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery tank The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces WARNING The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution Never add engine coolant
13. EXAMPLE R Construction code R means radial construction D means diagonal or bias construction 15 Rim diameter in inches in Service Description 95 Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions i e tire pressure vehicle loading road conditions and posted speed limits 422 STARTING AND OPERATING Se EXAMPLE Load Identification blank Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load SL tire Extra Load XL Extra load or reinforced tire Light Load LL Light load tire C D E E G Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire Tire Identification Number TIN Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle If the TIN is not found on the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire The TIN may be fou
14. Engine Coolant Reservoir 8 Washer Fluid Reservoir 512 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ENGINE COMPARTMENT 5 7L O90 1 Power Distribution Center Fuses 5 Engine Oil Fill 2 Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 6 Engine Oil Dipstick 3 Engine Coolant Reservoir 7 Remote Jump Start Positive Battery Post 4 Air Cleaner Filter 8 Washer Fluid Reservoir ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 513 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II This system monitors the performance of the emissions engine and automatic transmission control systems When these systems are operating properly your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy as well as engine emis sions well within current government regulations If any of these systems require service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs Al though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible CAUTION Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emissions control system It could also affect fuel economy and driveability The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed If th
15. OFF and the pressure value displayed will be updated and stop flashing or return to its original color as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires Vehicles With Compact Spare 1 The compact spare tire does not have a TPM sensor Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warn ing limit upon the next ignition switch cycle the TPM Telltale Light will remain ON and a chime will sound In addition the graphic in the EVIC will still display a flashing pressure value or a pressure value in a different color An Inflate to XX message will also be displayed After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid In addition the EVIC will display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value 454 STARTING AND OPERATING Se 4 For each subsequent ignition switch cycle a chime will General Information sound the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid and the EVIC will display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value This device com
16. 1 2 10 INTRODUCTION catestetetecsedeatasesen tp iende Saee e eni Rida dd 3 HEN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE sisse eee 9 Il UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 0000s ee 103 mm UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ien 307 s STARTING AND OPERATING aa Douda theo pda rv dere were Dau v pa e a Ioa 367 mm WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 4 ctr s e e Ec RE EEEY TEE RUE BRE R e 483 m MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 4292 534p 33 CE EDU RERUM SIUE eU RR REN 509 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 426g tud ce S PR ERES VER e UE emen dea doe kas 567 8 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE conisisckovatssednebesenetevansenewenass 575 9 INDEX M A 587 10 Information Provided by DEALER INTRODUCTION CONTENTS B INTRODUCTION 0040 4 Hi VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER 6 ll HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL 4 BM VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS 7 M WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS 6 4 INTRODUCTION M INTRODUCTION Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group LLC vehicle Be assured that it represents precision workmanship distinctive styling and high quality all essentials that are traditional to our vehicles This Owner s Manual has been prepared with the assis tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenanc
17. 102 032363713 Driver Override To Cancel The system will disable ACC without erasing the memory if You softly tap the brake pedal e You depress the brake pedal es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 235 e You press the CANCEL switch e The vehicle speed goes below 15 mph 25 km h NE 156789mi 102 Adaptive e An Anti Lock Brake System ABS event occurs Sube ontro e The transmission is shifted into NEUTRAL ACC EC The Electronic Stability Control Traction Control Sys Canceled tem ESC TCS activates NOTE If ACC is resumed or set with the ESC TCS off ESC will automatically be re engaged P R N D 032363714 Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Cancelled To Turn Off The system will turn off and erase the set speed in memory if e You push and release the ON OFF button e You turn OFF the ignition 236 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE mM To Resume Speed Press the RES button and release Then remove your foot from the accelerator pedal The EVIC will display the last set speed NOTE You can resume ACC from a minimum of 20 mph 32 km h WARNING The Resume function should only be used if traffic and road conditions permit Resuming a set speed that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate or decelerate too sharply for safe operation Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collisio
18. Hn UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163 NOTE 1 You can replace John Smith with any name in your mobile or favorite phone book You can also say Send a message to John Smith and the system will ask you which phone number you want to send a message to for John Smith You can replace Mobile with Home Work or Other You can replace Incoming Calls with Outgoing Calls or Missed Calls You can replace 248 555 1212 with any phone number supported by your Mobile phone These commands can be used during a phone call after pushing the Uconnect Voice Command button on the steering wheel Please note the call will be muted while the VR session is active 6 Send dial tones for automated systems is available while a call is active This is an example that uses a Phonebook Record named Voicemail Password 7 Storing Dial tones in contact names is possible but only the first number encountered in a contact name will be sent For example if there is a number stored in the Home and Work numbers for the contact Voice mail password only the Home number will be sent 8 If your phone does not support phonebook download or call log download over Bluetooth then these commands will return a response that the contact does not exist in the phonebook 9 Emergency and Towing assistance are contacts that have been pre loaded in the phonebook Commands such as Call E
19. If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when using your mobile phone Press the phone w button answer soft key or caller ID box to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE The Uconnect Phone compatible phones in the market today do not support rejecting an incoming call when another call is in progress Therefore the user can only answer an incoming call or ignore it Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In Progress To make a second call while you are currently on a call press the Eve button and say Dial or Call followed by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to call The first call will be on hold while the second call is in progress Or you can place a call on hold by touching the Hold soft key on the Phone main screen then dial a number from the dialpad recent calls SMS Inbox or from the phonebooks To go back to the first call refer to Toggling Between Calls in this section To combine two calls refer to Join Calls in this section Place Retrieve A Call From Hold During an active call touch the Hold soft key on the Phone main screen Toggling Between Calls If two calls are in progress one active and one on hold touch the Swap soft key on the Phone main screen Only one call
20. PARK or to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or RE VERSE when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds refer to Brake Transmission Shift Interlock Sys tem in this section To shift past multiple gear ranges at once such as PARK to DRIVE move the lever past the first or second detent Select the DRIVE range for normal driving The electronically controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule The transmission electronics are self calibrating therefore the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt This is a normal condition and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles kilometers Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting between these gears Standard Shifter The standard shift lever has PARK REVERSE NEU TRAL DRIVE and LOW shift positions Using the LOW position manually downshifts the transmission to a lower gear based on vehicle speed Shift Lever STARTING AND OPERATING 381 Optional Shifter With AutoStick The optional shift lever with AutoStick shift paddles mounted on the steering wheel provides PARK RE VERSE NEUTRAL DRIVE and SPORT shift positions Once in the DRIVE range tapping the shift lever rear ward will toggle between SPORT mode and DRIVE mode You do not need to press the shift lever button when toggling betwe
21. The power sunshade can be operated using the Uconnect System Press the Controls soft key and then press the Rear Sunshade soft key to raise the power sunscreen Press the Sunshade soft key a second time to lower the sunshade If the sunshade is in the raised position and the vehicle is placed in REVERSE the sunshade will automatically fully lower When the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE the sunshade will automatically return to the fully raised position after approximately five seconds NOTE The rear sunshade control switch can be locked out along with the rear passenger window controls from the driver switch window lockout switch 70 out 6 950 1600 Pri S y n Nav Phone More 2 Player OFF 4 Radio Controls Climate Controls Soft Key 304 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE t FM 91 7 Controls Driver 7 Heated Seat LJ 7 Vented c Seat L Radio Player Controls Climate f Phone nm Power Sunshade Soft Key Power Sunshade Switch The power sunshade can also be operated by passengers in the rears seats The power sunshade switch is located on the back of the center console between the heated seat switches Press the switch once to raise the sunshade Press the switch a second time to lower the sunshade es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 305 LOAD LEVELING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED The automatic load leveling system will provide a level ridin
22. feature refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further informa tion Keyless Ignition Node KIN This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch with the push of a button as long as the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter is in the passenger compartment The Keyless Ignition Node KIN has four operating positions three of which are labeled and will illuminate when in position The three positions are OFF ACC and ON RUN The fourth position is START during start RUN will illuminate NOTE In case the ignition switch does not change with the push of a button the RKE transmitter Key Fob may have a low or dead battery In this situation a back up method can be used to operate the ignition switch Put the nose side side opposite of the emergency key of the Key Fob against the ENGINE START STOP button and push to operate the ignition switch THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 Key Fob The Key Fob also contains the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and an emergency key which stores in the rear of the Key Fob A SUA The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle STOP should the battery in the vehicle or the Key Fob go dead OR The emergency key is also for locking the glove box You can keep the emergency key with you when valet parking ENGINE Keyless Ignition Node KIN 1 OFF 2 ACC ACCESSORY 3 ON RUN
23. for example some pole collisions truck underrides and angle offset collisions On the other hand depending on the type and location of impact Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration The side air bags will not deploy in all side collisions Side air bag deployment will depend on the severity and type of collision Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli sions and also are needed to help keep you in position away from an inflating air bag ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition is in the START or ON RUN position If the ignition is in the OFF position or in the ACC position the air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment e Also the ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning ry Light in the instrument panel for approxi mately four to eight seconds for a self check when the ignition is first turned on After the self check the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off If the
24. in this section e Normal fixed speed cruise control mode is for cruis og E ONIOFF CANCEL SET NOTE The system will not react to preceding vehicles Always be aware of the mode selected You can change the mode by using the Cruise Control buttons The two control modes function differently Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons Always confirm which mode is selected 1 DISTANCE SETTING 2 RES 4 Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Operation 3 SET The speed control buttons located on the right side of the 4 CANCEL 5 ON OFF steering wheel operates the ACC system a ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 231 NOTE Any chassis suspension modifications to the ve hicle will effect the performance of the Adaptive Cruise Control Activating Adaptive Cruise Control ACC You can only activate ACC if the vehicle speed is above 20 mph 32 km h When the system is turned on and in the READY state the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC dis plays Adaptive Cruise Ready When the system is OFF the EVIC displays Adaptive Cruise Control Off NOTE You cannot enable ACC under the following conditions e When you apply the brakes e When the parking brake is set e When the automatic transmission is in PARK RE mmm VERSE or NEUTRAL e When pushing the RES button without a previously set speed in memory 232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se T
25. Parade Mode Daytime Brightness Feature Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control upward to the first detent This feature brightens all text displays such as the odometer EVIC if equipped and radio when the position lights or headlights are on WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS The multifunction lever operates the windshield wipers and washer when the ignition is placed in the ON RUN or ACC position The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering column Orr X9 Di uii T PA LO 031563089 Windshield Wiper Washer Control es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213 Intermittent Wiper System Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause be tween cycles desirable Rotate the end of the multifunc tion lever to the first detent position and then turn the end of the lever to select the desired delay interval There are four delay settings which allow you to regulate the wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every second to a maximum of approximately 36 seconds between cycles The delay intervals will double in duration when the vehicle speed is 10 mph 16 km h or less Wiper Operation Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent past the intermittent settings for low speed wiper operation or to the second detent past the intermittent settings for high speed wiper operation CAUTION e Turn the windshield
26. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals WARNING The air induction system air cleaner hoses etc can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire Do not remove the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc removed Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine air cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recom mended Maintenance Free Battery Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance free battery You will never have to add water nor is periodic main tenance required NOTE The battery is stored under an access cover in the trunk Remote battery terminals are located in the engine compartment for jump starting Refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emergencies for further information 522 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING e Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn or even blind you Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes skin or clothing Do not lean over a battery when attaching cl
27. The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers cargo and tongue weight The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Refer to Vehicle Loading Vehicle Certification Label in Starting and Operating for further information Gross Trailer Weight GTW The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo consumables and equipment permanent or tem porary loaded in or on the trailer in its loaded and ready for operation condition The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR Refer to Vehicle Loading Vehicle Certifica tion Label in Starting and Operating for further infor mation WARNING It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have a collision 470 STARTING AND OPERATING Ss Tongue Weight TW The tongue weight is the do
28. Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant OAT coolant conforming to MS 12106 that allows extended maintenance intervals This engine coolant anti freeze can be used up to ten years or 150 000 miles 240 000 km before replacement To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period it is important that you use the same engine coolant OAT coolant conforming to MS 12106 throughout the life of your vehicle introduced into the cooling system in an emergency the cooling system will need to be drained flushed and refilled with fresh OAT coolant conforming to MS 12106 by an authorized dealer as soon as possible Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine coolant antifreeze products Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and Please review these recommendations for using Organic may plug the radiator Additive Technology OAT engine coolant antifreeze This vehicle has not been designed for use with that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Stan propylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze dard MS 12106 When adding engine coolant antifreeze Use of propylene glycol based engine coolant anti We recommend using MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant freeze is not recommended 10 Year 150 000 Mile Formula OAT Organic Additive Technology that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 12106
29. pants for the best interaction with the Advanced Front Air Bags Along with seat belts and pretensioners Advanced Front Air Bags and the Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag work with the knee impact bolsters to provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls Occupant Restraint Controller ORC The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system required for this vehicle The ORC determines if deployment of the front and or side air bags in a frontal or side collision is required 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Based on the impact sensor s signals a central electronic ORC deploys the Advanced Front Air Bags SABIC air bags SAB Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag and front seat belt pretensioners as required depending on several factors including the severity and type of impact Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts in certain frontal collisions depending on several factors including the severity and type of collision Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemen tal Driver Side Knee Air Bag are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear side or rollover collisions The Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag will not deploy in all frontal colli sions including some that may produce substantial ve hicle damage
30. ter This feature can be turned on or turned off To change the current setting refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further in formation Headlight Illumination On Approach This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles equipped through Uconnect To change the current setting refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information To Lock The Doors Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter to lock all doors The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry refer to Keyless Enter N Go under Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter This feature can be turned on or turned off To change the current setting refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es To Unlatch The Trunk Press the TRUNK button on the RKE transmitter two times within five seconds to unlatch the trunk If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry refer to Keyless Enter N Go
31. 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 E Or Kilometers o0 o o olo8 8 8 amp 8 S8 S8 S8 8 S8 S8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 2 s 2 8 E 8 S 8 5 S R R al Additional Inspections E Inspect the CV joints X X X W Inspect front suspension tie rod ends boot seals MI and replace if necessary x x 2 X 3 Inspect the rear axle fluid Inspect the front axle 8 fluid All Wheel Drive Only Inspect the brake linings replace as necessary X X X X Adjust park brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes a 5 A MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 571 i A Mileage or time passed whichever comes first 6 o e lele eleileilss s S SssSg l dis cd 888888 2 2 28 8 3 8 8 Sik All El Sl R lsjl se el sz x Or Years 2 3 4 56 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 yiw sissssss 282888585885 SFS SIF SIF S FS SR 8 E Inspect transfer case fluid All Wheel Drive Only X X X G Inspect the transfer case fluid Change the transfer C case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the X X H following police taxi fleet off road or frequent E trailer towing All Wheel Drive Only 7 Additional Maintenance L Replace engine air filter X X X X X E Replace cabin air conditioning filter X X X X X X X 8 Replace spark plugs 3 6L engine X Replace spark plugs 5 7L engine X
32. FULL mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may cause leaking in the system Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the require ments described on the brake fluid reservoir With disc brakes fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear However low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed Use only manufacturer s recommended brake fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information 538 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Use only manufacturer s recommended brake fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your brake system and or impair its perfor mance The proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir To avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly closed container Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling point This may Continued WARNING Continued cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or pro longed braking resulting in sudden brake failure This
33. Gasoline Clean Air 0 ee 456 Gasoline Fuel cbe mee have eaceaber aes 455 CONSERVING io catus gid e yd dope de d 331 Gasoline Reformulated ills 456 Gauges Coolant Temperature 00 0000 320 Fuel ss E 316 Speedometer 32 node d Er ea chee areal 316 Tachometer sirere bres D RR id ew ee oe Be 312 Gear Ranges vua de he ee a 383 Gear Select Lever Override 502 General Information llle eee 18 Glass Cleaning secs s duda chu ees tt 546 Gross Axle Weight Rating 467 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 467 GVWR CETT 467 Hazard Driving Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Standing Water ticia emey eee eee 402 Hazard Warning Flasher 00 484 Headlights 542 esca tee PREIS SER Reds 560 AXUTOTHA lC y ce ach cata x a acea eR e ess td 202 Cleaning xus bu ed Eae b hd SP ees 546 High Beam Low Beam Select Switch 207 Lights On Reminder 205 205 On With Wipers sese ie ede 202 Passing 3 ses cn ano TOR Re eS TR Rt cea 207 SW ECL a sce tra aot Eh ente ACE Ead DUNS eh 3 201 Tinie De lay s deter Rr eared Mita acis 202 Was heis e i ane Soa E PR det E RA RG as 528 Headlight Washers 0 0 0 e eee eee ee 528 Head Restraints 0 00 0 ce eee eee 191 Head Rests 2r 9 3 e erg 191 Heated Mirrors llle 114 Heated Seats llle ees 186 Heater Engine Block o cusi nedir Dastak auaa
34. Ignition Or Accessory On Message 15 BM ILLUMINATED ENTRY IF EQUIPPED 21 M SENTRY KEY 0 000004 16 Mi REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RKE 21 Replacement Keys 0000055 17 To Unlock The DOOtS asss oa pitssa ditas 22 Customer Key Programming 18 To Lock The Dooie cga anea ae aa 23 General Information 00 18 To Unlatch The Trunk 000 24 ll VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM IF EQUIPPED 18 O Using The Panic Alarm 24 Rearming Of The System 18 Programming Additional Transmitters 24 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME Transmitter Battery Replacement 24 W TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE 44 General Information 00 27 W TRUNK SAFETY WARNING 44 ll REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED 27 Trunk Emergency Release 5 2 a0ee aes 45 How To Use Remote Start 0 28 M amp OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS iux RR 46 M DOOR LOCKS 2 6 e624 bck 9 metn 30 Lap Shoulder Belts 2040 50 Manual Door Locks 00000005 30 Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure 55 Power Door Locks 0 00005 32 Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions 55 Child Protection Door Lock System Automatic Locking Re
35. NOTE 1 You can replace the album artist song genre playlist podcast and audio book names with any correspond ing names on the current device that is playing 2 You can replace 8 with any track on the CD that is mm currently playing Command is only available when CD is playing 3 Playlist Podcast and audio book commands are only available when the iPod is connected and playing 4 VR commands Albums Artists and Genre names are based on the music metadata contained on the loaded connected device NOTE Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and shaded grey 176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Uconnect Voice Command Travel Link commands The commands can be said on any screen when a call is not active after pushing the Uconnect voice command button VR on the steering wheel Screen will change to Travel Link Movie Listings Screen will Screen will Screen will change to change to change to Travel Link Travel Link NFL Sports Favorites Headlines Screen will Screen will Screen will change to change to change to Travel Link Travel Link Travel Link Home Fuel Prices Weather 030563045 Hn UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177 NOTE 1 You can replace NFL with any league shown on the sports league screen For example you can say Show MLB headlines or Show PGA headlines 2 You can replace Headlines with any menu items shown on a league
36. ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light either momentarily or continuously A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial startup It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru ment cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is noted that could affect the air bag system The diagnos tics also record the nature of the malfunction WARNING Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru ment panel could mean you won t have the air bags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on stays on after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Inflator Units The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and on the right side of the instrument panel When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Ad vanced Front Air Bags it signals the inflator units A large quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the Advanced Front Air Bags Different air bag inflation rates are possible based on several factors including the collision type and severity The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel sep
37. Select Yes to begin the pairing process Then search for available devices on your Bluetooth enabled mobile phone When prompted on the phone enter the name and PIN shown on the Uconnect screen e If No is selected touch the Settings soft key from the Uconnect Phone main screen e Touch the Add Device soft key e Search for available devices on your Bluetooth enabled mobile phone When prompted on the phone enter the name and PIN shown on the Uconnect screen See Step 4 to complete the process 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se 4 Uconnect Phone will display an in progress screen while the system is connecting 68 yf FM 91 7 10 10 NW 54 out Bluetooth Pairing Bluetooth Connection in progress Please wait da Nav es l5 J Ww Player Controls Climate Phone More 5 When the pairing process has successfully completed the system will prompt you to choose whether or not this is your favorite phone Selecting Yes will make this phone the highest priority This phone will take precedence over other paired phones within range Pair Additional Mobile Phones Touch the Settings soft key from the Phone main screen Next touch the Phone Bluetooth soft key Touch the Add Device soft key e Search for available devices on your Bluetooth en abled mobile phone When prompted on the phone enter the name and PIN shown on the Uconnect
38. To avoid vehicle damage ParkView should only using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera Always be used as a parking aid The Park View camera is check carefully behind your vehicle and be sure to unable to view every obstacle or object in your check for pedestrians animals other vehicles ob drive path structions or blind spots before backing up You are To avoid vehicle damage the vehicle must be responsible for the safety of your surroundings and driven slowly when using ParkView to be able to must continue to pay attention while backing up stop in time when an obstacle is seen It is recom Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death mended that the driver look frequently over his her shoulder when using ParkView NOTE If snow ice mud or any foreign substance builds up on the camera lens clean the lens rinse with water and dry with a soft cloth Do not cover the lens ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 267 Turning ParkView On Or Off OVERHEAD CONSOLE WHE Touch Screen madia The overhead console contains courtesy reading lights 1 Turn the Radio on and storage for sunglasses Universal Garage Door Opener HomeLink and power sunroof switches may 2 Tess tne More OEE also be included if equipped 3 Press the Settings soft key 4 Press the Safety amp Driving Assistance soft key 5 Press the check box soft key next to Parkview Backup Camera to enable d
39. cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes only not for passengers who should sit in seats and use seat belts When the seatback is folded to the upright position make sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the seatback above the seat strap 300 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING CARGO AREA FEATURES Trunk Mat If Equipped The weight and position of cargo and passengers can runk Mat quipp change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle A trunk mat covers the bottom of the cargo area The handling To avoid loss of control resulting in per trunk mat is used to protect the interior of the trunk from sonal injury follow these guidelines for loading your mud snow and debris vehicle Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor Put heavier objects as low and as far forward as pos The rear cargo area is equipped with grocery bag hooks sible located on either side of the rear cargo area Grocery Bag Hooks e Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear axle Too much weight or improperly placed weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of the vehicle to sway Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the seatback This could impair visibility or be come a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 301 Cargo Net for versions markets where provided The rear cargo area is equipp
40. dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear quarter window equipped with the radio antenna Do not use scrapers or other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 547 When cleaning the rear view mirror spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic When cleaning the lenses care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic 1 Clean with a wet soft rag A mild soap solution may be used but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp rag 2 Dry with a soft cloth Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric Sun damage can also weaken the fabric If the belts need cleaning use MOPAR Total Clean a mild soap solution or lukewarm water Do not remove the belts from the vehicle to wash them Dry with a soft cloth Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly Cleaning The Center Console Cupholders Clean with a damp cloth or towel using a mild detergent with the cupholder in the center console NOTE The cupholder cannot be removed 548 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M PASER WARNING WARNING If the replaced f
41. erase all pound Espanol add location Francais ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161 Voice Commands Voice Commands Primary Alternate s Primary Alternate s help previous home record again language redial list names return to main menu return or main menu list phones select phone select mobile send mute set up phone settings or mute off phone set up new entry towing assistance no transfer call other Uconnect Tutorial pair a phone voice training phone pairing pairing work phonebook phone book yes 162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Tree The commands can be spoken from any screen after pushing the Uconnect Phone a Nr on the Uconnect Hands Free Calling Available commands while phone call is in progress The commands can be spoken from any screen while a call is active after pushing the Uconnect voice command button Uconnect Hands Free Calling steering wheel vt VR on the steering wheel Mobile 58 Call Back Send 12348 Shows the Number Last Last Phoneboo associated number incoming Brie oar esas re Number is Dial Tones for wth entry is called is call is be shew US show Fit Sn dialed Dial Tones numbers stored in dialed redialed dialed j il ies i d e for 12344 Voicemail ets are sent Password are numbers ent 0415006219
42. ine Parts in this section for fluid specifications Special Additives The manufacturer strongly recommends against using any special additives in the transmission Automatic Transmission Fluid ATF is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supple mental additives Therefore do not add any fluid addi tives to the transmission The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid leaks Avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals 540 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as the chemicals can damage your transmission compo nents Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty CAUTION e If a transmission fluid leak occurs visit your au thorized dealer immediately Severe transmission damage may occur Your authorized dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid level accurately Fluid Level Check The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require adjustment under normal operating conditions Routine fluid level checks are not required therefore the transmis sion has no dipstick Your authorized dealer can check your transmission fluid level using special service tools If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction visit your authorized dealer immediately to have the transmission fluid level checked Operating the vehicle with an improper fluid
43. information to select a lower gear Under these condi tions using a lower gear will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup ee STARTING AND OPERATING 395 SPORT S IF EQUIPPED This mode alters the transmission s automatic shift schedule for sportier driving Upshift speeds are in creased to make full use of available engine power To toggle between DRIVE and SPORT modes touch the SPORT button on the Controls screen in the center touch panel Transmission Limp Home Mode Transmission function is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated In this mode the transmission remains in the current gear until the vehicle is brought to a stop After the vehicle has stopped the transmission will remain in second gear regardless of which forward gear is selected PARK REVERSE and NEUTRAL will con tinue to operate The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL may be illuminated Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without damaging the transmission In the event of a momentary problem the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the following steps Stop the vehicle Shift the transmission into PARK Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position 1 2 3 4 Wait approximately 10 sec
44. not recommended because it may cause window fogging Vacation Storage Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service ie vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again Window Fogging Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re moved by turning the mode selector to Defrost The Defrost Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear windshield and provide sufficient heating If side win dow fogging becomes a problem increase blower speed Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but rainy or humid weather 366 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME NOTE Recirculate without A C should not be used for long periods as fogging may occur e Automatic Temperature Controls ATC will automati cally adjust the climate control settings to reduce or eliminate window fogging on the front windshield When this occurs recirculation will be unavailable Outside Air Intake Make sure the air intake located directly in front of the windshield is free of obstructions such as leaves Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow and if they enter the plenum they could plug the water drains In Winter months make sure the air intake is clear of ice slush and snow A C Air Filt
45. ses Re m e aes 199 Latch Plate eso sese ERR RE niae Rn 51 Lead Free Gasoline 2 0 eee 455 Leaks Fluid ue RR ee a 102 Life Of Tires e eet Soke ee rura s 438 Light Bulbs giu hee Grae alk aoe 102 Light seri agaa Sena meme alee TS Gla races 102 PUD AG a oss nit eign bbe RODEO a RUE ep Pr dor Bod 67 Alafi oi SS RS RS eC REESE Lee Caw E ES 317 Ant Lock a vae cepe ese Cate ats 316 Automatic Headlights 4 202 Brake Assist Warning 065 416 Brake Warning sss Eg 0095 44 44 0 317 Bulb Replacement llle 560 Daytime Running 0 000 a eee 205 Dimmer Switch Headlight 206 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator 416 EXIeFIOP ond ide stes ane Sra sei ea ose tein 102 Fop cns enu erae MERE Werde ated aus 205 Hazard Warning Flasher lisse 484 Headlights 15b px NER EE E M beTRENS 201 Headlights On Reminder 205 Headlights On With Wipers 202 Headlight Switch ees eae aes ar ewe 201 High Beam ss cease ER er vd Rag duis 207 High Beam Indicator ecesas mi saeara iyi eaan High Beam Low Beam Select Illaminated EMEY 262 44544 6 RR Instrument Cluster llle Intensity Con Interior License Lights On Reminder 005 Low Fuel Malfunction Indicator Check Engine Map Reading Parade Mode Passing Reading Seat Belt Reminder
46. tion of your engine which contains aluminum compo nents Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed Keep the front of the radiator clean If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning keep the front of the condenser clean Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation If replacement is ever necessary install ONLY the correct type thermostat Other designs may result in unsatisfactory engine coolant antifreeze performance poor gas mileage and increased emissions ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 537 Brake System In order to assure brake system performance all brake system components should be inspected periodically Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals WARNING Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly a collision Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency Master Cylinder Brake Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately if the brake system warning light indicates system failure Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when per forming underhood services Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap Add fluid to bring the level up to the top of the
47. use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may 40 Amp Exterior result in a dangerous electrical system overload If Green Lighting 1 a properly rated fuse continues to blow it indicates blem in the circuit th b d 40 Amp Exterior a problem in the circuit that must be corrected Crean Lighting 2 30 Amp Interior Lighting Pink Washer Pump 9 30 Amp m Power Locks Pink ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 555 e Cartridge Mini m Cartridge Mini oer Cavity Fuse Fuse Description Cavity Fuse Fuse Description 10 30 Amp Driver Door 21 Fuse Spare Pink 22 Fuse Spare 141 30 Amp Passenger Door 23 um 10Amp Fuel Door Pink Red Diagnostic Port 12 20 Amp Cigar Lighters 24 15 Amp Radio Screen Yellow Instrument Panel Blue amp Power Outlet 25 10 Amp Tire Pressure Console Rear Red Monitor 15 40 Amp HVAC Blower 26 Fuse Spare G reen 27 25 Amp Amplifier 16 Fuse Spare Natural 17 Fuse Spare 31 25 Amp Power Seats 18 Fuse Spare Natural 19 Fuse Spare 32 15 Amp HVAC Module 20 Fuse Spare Blue Cluster 556 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cavity Ea sai Description Cavity prid e Description 33 15 Amp Ignition Switch 43 25 Amp Rear Heated Blue Wireless Module Natural
48. www safercargov or write to Administrator NHTSA 1200 New Jersey Avenue SE 582 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M West Building Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should contact the Customer Service Department imme diately Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans port Canada Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls at 1 800 333 0510 or go to http www tc gc ca roadsafety PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below Visa Mas tercard American Express and Discover orders are ac cepted If you prefer mailing your payment please call for an order form NOTE A street address is required when ordering manuals no P O Boxes Service Manuals These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the infor mation that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing troubleshooting problem solving maintain ing servicing and repairing Chrysler Group LLC ve hicles A complete working knowledge of the vehicle system and or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations diagrams and charts Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams charts and detai
49. 377 High Beam Low Beam Select Dimmer Switch 207 Hill Start Assiste esege 0 oe ee es 414 Hitches Trailer Towing Holder oit vue 6 os ade de Bw 8s ee Ew S Hood Release 1 0 es 506 INDEX ee Ignition I E 12 Illuminated Entry 1 06 22 bibet R ag RD 21 Immobilizer Sentry Key 0006 16 Infant Restraint e ze ie GEG wea ER ed 74 Information Center Vehicle lll 321 Instrument Cluster llle 312 Instrument Panel and Controls 309 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning 547 Interior Appearance Care sss 545 Interior Lights 2 emm mem 210 Intermittent Wipers Delay Wipers 213 Introducti n 2s pe ee eee ee eee eae eee es 4 Jack Location ess e 253 ones otha wae need 488 Jack Operation emer Leese ee Re ee 487 Jump Starting lt ace ace ae ss ae ds 496 Key li Remind et 0 aah aout RR Reb dks 15 Keyless Enter N Go 000000 i nea 35 Keyless Entry System ense teat awapi eae 21 Keyless GO i oido R3 end mid eked xe 12 Key Programming sesso he RR Rae hes 18 Key Replacement vere ERE Y CES 17 KeyStu coda Pw ea d EROR dea EUR E dene GA 12 Key Sentry Immobilizer 0 0 16 Knee Bolst tz scr hus akini beta TREE 59 Lane Change and Turn Signals 207 Lane Change Assist llle 207 Lap Shoulder Belts 000000000004 50 Latches cn cce Oe ce OE Ice Re e us 102 Hood
50. 388 STARTING AND OPERATING Ss Transmission Limp Home Mode Transmission function is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated In this mode the transmission may operate only in certain gears or may not shift at all Vehicle performance may be severely degraded and the engine may stall In some situations the transmission may not re engage if the engine is turned off and restarted The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL may be illuminated A message in the instrument cluster will inform the driver of the more serious conditions and indicate what actions may be necessary In the event of a momentary problem the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the following steps NOTE In cases where the instrument cluster message indicates the transmission may not re engage after en gine shutdown perform this procedure only in a desired location preferably at your authorized dealer 1 Stop the vehicle 2 Shift the transmission into PARK if possible If not shift the transmission to NEUTRAL 3 Press and hold the ignition switch until the engine turns OFF 4 Wait approximately 30 seconds 5 Restart the engine 6 Shift into the desired gear range If the problem is no longer detected the transmission will return to normal operation ee STARTING AND OPERATING 389 NOTE Even i
51. 4 Remove the spare tire 6 Remove the scissors jack and lug wrench from the spare wheel as an assembly Turn the jack screw to the left to loosen the lug wrench and remove the wrench from the jack assembly 5 Remove the fastener securing the jack 490 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES WARNING Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or ee parne rake hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve Place the shift lever into PARK hicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided Have the deflated flat tire eC Eee repaired or replaced immediately Block the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite of the jacking position For Preparations For Jacking example if changing the right front 1 Park the vehicle on a firm level surface as far from the tire block the left rear wheel edge of the roadway as possible Avoid icy or slippery areas WARNING 060505162 NOTE Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic pull far enough off the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel E WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 491 Jacking And Changing A Tire WARNING Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle Always park on a fir
52. 5 kg Rear Facing More than X Child Restraint 65 lbs 29 5 kg Forward Facing Up to 65 Ibs X X Child Restraint 29 5 kg Forward Facing More than X Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH Restraint System Anchor Tether We LATCH The next generation of child safety 022668173 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81 Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor age system called LATCH which stands for Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren The LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH equipped child seats There are two lower anchorages located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the seating position These anchorages are used to install LATCH equipped child seats without using the vehicle s seat belts Some seating positions may have a top tether anchorage but no lower anchorages In these seating positions the seat belt must be used with the top tether anchorage to install the child restraint Please see the following table for more information 82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle 022668889 V Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating position 2 Top Tether Anchorage Symbol en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83 What is the weight limit child s weight weight of
53. Axle Lubrication Axle Fluid 566 Battery ix yd epa tam a wa E ebd de a duas 521 Keyless Transmitter Replacement RKE 24 ore iulo RENE 521 Belts Seat civ sc ea e ee depre da a 50 Body Mechanism Lubrication 527 B Pillar Location ida re Rd 425 Brake Assist Systemi s sodes ise ieee Ea Rs 411 Brake Control System Electronic 410 Brake Fluid cuore Eie a oe EE 566 Brake Parking oer rer t Moa Eae deg 405 Brake System se farea ek eom died ahs 537 Anti Lock ABS 02 00000000 408 Fluid Check 5 5 eR tae are Few PRAES 537 Master Cylinder 0 000 000 0050 537 Parking s act tat v aotem ee Fen Pesto ear d uid 405 Warning Light llle 317 Brake Transmission Interlock issus 379 Brightness Interior Lights 210 Bulb Replacement 0 000 000 0080 558 Bulbs Light i e ieee n 102 Camera Reaf 462340834404 224 64 d 449 SE baa Capacities Fluid 590 INDEX eee Caps Filler OL Engine o rte e peter RR rae dne 519 Radiator Coolant Pressure 534 Carbon Monoxide Warning 5 98 Cargo Area Features 4 ic cie kw y ORE Rn 300 Cargo Compartment 00000000008 300 Cargo Vehicle Loading 04 466 Car Washes 5 2v d sace dee Gale ae aw s 543 Cellular PRONE vue Bek oe i ES 356 Certification Label 0 0 0 00 ce eee 466 Chains Tite s ne 615
54. B Pillar Location for Tire And Loading Information Placard 2 Total weight your vehicle can carry 426 STARTING AND OPERATING Se 3 Tire size designed for your vehicle 4 Told tire inflation pressures for the front rear and spare tires Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle You will not exceed the tire s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions tire size and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the Vehicle Loading section of this manual NOTE Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition gross axle weight ratings GAWRs for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded For further information on GAWKkRs vehicle loading and trailer towing refer to Vehicle Loading in this section To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on the Tire and Loading Information placard The combined weight of occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight if applicable should never exceed the weight referenced here Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occu pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers
55. BAS and the Electronic Stability Control ESC All four of these systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and control in various driving condi tions Also your vehicle may be equipped with Hill Start Assist HSA Ready Alert Braking and Rain Brake Support Anti Lock Brake System ABS This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions by controlling hydrau lic brake pressure This prevents wheel lock up to help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking Refer to Anti Lock Brake System in Starting and Operating for further information WARNING The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions The ABS cannot prevent collisions including those result ing from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Traction Control System TCS This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each driven wheel If wheel spin is detected brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel s and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability ee STARTING AND OPERATING 411 A feature of the TCS system Brake Lock Differential BLD control
56. Commands 170 Memory Seat Only sess 198 E es ee ee eee 181 M TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD 199 Pow rbeats 22 amos mA MET GUI 182 B LIGHIS xk Race RR CC Rea Rara 201 Headlight Switch 000040 201 Automatic Headlights If Equipped 202 Headlights On With Wipers Available with Automatic Headlights Only 202 Headlight Time Delay 202 Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control If Equipped X issue be saepe dha eae 203 Adaptive Bi Xenon High Intensity Discharge Headlights If Equipped 204 Daytime Running Lights DRL 205 Lights On Reminder 205 Fog Lights If Equipped 205 Multifunction Lever sees 206 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 Turn signals 32 ach d vea a ae 207 Lane Change Assist liess 207 High Low Beam Switch 207 Flash To Pass llle Front Map Reading Lights Courtesy Lights peste au UR has 209 Ambient Light llle 209 Interior Lights 4525 9ephee e Rr e ES 210 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS 212 Intermittent Wiper System 213 Wiper Operation so cssesissriss rises 213 Mist Featite nesu gna cia eee MA eR Egi 214 Windshi
57. ICON is displayed with tire pressure values in each corner of the ICON e If one or more tires have low pressure Tire Pressure LOW is displayed with the vehicle ICON and the tire pressure values in each corner of the ICON e If the Tire Pressure system requires service Service Tire Pressure System is displayed ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 335 Tire PSI is an information only function and cannot be reset Press and release the BACK button to return to the main menu Vehicle Info Customer Information Features Press and release the UP or DOWN button until Vehicle Info is highlighted in the EVIC Press and release the SELECT button and Coolant Temp will be displayed Press the UP or DOWN button to scroll through the following information displays e Coolant Temp Displays the actual coolant temperature e AWD Status If Equipped Displays a vehicle ICON with four wheels highlighted and AWD if All Wheel Drive is active Displays a vehicle ICON with two wheels highlighted and RWD if All Wheel Drive is inactive Oil Temperature Displays the actual oil temperature Oil Pressure Displays the actual oil pressure e Trans Temperature Displays the actual transmission temperature e Engine Hours Displays the number of hours of engine operation Messages Select from Main Menu using the UP or DOWN buttons This feature shows the number of stored warning mes sages in the place holder Pressi
58. Instrument Panel for further information Modes Of Operation With Uconnect System If Equipped Three selectable modes of operation are available in the Uconnect system screen Refer to Customer Programmable Features Uconnect Access settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Blind Spot Alert Lights Only When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object However when the system is operating in RCP the system will respond with both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is present Whenever an audible alert is requested the radio volume is reduced Blind Spot Alert Lights Chime When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights Chime mode the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appro priate side view mirror based on a detected object If the turn signal is then activated and it corresponds to an alert present on that side of the vehicle an audible chime will also be sounded Whenever a turn signal and de tected object are present on the same side at the same time both the visual and audio alerts will be issued In addition to the audible alert the radio if on volume will be reduced ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 NOTE e Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM system the radio volume is reduced e If the hazard flashers
59. M The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature To make your selection touch the Headlights With Wipers softkey until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Auto Dim High Beams SmartBeam If Equipped When this feature is selected the high beam headlights will deactivate automatically under certain conditions To make your selection touch the Auto High Beams softkey until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Refer to Lights Smart Beam If Equipped in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information e Daytime Running Lights If Available When this feature is selected the headlights will turn on whenever the engine is running To make your selection touch the Daytime Running Lights soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Steering Directed Lights If Equipped When this feature is selected the headlights turn relative to a change in direction of the steering wheel To make your selection touch the Steering Directed Lights softkey until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting ha
60. SAFETY DEFECTS 2 oe 581 Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center 578 In The 50 United States And Washington D C 0 0 6 ee 581 O Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center 579 Ine Canad ay ioc puteo erts 582 In Mexico contact eee 579 ra E PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS 582 576 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ME ll DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION Traction Grades cece ti are oea a ao aei 584 UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES 583 Tieadwe at snm oda aches ae eae amp E 583 Temperature Grades 0000 584 es F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 577 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If you are having warranty work done be sure to have the right papers with you Take your warranty folder All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty Discuss additional charges with the service manager Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle s service history This can often provide a clue to the current problem Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle s problems or the specific work you want done If you ve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log let the service advisor know Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the ite
61. Seats Steering 34 10 Amp Steering Column Wheel Red Module Clock 44 2 10 Amp Park Assist Blind 35 10 Amp Battery Sensor Red Spot Camera Red 45 15 Amp Cluster Rearview 36 Fuse Spare Blue Mirror Compass 37 15 Amp Radio 46 10 Amp Adaptive Cruise Blue Red Control 38 20 Amp Power Outlet 47 10 Amp Adaptive Front Yellow Inside Arm Rest Red Lighting 40 Fuse Spare 48 m 20 Amp Active 41 Fuse Spare Yellow Suspension 42 30 Amp Rear Defrost id ese Pink 50 Fuse Spare ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 557 Cartridge Mini ar Cartridge Mini oer Cavity Fuse Fuse Description Cavity Fuse Fuse Description 51 20 Amp Front Heated 59 Fuse Spare Yellow Seats 60 Fuse Spare 52 10 Amp Heated 61 Fuse Spare Red Cupholders 62 Fuse Spare Rear Heated F Seat Switches Bn bius L Spare 53 10 Amp HVAC Module 64 25 a Rear Windows Red In Car Tempera Natura ture Sensor 65 10 Amp Airbag Module 54 z Fuse Spare Red 55 Fuse Spare 66 EE Pise Spare 56 Fuse Spare 67 m Run Sense ue 57 Fuse S D 68 15 Amp Ilumination 58 s m Airbag Module Blue Rear Sunshade e 558 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cartridge Mini Bes Cavity Fuse Fuse
62. Settings Audio Phone Bluetooth and SIRIUS Setup NOTE Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a time es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 337 When making a selection press the soft key to enter the desired mode Once in the desired mode press and release the preferred setting until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Once the setting is complete press the Back Arrow soft key to return to the previous menu or press the X soft key to close out of the settings screen Pressing the Up or Down Arrow soft keys on the right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or down through the available settings Display After pressing the Display soft key the following settings will be available e Display Mode When in this display you may select one of the auto display settings To change Mode status touch and release the Day Night or Auto soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key e Display Brightness With Headlights ON When in this display you may select the brightness with the headlights on Adjust the brightness with the and setting soft keys or by selecting any point on the scale between the and soft keys Then touch the arrow back soft key Display Brightness With Headlights OFF When in this display you may select the brightness with the headlights off Adjust the brightness with the and setting soft keys or by selecting any point on the scale
63. There are 18 preset messages 6 I ll call you later v While the list of defined messages are wie read you can o gt d EA SJ 5 n interrupt the system by pressing the WvVRbutton and Player Controls Climate Nav Lm saying the message you want to send ying 8e y List of Preset Messages After the system confirms that you want to send your message to John Smith your message will be sent 1 Yes 2 No 3 Okay 156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se So ON A OF A I can t talk right now Call me TII call you later I m on my way Thanks TII be late I will be lt number gt minutes late 11 12 13 14 15 See you in number minutes Stuck in traffic Start without me Where are you Are you there yet 16 I need directions 17 I m lost 18 See you later Bluetooth Communication Link Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the Uconnect Phone When this happens the connection can generally be reestablished by switching the mobile phone OFF ON Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth ON mode Power Up After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the ON or ACC position or after a language change you must wait at least fifteen seconds prior to using the system UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157 Voice Tree Main Menu The 32 name language specific phonebook will be used The phones paired
64. a pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and mode of the sound system Pressing the top of the rocker switch will increase the volume and pressing the bottom of the rocker switch will decrease the volume Pressing the center button will make the radio switch between the various modes available AM FM SAT CD HDD AUX VES etc The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a pushbutton in the center The function of the left hand control is different depending on which mode you are in The following describes the left hand control operation in each mode Radio Operation Pressing the top of the switch will Seek up for the next listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch will Seek down for the next listenable station ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 355 The button located in the center of the left hand control will tune to the next preset station that you have pro grammed in the radio preset pushbutton CD Player Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next track on the CD Pressing the bottom of the switch once will go to the beginning of the current track or to the beginning of the previous track if it is within one second after the current track begins to play If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the second track three times it will play the third etc The center button on the left side rocker switch has no function for a single disc CD player
65. a collision hurting one another badly Never use a lap shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person no matter what their size WARNING Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Continued THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 2 The seat belt latch plate is above the back of your seat 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and GHEp Weel ple and pull out the beli Slide te diust th t latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make poet MIS the belt go around your lap Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 3 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click 022636829 Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE EEEEEEEEEEEEEEIEIEIEIEIEIEIEIEIEIEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEENI WARNING WARNING Continued A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision You are more e A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly The lap portion could ride too high on your body possibly causing internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you A belt that is too loose will not protect you prop 4 erly In a sudden stop you could move too far likely to hit y
66. and a soft cloth Do not use rough or hard cloths Do not scratch or poke the sensors Otherwise you could dam age the sensors ParkSense amp System Usage Precautions NOTE Ensure that the front and rear bumper are free of snow ice mud dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system operating properly Jackhammers large trucks and other vibrations could affect the performance of ParkSense e When you turn ParkSense off the EVIC will display PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF Furthermore once you turn ParkSense off it remains off until you turn it on again even if you cycle the ignition key ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 263 e e e ParkSense when on will MUTE the radio when it is sounding a tone Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly taking care not to scratch or damage them The sensors must not be covered with ice snow slush mud dirt or debris Failure to do so can result in the system not working properly The ParkSense system might not detect an obstacle behind or in front of the fascia bumper or it could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind or in front of the fascia bumper Obstacles such as bicycle carriers trailer hitches etc must not be placed within 12 in 30 cm from the rear fascia bumper while driving the vehicle Failure to do so can result in the system misinterpreting a close obstacle as a sensor problem causing the SERVICE PARK ASSIST
67. are available across all languages Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 030772523 158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Phonebook Voice Tree Phonebook 1st Confirmation 2nd Confirmation Enter Location Entries Listed one Enter Location Enter Name Enter Location Current Number is played Enter New Number Entry is modified Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined Enter Number Phonebook New Entry Added 81c6bf80 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159 Voice Tree Setup Device Towing Confirmation Select Audio SMS Incoming Pi ts Devices me eae Caro o uem Confirmation will Select a language English Espanol Prompts temporarily or Francais override ER pin code Phones phone Select phone dete Ea et Enter Name of phone low promp pairing Phone System System Lists All Phones Deleted Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 030605540 160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Voice Commands Voice Commands Primary Alternate s Primary Alternate s zero all one call two cancel three confirmation prompts four continue five delete six dial seven download eight edit nine emergency star English plus
68. be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming Similar to this Canadian law some U S gate operators are designed to time out in the same manner 276 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or gate motor TL 2 Cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position Place the hand held transmitter 1 to 3 in 3 to 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to pro gram while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button while you press and release cycle your hand held transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink has successfully accepted the frequency signal The indi cator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully trained 4 Watch for the HomeLink indicator to change flash rates When it changes it is programmed It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases The garage door may open and close while you are programming Press and hold the programmed HomeLink button and observe the indicator light e If the indicator light stays on constantly program ming is complete and the garage door device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels If you unplugged the garage
69. between the and soft keys Then touch the arrow back soft key Set Language When in this display you may select one of three languages for all display nomenclature including the trip functions and the navigation system if equipped Touch the Set Language soft key and then touch the desired 338 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME language soft key until a check mark appears next to the language showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Units When in this display you may select to have the EVIC odometer and navigation system if equipped changed between US and Metric units of measure Touch US or Metric until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Voice Response Length When in this display you may change the Voice Re sponse Length settings To change the Voice Response Length touch the Brief or Detailed soft key until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Touchscreen Beep When in this display you may turn on or shut off the sound heard when a touch screen button soft key is pressed Touch the Touchscreen Beep soft key until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft ke
70. bhi Greig elle pea 518 en INDEX 593 Oil Synthetie 24 40 stand ten nessa ews 520 Overheating x ccf tadir celts bre gta akon Seay ears 484 SLAr nip secere priog a Enee RE Fed Ru a 372 Temperature Gauge ssnst s iles 320 Engine Oil Viscosity 2 i cvi ote R4 3 rs 519 Engine Oil Viscosity Chart lesus 519 Enhanced Accident Response Feature 70 Entry System Illuminated 21 Ethanol s 2 e004 s oh aes ah aes Ee EUR 456 Event Data Recorder llle 73 Exhaust Gas Caution 0 0 0 000 ees 98 Exhaust System 2 66 peep bee e nn 98 Exterior Folding Mirrors 00 111 Exterior Lighting 0 000 201 Exterior Lights oo ines eae e e eR 102 Filler Location Fuel llle 316 Filters Air Cleaner leen 521 Air Conditioning erregt erm Res 366 Engine Ol fcc Ohh oars alin bie urit ee nenas 520 Engine Oil Disposal 200 520 Flashers Hazard Warning ek hee em ed 484 TUM Signal 2 3 vise Ateneo rd aes des 102 Flash To Pass ssec mme 207 Flexible Fuel Vehicles Cruising Range vete cepere ur sad Oe ts 462 Engine Ol icis iore ae lak ple Soares 461 Fuel Requirements 0 000 460 Maintenance 293 tae a eee Ex Ga e Es 462 Replacement Parts 2 2 0 0 0 0 cee eee 462 Staring icio gis Selina OM aides ced ed sad ad 462 Flooded Engine Starting 205 375 Floor Console ie isses e ne 296 F
71. brake and shift can damage the drivetrain the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have engaged the transmission into the PARK position 394 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions You might lose control of the vehicle and have a collision CAUTION Towing the vehicle coasting or driving for any other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause severe transmission damage Refer to Recreational Towing in Starting And Operating and Towing A Disabled Vehicle in What To Do In Emergencies for further information DRIVE D This range should be used for most city and highway driving It provides the smoothest upshifts and down shifts and the best fuel economy The transmission automatically upshifts through underdrive first second and third gears direct fourth gear and overdrive fifth gear The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions When frequent transmission shifting occurs such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi tions in hilly terrain traveling into strong head winds or while towing heavy trailers use the AutoStick shift control refer to AutoStick in this section for further
72. but tons and a four way mirror control switch To adjust a mirror press either the L left or R right button to select the mirror that you want to adjust NOTE A light in the select button will illuminate indi cating the mirror is activated and can be adjusted Using the mirror control switch press on any of the four arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to move Power mirror preselected positions can be controlled by the optional Memory Seat Feature Refer to Driver Memory Seat in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Power Folding Outside Mirrors If Equipped The switch for the power folding mirrors is located between the power mirror switches L left and R right Press the switch once and the mirrors will fold in pressing the switch a second time will return the mirrors to the normal driving position NOTE If the vehicle speed is greater than 10 mph 16 km h the folding feature will be disabled If the mirrors are in the folded position and vehicle speed is equal or greater than 10 mph 16 km h they will automatically unfold Heated Mirrors If Equipped These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice This feature can be activated whenever you turn on the rear window defroster if equipped Some vehicles may not be equipped with rear window defroster in this case the heated mirrors will still fun
73. by seat belts and cargo is properly stowed BeltAlert can be enabled or disabled by your autho rized dealer Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend deactivating BeltAlert NOTE Although BeltAlert has been deactivated the Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate while the driver s or front passenger if equipped with BeltAlert seat belt remains unfastened ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 WARNING Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase the risk of injury in a collision Only use Seat Belts And Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts throughout their pregnancy Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision Seat Belt Extender If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage if equipped is in its lowest position your authorized dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender This extender should be used only if the existing belt is not long enough When it is not required remove the ex tender and store it when the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug and in the recommended seating posi
74. capac ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level The light will remain on until the cause is corrected NOTE The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi tions The vehicle should have service performed and the brake fluid level checked If brake failure is indicated immediate repair is necessary WARNING Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous Part of the brake system may have failed It will take longer to stop the vehicle You could have a collision Have the vehicle checked immediately Vehicles equipped with the Anti Lock Brake System ABS are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD In the event of an EBD failure the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light Immediate repair to the ABS system is required ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319 Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON RUN position The light should illuminate for ap proximately two seconds The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected If the light does not illuminate have the light inspected b
75. center position only ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85 Locating The LATCH Anchorages The lower anchorages are round bars that are found at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback below the anchorage sym bols on the seatback They are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint You will easily feel them if you run your finger along gap between the seatback and seat cushion 4 J LATCH Anchorages 86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Locating The LATCH Anchorages In addition there are tether strap anchorages E behind each rear seating position located in the panel between the rear seatback and the rear window These tether strap anchorages are un der a plastic cover with the tether anchorage symbol on it Tether Strap Anchorages LATCH compatible child restraint systems will be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the anchorage Forward facing child restraints and some rear facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap The tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap after it is attached to the anchorage en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87 Center Seat LATCH If a child restraint i
76. dangerous You Or The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea others could be badly burned by steam or boiling tures a driver interactive display that is located in the coolant You may want to call an authorized dealer i lt t ument cluster for service if your vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the hood yourself see Maintaining Your Vehicle Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph Fuel Economy ACG Ott N MEA 041041688 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se This system allows the driver to select a variety of useful The system allows the driver to select information by information by pressing the switches mounted on the pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering steering wheel The EVIC consists of the following Radio Info Fuel Economy Info Cruise Control Info Digital Vehicle Speed Trip Info Tire Pressure Vehicle Info Stored Warning Messages Turn Menu OFF 040909599 EVIC Steering Wheel Controls UP Button A Press and release the UP button to scroll up ward through the main menu and Vehicle Info and Trip Info sub menus Fuel Economy Ve hicle Info Tire PSI Cruise Messages Trip Info Vehicle Speed and Turn Menu OFF and sub menus DOWN Button Press and release the DOWN button to scroll V downward through the main menu and Vehicle Info and Trip Info sub menus
77. dne eta 317 Alarm Paine 2423224 42243594443 Gd 802 44 24 Alarm Security Alarm s peona ams se patama wa as 18 Alarm System Security Alarm 18 All Wheel Drive AWD 0 000005 400 Alterations Modifications Vehicle 7 Antifreeze Engine Coolant 00 532 Disposal ve date en PONCE eo P Det dts 535 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 4 408 Anti Lock Warning Light 00 316 Anti Theft Security Alarm Theft Alarm 18 Appearance Care assai aiia aare ANa ee 542 Arming Theft System Security Alarm 18 Assist Hill Start i csse aa ee Cah ee ed 414 Auto Down Power Windows 0 41 Automatic Door Locks 0 000000 33 Automatic Headlights llle 202 Automatic Oil Change Indicator 330 ee INDEX 589 Automatic Temperature Control ATC 363 Automatic Transmission 0000005 380 Adding Fluid 22 0 25 6082092i0eei eed e 540 JXutOSlck usu iE Ee ee bree eerte aie dee 396 Fluid and Filter Changes ocete m tiasa aaa 540 Eluid Change ee acting S er une eerta 540 Fluid Level Check 0 0005 539 Fluid Type i 22er eR e md 539 Special Additives 0 000 000 539 Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode 388 AMUOSUCK i ote ete ed RR RR ERE ee 396 Auto Unlock Doors llle 33 Auto Up Power Windows llle 41 Axle Fluid avare ead Rees 566
78. door opener device for programming plug it back in at this time ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 277 Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position 2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Do not release the button 3 Without releasing the button proceed with Canadian Gate Operator Programming Step 2 and follow all remaining steps Using HomeLink To operate press and release the programmed HomeLink button Activation will now occur for the programmed device i e garage door opener gate opera tor security system entry door lock home office light ing etc The hand held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time Security It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in your vehicle To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds until the red indicator flashes Note that all channels will be erased Individual channels cannot be erased The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active 278 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME Troubleshooting Tips If you are having trouble programming HomeLinkG here are some of the most common solutions Replace the battery in the original hand held trans mit
79. either the OFF READY or SET position While pressing the mode button a chime alerts the driver to the change of state from Adaptive Cruise Control to normal Cruise Control Cruise Ready will be displayed if the system was in ACC READY or ACC SET position Cruise Off will be displayed if the system was in the ACC OFF position To switch back to Adaptive Cruise Control mode press the MODE button a second time WARNING In the normal Cruise Control mode the system will not react to vehicles ahead In addition the proximity warning does not activate and no alarm will sound even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since Continued ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 251 WARNING Continued To Vary The Speed Setting neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the There are two ways to change the set speed vehicle to vehicle distance is detected Be sure to Use the accelerator pedal to adjust the vehicle to the maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and desired speed and press the SET button the vehicle ahead Always be aware which mode is pas d e Tap the RES or SET button to increase or decrease the set speed in 1 mph 1 km h increments respec tively Hold the RES or SET button for 5 mph 5 km h increments To Set A Desired Speed When the vehicle reaches the speed desired press the SET button and release The EVIC will display the set speed The system will disabl
80. five speed automatic transmissions 1 2 9 4 5 6 7 or 8 for eight speed automatic transmission and indicate the AutoStick feature has been engaged and the gear selected is displayed For further information on AutoStick refer to Starting And Operating UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325 e Electronic Speed Control ON refer to Electronic Speed Control in Under standing The Features Of Your Vehicle e Electronic Speed Control SET refer to Electronic Speed Control in Under standing The Features Of Your Vehicle e Adaptive Cruise Control ACC ON This telltale will illuminate when the ACC is ON For further information refer to Adap tive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle This telltale will illuminate when the electronic speed control is ON For further information This telltale will illuminate when the electronic speed control is SET For further information 326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL e Adaptive Cruise Control ACC SET This telltale will illuminate when the ACC is SET For further information refer to Adap tive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle EVIC Amber Telltales This area will show reconfigurable amber caution tell tales These telltales include e Forward Collision Warning FCW OFF FCW This telltale informs the driver that the For OFF ward Collision
81. from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Information Provided by DEALER WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS ll HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS 484 Mi JUMP STARTING PROCEDURES 496 E IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS 484 Preparations For Jump Start 497 E WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE Jump Starting Procedure SPECIFICATIONS 0 00 0000 eee 485 E FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE Torque Specifications 6 486 E SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE 5 SPEED E JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING 487 TRANSMISSION 0000 0 eee Jack Location Spare Tire Stowage 488 MH MANUAL PARK RELEASE 8 SPEED D Preparations For Jacking 000 490 TRANSMISSION 2x res RE EAD S 503 Jacking And Changing A Tire s 491 ll TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE 506 Road Tire Installation 496 484 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES EE HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the center of the instrument panel between the center air outlets Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning flashers When the switch is activated all direc tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency Press the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning flashers This is an emergency warning system a
82. gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal e When leaving the vehicle always remove the key fob and lock your vehicle speed Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal NOTE You must press and hold the brake pedal while shifting out of PARK WARNING Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle As with all vehicles you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running Before exiting a vehicle always apply the parking brake shift the transmission into Continued Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 379 WARNING Continued e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Children should be warned not to touch the park ing brake brake pedal or the shift lever Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN mode A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Key Ignition Park Interlock This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter lock which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the engine can be turn
83. happens pull the switch lightly to the Push the wi itch firml h first detent and hold to close the window manually Eis ou cnb ue element ay S Ap dar detent to open the window completely and continue to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds WARNING after the window is fully open There is no anti pinch protection when the window window Lockout Switch is almost closed Be sure to clear all objects from the window before closing The window lockout switch on the driver s door trim panel allows you to disable the window controls on the rear passenger doors and the rear sunscreen if equipped E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 To disable the window controls and the rear sunscreen press and release the window lockout button setting it in the DOWN position To enable the window controls and the rear sunscreen press and release the window lockout button again setting it in the UP position 021935321 Window Lockout Switch Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open then open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with
84. help protect an occupant during a side impact The SAB is marked with an air bag label sewn into the outboard side of the front seats 022641517 Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bag Label THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 When the air bag deploys it opens the seam between the front and side of the seat s trim cover Each air bag deploys independently a left side impact deploys the left air bag only and a right side impact deploys the right air bag only Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC SABIC air bags may offer side impact protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants in addition to that provided by the body structure Each air bag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential for side impact head injuries The curtains deploy downward covering both windows on the impact side 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es The system includes side impact sensors that are cali brated to deploy the side air bags during impacts that require air bag occupant protection WARNING R e Your vehicle is equipped with left and right Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the location of the SABIC The area where the SABIC is located should remain 022530032 free from any obstructions Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABI
85. hold the brake pedal while pressing the ENGINE START STOP button once 374 STARTING AND OPERATING Se 3 The system takes over and attempts to start the vehicle If the vehicle fails to start the starter will disengage automatically after 10 seconds 4 If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to the engine starting press the button again NOTE Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE START STOP Button 1 Place the shift lever shift selector in PARK then press and release the ENGINE START STOP button 2 The ignition switch will return to the OFF position 3 If the shift lever shift selector is not in PARK the ENGINE START STOP button must be held for two seconds and vehicle speed must be above 5 mph 8 km h before the engine will shut off The ignition switch position will remain in the ACC position until the shift lever shift selector is in PARK and the button is pressed twice to the OFF position If the shift lever shift selector is not in PARK and the ENGINE START STOP button is pressed once the EVIC if equipped will display a Vehicle Not In Park mes sage and the engine will remain running Never leave a vehicle out of the PARK position or it could roll NOTE If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN engine not running position and the transmission is in PARK the system will aut
86. if used for long periods of time Front Heated Seat Operations Uconnect 8 4 and 8 4 Nav Continued Pri D H Al Nav Phone More ay Player OFF SJ Controls Climate Controls Soft Key Press the Driver or Passenger seat soft key ay once to select HI level heating Press the soft key a second time to select LO level heating Press the soft key a third time to shut the heating elements OFF UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187 4 P FM 95 5 C SN Screen OFF Controls Driver HI iios H ioniad Heated Wheel Passenger toate We ul LI 6FB Climate t w More Radio Player Controls Phone Heated Seats Soft Keys NOTE Once a heat setting is selected heat will be felt within two to five minutes When the Hl level setting is selected the heater will provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes of operation Then the heat output will drop to the normal Hl level If the Hl level setting is selected the 188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M system will automatically switch to LO level after ap proximately 60 minutes of continuous operation At that time the display will change from HI to LO indicating the change The LO level setting will turn OFF automati cally after approximately 45 minutes Vehicle Equipped With Remote Start On models that are equipped with remote start the driver s heated seat
87. in safe driving conditions following all applicable laws including laws regarding phone use Your at tention should be focused on safely operating the vehicle Failure to do so may result in an accident causing serious injury or death The Uconnect Phone is driven through your Bluetooth Hands Free Profile mobile phone Uconnect features Bluetooth technology the global standard that enables different electronic devices to connect to each other without wires or a docking station so Uconnect Phone works no matter where you stow your mobile phone be it your purse pocket or briefcase as long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle s Uconnect Phone The Uconnect Phone allows up to ten mobile phones or audio devices to be linked to the system Only one linked or paired mobile phone and one audio device can be used with the system at a time The system is available in English Spanish or French languages Uconnect Phone Button The Uconnect Phone w Button is used to get into the phone mode and make calls show recent incoming outgoing calls view phone book etc When you press the button you will hear a BEEP The beep is your signal to give a command 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Uconnect Voice Command Button The Uconnect Voice Command Sve Button is 4 VR only used for barge in and when you are already in a call and you want to send T
88. in the Voice Recognition Quick Reference section Automatic download and update of a phone book if supported begins as soon as the Bluetooth wireless phone connection is made to the Uconnect Phone for example after you start the vehicle A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be down loaded and updated every time a phone is connected to the Uconnect Phone Depending on the maximum number of entries down loaded there may be a short delay before the latest downloaded names can be used Until then if avail able the previously downloaded phonebook is avail able for use Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile phone is accessible This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or deleted on the Uconnect Phone These can only be edited on the mobile phone The changes are trans ferred and updated to Uconnect Phone on the next phone connection ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 Managing Your Favorite Phonebook 68 af FM 91 7 10 10 Nw 54 out There are three ways you can add an entry to your ee Y oes Mone romano Favorite Phonebook alas Ana Conda Add to Favorites P 248 123 4567 1 During an active call of a number to make a favorite F 248 456 7891 touch and hold a favorite button on the top of the phone main screen a 248 577 6215 2 After loading the mobile phonebook select phone book from the Phone main screen then select the e gt Ae 1 appropriate
89. include LOW MEDIUM and HIGH The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM To make your selection touch the ParkSense Chime Volume soft key until a check mark appears next to setting indicating that the setting had been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu ParkSense will retain its last known configura tion state through ignition cycles e Tilt Mirrors In Reverse If Equipped When this feature is selected the outside sideview mir rors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the RUN position and the transmission shift lever is in the RE VERSE position The mirrors will move back to their previous position when the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE To make your selection touch the Tilt Mirrors In Reverse soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu 342 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se e Blind Spot Alert If Equipped When this feature is selected the Blind Spot Alert feature can be set to Off Lights or Lights and Chime The Blind Spot Alert feature can be activated in Lights mode When this mode is selected the Blind Spot Monitor BSM system is activated and will only show a visual alert in the outside mirrors When Lights amp Chime mode is activated the Blind Spot Monitor BSM will show a visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as an au
90. level can cause severe transmis sion damage Fluid And Filter Changes 5 Speed Transmission Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper main tenance intervals In addition change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes contaminated with water etc or if the transmission is disassembled for any reason Fluid And Filter Changes 8 Speed Transmission Under normal operating conditions the fluid installed at the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 541 life of the vehicle Routine fluid and filter changes are not required However change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes contaminated with water etc or if the trans mission is disassembled for any reason All Wheel Drive AWD If Equipped The all wheel drive system consists of a transfer case and front differential The exterior surface of these compo nents should be inspected for evidence of fluid leaks Confirmed leaks should be repaired as soon as possible The transfer case fluid fill inspection plug is located in the middle of the rear housing To inspect the transfer case fluid level remove the fill inspection plug The fluid level should be even with the bottom of the hole Use this plug to add fluid as required The front differential fill plug is located on the outer cover near the halfshaft attachment To inspect the differ ential fluid level remove the fill plug The fluid level shou
91. locks to operate If a door is open and the ignition is in the ACC or ON RUN position a chime will sound as a reminder to remove the Key Fob E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 Automatic Door Locks If Equipped The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled When enabled the door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle s speed exceeds 15 mph 24 km h The auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer Please see your authorized dealer for service Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if 1 The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en abled 2 The vehicle was in motion then speed returned to 0 mph 0 km h and the transmission shift lever is placed in PARK 3 The driver door is opened 4 The doors were not previously unlocked Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit Programming To change the current setting refer to Uconnect Set tings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information NOTE Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature in accordance with local laws Child Protection Door Lock System Rear Doors To provide a safer environment for small children riding in the rear seats the rear doors are equipped with Child Protection Door Lock system 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M To Engage Or Disengage The Child Protection WARNI
92. message to be displayed in the EVIC CAUTION e ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to recognize every obstacle including small obstacles Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not detected at all Obstacles located above or below the sensors will not be detected when they are in close proximity The vehicle must be driven slowly when using ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected When backing up it is recommended that the driver looks over his her shoulder when using ParkSense 264 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME WARNING e Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using the ParkSense Park Assist system Always check carefully behind your vehicle look behind you and be sure to check for pedestrians animals other vehicles obstructions and blind spots before backing up You are responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your surroundings Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death Continued WARNING Continued Before using the ParkSense Park Assist system it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the ve hicle when the vehicle is not used for towing Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia when the warning display turns on
93. number Touch the next to the selected e J ca Nae Sw o aL number to display the options pop up In the pop up SEEE AREO Boe NOTE If the Favorites list is full you will be asked to remove an existing favorite 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 3 From the Phone main screen select phonebook From IEEEPVIPEEVETEE 10 10 NW 54 out the phonebook screen select the Favorites soft key Phonebook gt Favorite ane and then select the soft key located to the right of the Em ENIGENES REETA phonebook record Select an empty entry and touch Moone the on that selected entry When the Options pop up Favornes appears touch Add from Mobile You will then be asked which contact and number to choose from your mobile phonebook When complete the new favorite Empty Mom s Cell Emergency Towing Assistance will be shown 6 home ins Hat 1 EN T C MW o s Radio Player So s Climate hone More To Remove A Favorite e To remove a Favorite select phonebook from the Phone main screen e Next select Favorites on the left side of the screen and then touch the Options soft key ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 e Touch the next to the Favorite you would like to remove 68 yf FM 91 7 p 10 10 Nw Phonebook gt Favorites 54 out Options amp Voicemail FT Remove from Favs E Buddy s Pizza E Mom s Cell Emergency items in list Py
94. of Tires 0 0000 438 Air Pressure 2252 ae ae dle ce wae al d 429 Chains e235 oe bende eee Hee eee Re gaa 441 Changing o scans edes mee e dente eared 487 Compact Spare llle eese 435 General Information l l een 429 High Speed ee lienem we ecd 432 Inflation Pressures 2 0 0 eee eee 430 Jakin ee oem nre Re C CR em d 487 lite Of Dt S 5 ke dope RS Ru EUR S hd 438 Load Capacity esie ren rb eR ES 425 Pressure Monitor System TPMS 444 Pressure Warning Light 313 Quality Grading 4 x d ua ege ein 583 Radial se 244 060 es eb Rh eT RE d 432 Replacement i5 ius der yes PEE 439 Rotation 4 62s Gia ee RETE e RR Heec gd 442 Daley s eto gue dey Mises ge dias gle aaa feq ad 418 UL P P 420 SNOW TIES e pa ee m epe RE Pd EA REGE d 433 Spate Tite xs Cedere se Rer P ae ead 488 Spinning ia deos hoes eae Rd aged 437 Trailer Towing llle 476 Tread Wear Indicators lille 438 Tire Safety Information llle 418 Tongue Weight Trailer Weight 472 To Open Hood epe soa ahs Soha e RR Sees 199 en INDEX 605 TOWING ed asc eni doe rem C hate ac s 468 Disabled Vehicle llli 506 Guide 423 3 Sesto 8 S bs d E RS E rad 472 Recreational 2 00 0 cee ee eee 481 Weight ecce eve Bat Rees d 472 TEACLIOD s 2 3 dnd S rire RT CR Pes RR P redd 401 Traction Control 224 22524 Road uc ok us 410 Trailer T
95. only available in AM FM mode AM FM Satellite mode in Satellite mode Audio will change to the AM or FM frequency or Satellite Channel stored in preset 5 0475002181 Audio will Audio will Audio will change to the change to change to next Satellite satellite station Satellite Rock Station 80 s on 8 Channel 8 Audio will change to 950 AM Hn UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173 NOTE 1 You can replace 950 AM with any other AM or FM frequency such as 98 7 FM 2 You can replace 80 s on 8 with any other satellite station name received by the radio mm 3 You can replace 8 with any other satellite channel number received by the radio 4 You can replace rock with any of the satellite music types NOTE Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and shaded grey 174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Uconnect Hands Free Music Control These commands can be spoken when playing music from your SD card USB device CD or iPod after pushing the Uconnect voice command button SVR on the steering wheel Ragtime Favorites Joplin Tunes Auto Podcast Radio wil play Radio will play Radio will play the Radio wil play Radio will play the PAd wal Play Me Radiowil play the Artist Scott Song Maple Leaf the Playlist Party Podcast Weekly sg Rag Jekyll and Mr track 8 030563046 Hn UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175
96. or death when inhaled e Trunk closed e Keep Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitters e HAZARD switch off away from children Operation of the Remote Start System windows door locks or other controls e BRAKE switch inactive brake pedal not pressed could cause serious injury or death ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped The following messages will display in the EVIC if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prema turely Remote Start Aborted Door Ajar Remote Start Aborted Hood Ajar e Remote Start Aborted Trunk Ajar e Remote Start Aborted Fuel Low e Remote Start Disabled Start Vehicle To Reset The EVIC message stays active until the ignition is cycled to the ON RUN position To Enter Remote Start Mode Press and release the REMOTE START button on x2 the RKE transmitter twice within five seconds The vehicle doors will lock parking lights will flash and the horn will chirp twice if pro grammed Then the engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle NOTE e If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low the vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds e The park lamps will turn on and remain on during Remote Start mode e For security power window and power sunroof op eration if equipped are disabled wh
97. paint and decals Special Care If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near the ocean hose off the undercarriage at least once a month e It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors rocker panels and trunk be kept clear and open 544 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M e e e If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint touch them up immediately The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar cause that destroys the paint and protective coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner If you carry special cargo such as chemicals fertilizers de icer salt etc be sure that such materials are well packaged and sealed If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as possible Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle Wheel And Wheel Trim Care All wheels and wheel trim especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion To remove heavy soil and or excessive brake dust use MOPAR Wheel Cleaner CAUTION Do not use scouring pads steel wool a bristle brush or metal polishes Do not use
98. programming your RKE transmitters you must select the Memory To FOB feature through the Uconnect system screen Refer to Customer Program mable Features Uconnect Access 8 4 Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further in formation ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197 To program your RKE transmitters perform the following 1 Remove the Key Fob from the ignition or change the ignition to OFF for vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go Select desired memory profile 1 or 2 The system will recall any stored settings for this profile Wait for the system to complete the memory recall before continuing to Step 3 Once the profile has been recalled press and release the SET S button on the memory switch then press and release button 1 or 2 accordingly Memory Profile Set 1 or 2 will display in the instrument cluster on vehicles equipped with the EVIC Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter within 10 seconds NOTE Your RKE transmitters can be unlinked to your memory settings by following steps 1 4 above and press ing the UNLOCK button instead of LOCK on the RKE transmitter in Step 4 Memory Position Recall NOTE The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory positions If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in PARK a message will display in the EVIC if equipped To recall the memory settings for driver one pre
99. pue bs oad tee ed do tenn ed 441 Changing A Flat Tire 0 000 487 Chart lire Sizing eei aca ae ae a ka isa wee 420 Check Engine Light Malfunction Indicator Light 315 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety 98 Checks Salet ssa sen dae E eed ute aed 98 Child Restraint lees 74 Child Safety Locks ssec keas be ste res 33 Clean Air Gasoline llle 456 Cleaning I C c 544 Climate Control llis 356 ang p r PTT 352 Coin Holder 22 22 soiree 296 Cold Weather Operation 0 0 375 Compact Disc CD Maintenance 355 Compact Spare Tire css estries iener insid 435 Computer Trip Travel 0 000 333 Connector MCT rete aha dives aly ghee ha SOR n ed ed 352 Universal Consumer Interface UCI 352 Conserving Fuel 0 0 ine aeaa a e aaa 331 Console Floor nannan naaa aaa 296 Contract Services s lu eed x e a A 580 Coolant Pressure Cap Radiator Cap 534 Cooling System v5 css aea be e em CR ee 531 Adding Coolant Antifreeze 533 Coolant Capacity eas dre eres 564 nn INDEX 591 Coolant Level 14 93 aa Saws tes 531 Disposal of Used Coolant 535 Drain Flush and Refill 0 532 INSPECHON 3c pacer enl Rs Roe Rs seite DESS 535 Points to Remember sls 536 Pressure Cap uv dere ath tine gatas den 534 Radiator Cap 924 RR ee Re oe 534 Selectio
100. radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this warning may temporarily occur NOTE If the ACC Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle warning is active Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control is still available For additional information refer to Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control Mode in this section If weather conditions are not a factor the driver should examine the sensor It may require cleaning or removal of an obstruction The sensor is located in the center of the vehicle behind the lower grille 244 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se To keep the ACC System operating properly it is impor tant to note the following maintenance items e Always keep the sensor clean Carefully wipe the sensor lens with a soft cloth Be cautious not to damage the sensor lens Do not remove any screws from the sensor Doing so could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and require a sensor realignment e If the sensor is damaged due to a collision see your authorized dealer for service Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor including transparent material or aftermarket grilles Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or malfunction When the condition that deactivated the system is no longer present the system will return to the Adaptive Cruise Control Off state and will resume function by simply reactivating it NOTE Installing a vehicle front end protecto
101. saas 195 lou satia hte 182 Rear Folding ya sac eae sete ORI as 193 Seatback Release llle 193 Til ng 253i rk OPA DER Rae 182 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 18 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze Ls 565 Sentry Key Immobilizer 16 Sentry Key Programming 00004 18 Sentry Key Replacement 000 17 Service Assistance 6 ss 577 Service Contract ese eese a e 580 Service Engine Soon Light Malfunction Indicator 315 Service Manuals eee 582 setting the Clock oi cae ese eme e 352 Sh f ng i oh ase PGR eae oe ru 377 Automatic Transmission sss 377 Shift Lever Override llli 502 Shoulder Belts 1 4 ted tinea t wea a 50 Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage 54 Side Aumbag sspe EE ICQ Ereignis d 69 en INDEX 603 Side View Mirror Adjustment 111 Signals TUA s piures Ee Been ORT S AR 102 SmartBeams egati eread r eee 203 Snow Chains Tire Chains nananana aaa 441 SNOW JiteS 2500 840 be 9 RR de epei EYES 433 Spare ir a e ae deba E a der RR seared 435 Spark Plugs ode eb douna eoe eee gon 565 Specifications F el Gasoline 4 04 gue E Rees 565 Olla eR ees e EP SY ERE SS 565 Speed Control Cruise Control sss 224 Speedometer xus seras po damag ENG Ea 316 Sport Mode ss sche er E HR eer sc pne Ra 316 Staring iss ses s a Re c Re ae r
102. screen For example you can say Show NFL Schedule and results or Show NCAA Basketball AP top 25 or Show Major League Baseball Teams 3 You can also say Show Current Weather or Show extended weather or Show five day forecast or Show ski info to get other forecasts NOTE Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and shaded grey 178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Uconnect Voice Command Non phone Universal amp Mode Commads The commands can be spoken on any screen when not on a phone call after pushing the Uconnect voice command button evr on the steering wheel Navigation Cancels Route listening to Guidance your voice Prompt is command repeated Player Home screen will be shown on the touch screen 0415006220 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179 NOTE 1 Only available with Navigation equipped vehicles 2 You can replace Player with Radio Navigation Phone Climate More or Settings 3 Navigation commands only work if equipped with 3 Navigation NOTE Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and shaded grey 180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Uconnect Voice Command Navigation Universal Commands The commands can be spoken on any screen when not on phone call after pushing the Uconnect voice command button of vr on the steering wheel
103. seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened The seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABIC to protect the driver front and rear passengers sitting next to a window The SABIC air bags are located above the side windows and their covers are labeled SRS AIRBAG This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB to provide enhanced protection for an occupant during a side impact The Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags are located in the outboard side of the front seats NOTE Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during air bag deployment e After any collision the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer immediately Air Bag System Components Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag system components Occupant Restraint Controller ORC e Air Bag Warning Light e Steering Wheel and Column Instrument Panel e Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag Knee Impact Bolsters Driver Advanced Front Air Bag Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag e Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es e Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABIC WARNING e
104. should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid Please do not use polishes oils cleaning fluids solvents deter gents or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition 546 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm CAUTION Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol based and or Keton based cleaning products to clean leather seats as damage to the seat may result Cleaning Headlights Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog lights if equipped that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output avoid wiping with a dry cloth To remove road dirt wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing Do not use abrasive cleaning components solvents steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR Glass Cleaner or any commercial household type glass cleaner Never use an abrasive type cleaner Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win
105. small children to operate the sunroof Never allow your fingers other body parts or any 034435149 object to project through the sunroof opening Injury may result CommandView Sunroof and Power Shade Switches 284 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Opening Sunroof Express Press the switch rearward and release it within one half second The sunroof and sunshade will open automati cally from any position The sunroof and sunshade will open fully and stop automatically This is called Express Open During Express Open operation any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof Opening Sunroof Manual Mode To open the sunroof press and hold the switch rearward to full open Any release of the switch will stop the movement The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and held rearward again Closing Sunroof Express Press the switch forward and release it within one half second and the sunroof will close automatically from any position The sunroof will close fully and stop automati cally This is called Express Close During Express Close operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Closing Sunroof Manual Mode To close the sunroof press and hold the switch in the forward position Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially closed condition until the switch is pushed a
106. than 85 in your vehicle It will cause difficulty in cold starting and may affect drivability STARTING AND OPERATING 463 ADDING FUEL P 1 Press the fuel filler door release switch located in the driver s door map pocket Fuel Filler Door NOTE In certain cold conditions ice may prevent the 0568371798 fuel door from opening If this occurs lightly push on the fuel door to break the ice buildup and re release the fuel door using the inside release button Do not pry on the door Fuel Filler Door Release Switch 2 Open the fuel filler door 464 STARTING AND OPERATING 3 There is no fuel filler cap A flapper door inside the pipe seals the system 4 Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe the nozzle opens and holds the flapper door while refuel ing NOTE Only the correct size nozzle opens the latches allowing the flapper door to open 5 Fill the vehicle with fuel when the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full 6 Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel door NOTE A funnel is provided located in the trunk in the spare tire area to open the flapper door to allow for emergency refueling with a gas can Fuel Funnel CAUTION To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top off the fuel tank after filling ee STARTING AND OPERATING 465 WARNING Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release If you are unable to open the fuel filler door use
107. that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas sengers from XXX Ibs or XXX kg es STARTING AND OPERATING 427 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of NOTE cargo and luggage load capacity For example if XXX amount equals 1 400 Ibs 635 kg and there will be five 150 Ib 68 kg passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 Ibs 295 kg since 5 x 150 750 and 1400 750 650 lbs 295 kg Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle The following table shows examples on how to calcu late total load cargo luggage and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs 892 kg 428 STARTING AND OPERATING Ses Combined weight of AVAILABLE TOTAL FRONT REAR occupants and cargo Comb
108. the engine operating temperature is satisfactory the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month When additional engine coolant antifreeze is needed to maintain the proper level only OAT coolant that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 12106 should be added to the coolant bottle Do not overfill 536 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Points To Remember NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles kilometers of operation you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment This is nor mally a result of moisture from rain snow or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor ized when the thermostat opens allowing hot engine coolant antifreeze to enter the radiator If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be safely driven The vapor will soon dissipate Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant expansion bottle If engine coolant antifreeze needs to be added the contents of the coolant expansion bottle must also be protected against freezing If frequent engine coolant antifreeze additions are required the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks Maintain engine coolant antifreeze concentration at a minimum of 50 OAT coolant conforming to MS 12106 and distilled water for proper corrosion protec
109. the system determines a collision with the vehicle in front of you is no longer probable the warning message will be deactivated NOTE The minimum speed for FCW activation is 10 mph 16 km h ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 253 WARNING Forward Collision Warning FCW is not intended to avoid a collision on its own nor can FCW detect every type of potential collision The driver has the responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle via braking and steering Failure to follow this warning could lead to serious injury or death Changing FCW Status The FCW feature can be set to far set to near or turned off using the Uconnect System refer to Uconnect Set tings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information The FCW Status Off Near or Far will be displayed in the Uconnect display The default status of FCW is the Far setting this allows the system to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are farther away This gives you the most reaction time Changing the FCW status to the Near setting allows the system to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are much closer This setting provides less reaction time than the Far setting which allows for a more dynamic driving experience Changing the FCW status to Off prevents the system from warning you of a possible collis
110. the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads When hauling cargo or towing a trailer do not overload your vehicle or trailer Overloading can cause a loss of control poor performance or dam age to brakes axle engine transmission steering suspension chassis structure or tires Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 475 WARNING Continued WARNING Continued e Safety chains must always be used between your e Total weight must be distributed between the tow vehicle and trailer Always connect the chains to vehicle and the trailer such that the following four the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch ratings are not exceeded Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow B 1 Max loading as defined on the Tire and Load enough slack for turning corners ing Information placard 2 GTW 3 GAWR e Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade When parking apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in PARK Always block or chock the trailer wheels 4 Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch uti lized This requirement may limit the ability to always achieve the 10 to 15 range of tongue Continued weight as a percentage of total trailer weight e GCWR must not be exceeded Towing Requirements Tires Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact spare tire Proper tire inflation pressu
111. the interior surface of the window Keep all objects a safe distance from the window 7 Passenger Temperature Control Up Button Provides the passenger with independent temperature control Push the button for warmer temperature settings NOTE Pressing this button while in Sync mode will automatically exit Sync 8 Passenger Temperature Control Down Button Provides the passenger with independent temperature control Push the button for cooler temperature settings NOTE Pressing this button while in Sync mode will automatically exit Sync 9 SYNC Press the Sync soft key to toggle the Sync feature On Off The Sync indicator is illuminated when this feature is enabled Sync is used to synchronize the passenger 360 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se temperature setting with the driver temperature setting Changing the passenger temperature setting while in Sync will automatically exit this feature 10 Blower Control Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system There are seven blower speeds available Adjusting the blower will cause automatic mode to switch to manual operation The speeds can be selected using either hard keys or soft keys as follows Hard key The blower speed increases as you turn the control clockwise from the lowest blower setting The blower speed decreases as you turn the knob counter clockwise Soft key Use the small blower icon to reduc
112. the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall Refer to Tires General Information in Starting and Operating for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle s tires The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pres sure The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning limit for any reason including low temperature effects and natural pressure loss through the tire The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended cold placard pressure Once the low tire pressure warn ing Tire Pressure Monitoring TPM Telltale Light illu minates you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the TPM Telltale Light to turn off The system will automatically update and the TPM Telltale Light will turn off once the system receives the updated tire pressures The vehicle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 445 may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this informa tion For example your
113. these compo nents as the chemicals can damage your engine transmission power steering or air conditioning The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle Continued ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 517 CAUTION Continued Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty If a flush is needed because of component malfunction use only the specified fluid for the flushing procedure Engine Oil Checking Oil Level 3 6L Engine To assure proper engine lubrication the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level Check the oil level at regular intervals such as every fuel stop The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Maintain the oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on the dipstick Adding 1 0 qt 1 0 L of oil when the reading is at the MIN mark will result in MAX reading on these engines CAUTION Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or loss of oil pressure This could damage your engine Checking Oil Level 5 7L Engine To assure proper engine lubrication the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level Check the oil level at regular intervals such as every fuel stop The best time to check the engine oi
114. tire inflation pressure The manu facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva lent to the originals in size quality and performance when replacement is needed Refer to the paragraph on Tread Wear Indicators Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for the size designation of your tire The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original equipment tire sidewall See the Tire Sizing Chart ex ample found in the Tire Safety Information section of this manual for more information relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear tires as a pair Replacing just one tire can seriously affect your vehicle s handling If you ever replace a wheel make sure that the wheel s specifications match those of the original wheels It is recommended you contact your authorized tire or original equipment dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety handling and ride of your vehicle 440 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING WARNING Continued Do not use a tire wheel size or rating other than that specified for your vehicle Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus pension dimensions and performance characteris tics resulting in changes to steering handling a
115. to ensure proper performance See your local authorized dealer 204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME To Activate 1 Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO headlight position 2 Push the multifunction lever away from you toward front of vehicle to engage the high beam mode NOTE This system will not activate until the vehicle is at or above 15 mph 30 km h To Deactivate 1 Pull the multifunction lever toward you or rearward in car to manually deactivate the system normal operation of low beams 2 Push back on the multifunction lever once again to reactivate the system Adaptive Bi Xenon High Intensity Discharge Headlights If Equipped This system automatically swivels the headlight beam pattern horizontally to provide increased illumination in the direction the vehicle is steering NOTE e Each time the Adaptive Headlight System is turned on the headlights will initialize by performing a brief sequence of rotations e The Adaptive Headlight System is active only when the vehicle is moving forward The Adaptive Headlight System can be turned On or Off using the Uconnect System refer to Uconnect Set tings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205 Daytime Running Lights DRL The LED Daytime Running Lights will come on when ever the ignition is placed in the RUN position the headlights are
116. vehicle doors before you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Chil dren should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever Door Lock Knob Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or If the door lock knob is down when you shut the door in a location accessible to children A child could the door will lock Therefore make sure the Key Fob is operate power windows other controls or move not inside the vehicle before closing the door the vehicle 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es Power Door Locks A power door lock switch is on each front door trim panel Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors Power Door Lock Switch The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the Keyless Enter N Go Passive Entry system For further information refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle If you press the power door lock switch while the ignition is in the ACC or ON RUN position and any front door is open the power locks will not operate This prevents you from accidentally locking the Key Fob in the vehicle Cycling the ignition to the OFF position or closing the door will allow the
117. vehicle may have a recommended cold parked for more than three hours placard pressure of 30 psi 207 kPa If the ambient temperature is 68 F 20 C and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi 186 kPa a temperature drop to 20 F 7 C will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 23 psi 158 kPa This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the TPM Telltale Light Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi 186 kPa but the TPM Telltale Light will still be ON In this situation the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pres sure value CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system op eration or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the TPM sensor 446 STARTING AND OPERATING Se NOTE The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and
118. voice command is given You can also break the commands into parts and say each part of the command when you are asked for it For example you can use the compound command form voice command Search for John Smith or you can break the compound command form into two voice commands Search Contact and when asked John Smith Please remember the Uconnect Phone works best when you talk in a normal conversational tone as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet meters away from you Natural Speech Your Uconnect Phone Voice system uses a Natural Language Voice Recognition VR engine Natural speech allows the user to speak commands in phrases or complete sentences The system filters out certain non word utterances and sounds such as ah and eh The system handles fill in words such as I would like to The system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase or sentence such as make a phone call and to Kelly Smith For multiple inputs in the same phrase or sen tence the system identifies the topic or context and provides the associated follow up prompt such as Who do you want to call in the case where a phone call was requested but the specific name was not recognized 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se The system utilizes continuous dialog when the system requires more information from the user it will ask a question to which the user can respond without pressing the Voice Command Sve butt
119. webbing etc If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition replace the belt Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent mechanic inspect the com plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required 100 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M Air Bag Warning Light The light should come on and remain on for er four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the N ignition switch is first turned ON If the light is not lit during starting see your authorized dealer If the light stays on flickers or comes on while driving have the system checked by an authorized dealer Defroster Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoper able Floor Mat Safety Information Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your vehicle Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area unobstructed and that are firmly sec
120. when the battery is reconnected the exterior lights will flash the horn will sound If this occurs disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm Tamper Alert If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in your absence the horn will sound three times and the exterior lights will blink three times when you disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm Check the vehicle for tampering E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 Security System Manual Override The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the doors using the manual door lock plunger ILLUMINATED ENTRY IF EQUIPPED The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter to unlock the doors or open any door This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the outside mirrors if equipped Refer to Mirrors in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for fur ther information The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition is cycled to the ON RUN position from the OFF position NOTE e The front courtesy overhead console and door cour tesy lights will turn on if the dimmer control is in the Dome ON position extreme top position The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the dimmer control is in the Dome defeat position extreme bottom position REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RKE The RKE system allows you to lock or unl
121. when the driver s door is grasped With Passive Entry if 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is pro grammed touching the handle more than once will only result in the driver s door opening If driver door first is selected once the driver door is opened the interior door lock unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors or use RKE transmitter Passive Entry This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle s door s without having to press the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons To make your selection touch the Passive Entry soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 347 been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle e Memory To FOB If Equipped This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle To make your selection touch the Memory Linked To FOB soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu NOTE The seat will return to the memorized seat location if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set to ON when the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter is used to unlock the door Refer to Driver Memory Seat in Understa
122. will deactivate the front fog lights Turning the headlight switch off will also deactivate the fog lights An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates when the fog lights are turned on NOTE The fog lights will operate with the low beam headlights or parking lights on However selecting the high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights Multifunction Lever The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn signals headlight beam selection and passing lights The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering column 031563089 Multifunction Lever ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207 Turn Signals Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights NOTE e If either light remains on and does not flash or there is a very fast flash rate check for a defective outside light bulb If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defective e A Turn Signal On message will appear in the EVIC if equipped and a continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile 1 6 km with either turn signal on Lane Change Assist Tap the lever up or down once without moving beyond the detent and the turn signal right or left will flash three times then automatically turn off Hig
123. will turn off when the fault condition no longer exists A system fault can occur due to any of the following 1 Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains materials that may block radio wave signals Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors Vehicles With Full Size Spare 1 The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly has a TPM sensor that can be monitored by the TPMS If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition switch cycle a chime will sound and the TPM Telltale Light and LOW TIRE message will turn ON The Inflate to XX message will also be displayed Driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h will turn off the TPM Telltale Light and LOW TIRE message as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires ee STARTING AND OPERATING 449 Vehicles With Compact Spare 1 The compact spare tire does not have a TPM sensor Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a
124. wipers off when driving through an automatic car wash Damage to the windshield wipers may result if the wiper control is left in any position other than off In cold weather always turn off the wiper switch and allow the wipers to return to the Park posi tion before turning off the engine If the wiper switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the windshield damage to the wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is restarted Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the windshield wiper blades from returning to the off position If the windshield wiper control is turned off and the blades cannot return to the off position damage to the wiper motor may occur 214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Mist Feature Rotate the end of the lever downward to the Mist position to activate a single wipe cycle to clear off road mist or spray from a passing vehicle The wipers will continue to operate until you release the multifunction lever NOTE The mist feature does not activate the washer pump therefore no washer fluid will be sprayed on the windshield The wash function must be used in order to spray the windshield with washer fluid Windshield Washers To use the washer push the multifunction lever inward toward the steering column and hold it for as long as washer spray is desired If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper control is in the delay range the wipers will operate for two
125. would wear one and one half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart 584 significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road charac teristics and climate Traction Grades The Traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C These grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor mance WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M Temperature Grades The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grade
126. 472 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain Engine Transmission Frontal Area Max GTW Gross Max Tongue Weight Trailer Weight See Note 3 6L Automatic 22 sq ft 2 04 sq m 1 000 Ibs 454 kg 100 Ibs 45 kg 5 7L Automatic 32 sq ft 2 97 sq m 1 000 Ibs 454 kg 100 Ibs 45 kg Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds NOTE The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo and it should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard Refer to Tire Safety Information in Starting and Operating for further Trailer And Tongue Weight Always load a trailer with 60 to 65 of the weight in the front of the trailer This places 10 to 15 of the Gross Trailer Weight GTW on the tow hitch of your information vehicle Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer STARTING AND OPERATING 473 Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of Consider the following items when computing the many trailer collisions weight on the rear axle of the vehicle Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
127. 5 These garage door openers can be identified by the LEARN or TRAIN button located where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door opener It is NOT the button that is normally used to open and close the door The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer Training The Garage Door Opener 1 Door Opener 2 Training Button ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 273 T 2 Cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position Place the hand held transmitter 1 to 3 in 3 to 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to pro gram while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink button you want to program and the hand held trans mitter button Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi cator light The HomeLink indicator will flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink has received the frequency signal from the hand held transmitter Re lease both buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to rapid 5 At the garage door opener motor in the garage locate the LEARN or TRAINING button This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener device motor Firmly press and release the LEARN or TRAIN ING button On some garage door openers devices there may be a light that blinks when the garage door opener device is in the LEARN TRAIN mode NOTE Yo
128. ACC IF EQUIPPED Adaptive Cruise Control ACC increases the driving convenience provided by cruise control while traveling on highways and major roadways However it is not a safety system and not designed to prevent collisions 228 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant need to reset your cruise control ACC utilizes a radar sensor designed to detect a vehicle directly ahead of you NOTE e If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you ACC will maintain a fixed set speed e If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead ACC will apply limited braking or acceleration not to exceed the original set speed automatically to maintain a preset following distance while matching the speed of the vehicle ahead WARNING Adaptive Cruise Control ACC is a convenience system It is not a substitute for active driving involvement It is always the driver s responsibil ity to be attentive of road traffic and weather conditions vehicle speed distance to the vehicle ahead and most importantly brake operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road conditions Your complete attention is always re quired while driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision and death or serious personal injury Continued ee UNDERSTANDIN
129. ANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221 Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start On models that are equipped with remote start the heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on during a remote start Refer to Remote Starting Sys tem If Equipped in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information WARNING e Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use exhaus tion or other physical conditions must exercise care when using the steering wheel heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods Continued WARNING Continued Do not place anything on the steering wheel that insulates against heat such as a blanket or steering wheel covers of any type and material This may cause the steering wheel heater to overheat ADJUSTABLE PEDALS IF EQUIPPED The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow a greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and seat position This feature allows the brake accelerator and clutch pedals if equipped to move toward or away from the driver to provide improved position with the steering wheel 222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M The switch is located on the front side of the driver s seat Press the switch rearward to move the pedals rearward cushion side shield toward the driver
130. ARNING e Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle move ment and possible injury or damage e When leaving the vehicle always remove the key fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever Continued WARNING Continued Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN mode A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving failure to do so can lead to brake failure and a collision Always fully apply the parking brake when leav ing your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or injury Also be certain to leave the transmission in PARK Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury 408 STARTING AND OPERATING Se CAUTION If the Brake Warning Light remains on with the parking brake released a brake system malfunction is indicated Have the brake syst
131. ARNING Continued Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom mended cold tire inflation pressure Economy Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear pat terns to develop across the tire tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement Under inflation also increases tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride Both under inflation and over inflation affect the stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause erratic and unpredictable steering response Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the vehicle to drift left or right Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar or rear edge of the driver s side door At least once a month Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality pocket type pressure gauge Do not make a visual judge ment when determining proper inflation Tires may look properly inflated even when they are under inflated Inspect tires for signs o
132. AUTION Because of the reduced ground clearance do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a compact full size or limited use temporary spare installed Damage to the vehicle may result Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And Wheel If Equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel equivalent in look and function to the original equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle If your vehicle has this option refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation pattern Compact Spare Tire If Equipped The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter T or S preceding the size designation Example T145 80D18 103M T S Temporary Spare Tire Since this tire has limited tread life the original equip ment tire should be repaired or replaced and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire 436 STARTING AND O
133. Battery Posts WARNING e Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when ever the hood is raised It can start anytime the ignition switch is ON You can be injured by moving fan blades e Remove any metal jewelry such as rings watch bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent electrical contact You could be seriously injured Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive Keep open flames or sparks away from the battery 1 Set the parking brake shift the automatic transmission into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK 2 Turn off the heater radio and all unnecessary electri cal accessories 3 If using another vehicle to jump start the battery park the vehicle within the jumper cables reach set the parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF WARNING Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result en WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 499 Jump Starting Procedure 3 Connect the negative end of the jumper cable to the negative post of the booster battery KARNAG 4 Connect the opposite end of the negative jumper Failure to follow this procedure could result in per cable to the remote negative post of the vehicle with sonal injury or property damage due to battery ex the discharged battery plosion WARNING CAUTION Do not connect th
134. C Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects Label Location between you and the side air bags the performance NOTE could be adversely affected and or objects could be eee Xm ushed into you causing serious injury Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim P IM 8 Jury but they will open during air bag deployment e Being too close to the side air bags during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or killed en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 SAB and SABIC air bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint system Occupants including children who are up against or very close to SAB or SABIC air bags can be seriously injured or killed Occupants especially chil dren should not lean on or sleep against the door side windows or area where the SAB or SABIC air bags inflate even if they are in an infant or child restraint Always sit upright as possible with your back against the seat back use the seat belts properly and use the appropriate sized child restraint infant restraint or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag provides enhanced protection and works together with the Driver Advanced Front Air Bag during a frontal impact Knee Impact Bolsters The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and front passenger and position the front occu
135. C Shifting From REVERSE To DRIVE Bring the vehicle to a complete stop firmly press the brake pedal then pull the shift lever fully rearward and release when D is indicated in the EVIC To shift back into REVERSE from DRIVE bring the vehicle to a complete stop firmly press the brake pedal press the lock button on the shift lever then push the shift lever forward to the second detent and release when R is indicated in the EVIC ee STARTING AND OPERATING 383 Shifting From DRIVE To SPORT LOW Vehicles Equipped With SPORT Mode To shift from DRIVE to SPORT pull the shift lever rearward until S is displayed in the EVIC To shift back into DRIVE from SPORT pull the shift lever rearward until D is displayed in the EVIC Vehicles Equipped With LOW Mode To shift from DRIVE to LOW pull the shift lever rear ward until L is displayed in the EVIC To shift back into DRIVE from LOW pull the shift lever rearward until D is displayed in the EVIC Gear Ranges DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range NOTE After selecting any gear range wait a moment to allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating This is especially important when the engine is cold PARK P This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion Apply the parki
136. CHRYSLER 2014 500 Y OWNER S MANUAL VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada the name Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name Chrysler Canada Inc used in substitution therefore DRIVING AND ALCOHOL Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum If you are drinking don t drive Ride with a designated non drinking driver call a cab a friend or use public transportation WARNING Driving after drinking can lead to an accident Your percep tions are less sharp your reflexes are slower and your judg ment is impaired when you have been drinking Never drink and then drive This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications and or make additions to or improve ments to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured Copyright 2013 Chrysler Group LLC e SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE
137. CIES 503 MANUAL PARK RELEASE 8 SPEED TRANSMISSION WARNING Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the parking brake before activating the Manual Park Release Activating the Manual Park Release will allow your vehicle to roll away if it is not secured by the parking brake or by proper connection to a tow vehicle Activating the Manual Park Release on an unsecured vehicle could lead to serious injury or Shift Lever Override death for those in or around the vehicle 6 Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL position 051210780 In order to push or tow the vehicle in cases where the 7 The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL transmission will not shift out of PARK such as a dead battery a Manual Park Rel i ilable 8 Reinstall the rubber storage bin liner aA a ee Rene GNOIOIE 504 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Follow these steps to use the Manual Park Release 3 Using a small screwdriver or similar tool fish the tether 1 Firmly apply the parking brake strap up through the opening in the console base 4 Insert the screwdriver into the slot in the center of the lever and disengage the lever locking tab by pushing it to the right 2 Remove the console storage bin to access the Manual Park Release lever 061541305 061541306 Console Storage Bin Locking Tab While holding the locking tab in the disengaged position pull the tether strap to rotate the lever up and rearward until it locks in p
138. Continued ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 581 WARNING Continued birth defects or other reproductive harm In addi tion certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemi cals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm WARRANTY INFORMATION See the Warranty Information Booklet located on the DVD for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market MOPAR PARTS MOPAR fluids lubricants parts and accessories are available from an authorized dealer They are recom mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at its best REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In The 50 United States And Washington D C If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying the manufacturer If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your authorized dealer and the manufacturer To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 ITY 1 800 424 9153 or go to http
139. Description 69 m m Fuse Spare 70 z z Fuse Spare VEHICLE STORAGE If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21 days you may want to take these steps to protect your battery Disconnect the negative cable from the battery Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again REPLACEMENT BULBS All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass cartridge types Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and should not be used for replacement Interior Bulbs Bulb Number Rear Courtesy Reading W5W Lamps Rear Compartment 562 Trunk Lamp Overhead Console 578 Reading Lamps Visor Vanity Lamps A6220 Glove Box Lamp 194 If Equipped Door Courtesy 562 ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 559 Bulb Number Bulb Number Shift Indicator Lamp JKLE14140 Optional Door Map Pocket Cupholder LED Serviced at Authorized Dealer Daytime Running Lamp LED Serviced at Authorized Dealer replacement instructions For lighted switches see your authorized dealer for Front Fog Lamp If Equipped H11 Exterior Bulbs Front Sidemarker Lamp LED Serviced at Au
140. E 45 WARNING Continued trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended Once in the trunk young children may not be able to escape even if they entered through the rear seat If trapped in the trunk children can die from suffocation or heat stroke Trunk Emergency Release As a security measure a Trunk Internal Emergency Release lever is built into the trunk latching mechanism In the event of an individual being locked inside the trunk the trunk can be simply opened by pulling on the glow in the dark handle attached to the trunk latching mechanism Trunk Emergency Internal Release 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE BEEEEEEEEEEARMAMEEMAMAMMMEEMEE NNNM OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems Three point lap and shoulder belts for the driver and all passengers Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front passen ger Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABIC for the driver and passengers seated next to a window Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB An energy absorbing steering column and steering wheel Knee bolsters blockers for front seat occupants Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners that may enhance occupant protection by managing occupant energy during an impact event All seat belt systems except the driver s include Automatic Locking Retractors ALRs whi
141. EFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M Maintaining Your Air Bag System WARNING Modifications to any part of the air bag system could cause it to fail when you need it You could be injured if the air bag system is not there to protect you Do not modify the components or wiring including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel Do not modify the front bumper vehicle body structure or add aftermarket side steps or running boards e It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag system yourself Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system Continued WARNING Continued Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag system The air bag may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if modifications are made Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air bag system service If your seat including your trim cover and cushion needs to be serviced in any way including removal or loosening tightening of seat attachment bolts take the vehicle to your authorized dealer Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for persons with dis abilities contact your authorized dealer E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 Air Bag Warning Light You will want to have the air bags ready to inflate for your protecti
142. Front and Side Impact Sensors e No objects should be placed over or near the air bag on the instrument panel because any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a collision Advanced Front Air Bag Features severe enough to cause the air bag to inflate e Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers or attempt to open them manually You may damage the air bags and you could be injured because the air bags may no longer be functional The protective covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open only when the air bags are inflating Do not drill cut or tamper with the knee bolster in The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an any way impact that requires air bag deployment This low output Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster is used in less severe collisions A higher energy output is such as alarm lights stereos citizen band radios etc used for more severe collisions e Front Seat Belt Pretensioners Seat Belt Buckle Switch and Seat Track Position Sensors The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver and front passenger air bags This system provides output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC which may receive information from the front impact sensors Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB may provide enhanced protection to
143. Fuel Economy Vehicle Info Tire PSI Cruise Messages Trip Info Vehicle Speed and Turn Menu OFF and sub menus SELECT Button gt Press and release the SELECT button to access the information screens or sub menu screens of UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323 a main menu item Press and hold the SELECT button for two seconds to reset displayed selected features that can be reset BACK Button Press the BACK button to return to the main menu from an info screen or sub menu item BACK Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Displays The EVIC display consists of three sections 1 The top line where compass direction and outside temperature are displayed 2 The main display area where the menus and pop up messages are displayed 3 The reconfigurable telltales section 324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss The main display area will normally display the main menu or the screens of a selected feature of the main menu The main display area also displays pop up messages that consist of approximately 60 possible warn ing or information messages These pop up messages fall into several categories e Five Second Stored Message When the appropriate conditions occur this type of message takes control of the main display area for five seconds and then returns to the previous screen Most of the messages of this type are then stored as long as the condition that activated it remains active and c
144. G THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 229 WARNING Continued The ACC system Does not react to pedestrians oncoming vehicles and stationary objects e g a stopped vehicle in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle Cannot take street traffic and weather conditions into account and may be limited upon adverse sight distance conditions Does not always fully recognize complex driving conditions which can result in wrong or missing distance warnings Can only apply a maximum of 40 of the vehicle s braking capability and will not bring the vehicle to a complete stop WARNING You should switch off the ACC system When driving in fog heavy rain heavy snow sleet heavy traffic and complex driving situations e g in highway construction zones When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp when driving on roads that are winding icy snow covered slippery or have steep uphill or downhill slopes e When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes e When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a constant speed Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision and death or serious personal injury 230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE The Cruise Control system has two control modes e Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an appropriate distance between vehicles ing at a constant preset speed For additional informa tion refer to Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control Mode
145. GINE START STOP button and cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Without pressing the brake pedal push the ENGINE START STOP button once to return the ignition to the OFF LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure Fuel Economy Press and release the UP or DOWN button until Fuel Economy displays highlighted in the EVIC and press the SELECT button Press and release the UP DOWN buttons until one of the following Fuel Economy func tions displays in the EVIC e Average Fuel Economy Fuel Saver Mode e Distance To Empty DTE Miles Per Gallon MPG or L 100km es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331 Press the UP DOWN buttons to cycle through all the Trip Computer functions The Trip Functions mode displays the following informa tion NE ACC 70mph 102 Fuel Economy AVG 18 Reset DTE 234 Instant MPG 0 15 30 041068186 Fuel Economy Average Fuel Economy ECO Fuel Saver Mode If Equipped Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset When the fuel economy is reset the display will read RESET or show dashes for two seconds Then the history information will be erased and the averaging will continue from the last fuel average reading before the re
146. Grab The Door Handle When Locking transmitter lock button or the lock button located on the vehicle s interior door panel 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se WINDOWS There are single window controls on each passenger door trim panel which operate the passenger door windows The window controls will operate only when the ignition The window controls on the driver s door control all the is in the ACC or ON RUN position door windows Power Windows NOTE For vehicles equipped with the UconnectG the power window switches will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to the OFF position Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time is programmable Refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information WARNING Never leave children unattended in a vehicle and do not let children play with power windows Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle and do not Power Window Switches Continued E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 WARNING Continued leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN mode Occu pants particularly unattended children can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power window switches Such entrapment may re sult in serious injury or death AUTO Down Feature The driver door power window switch and some model passe
147. HINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89 WARNING Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the re straint The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the child restraint manufacturer s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with either a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor ALR or a cinching latch plate or both Both types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip The ALR retractor can be switched into a locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing retract back into the retractor If it is locked the ALR will make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into the retractor For additional information on ALR refer to the Automatic Locking Mode description un der Occupant Restraints The cinching latch plate is designed to hold the lap portion of the seatbelt tight when webbing is pulled tight and straight through a child restraint s belt path Please see the table below and the following sections for more information about both types of seat belts 90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Lap Shoulder Belt Systems for Installing Child Re
148. However when a multiple disc CD player is equipped on the vehicle the center button will select the next available CD in the player CD DVD DISC MAINTENANCE To keep a CD DVD in good condition take the following precautions 1 Handle the disc by its edge avoid touching the surface 2 If the disc is stained clean the surface with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge 3 Do not apply paper or tape to the disc avoid scratch ing the disc 4 Do not use solvents such as benzene thinner cleaners or anti static sprays 5 Store the disc in its case after playing 6 Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight 7 Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high 356 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se NOTE If you experience difficulty in playing a particular disc it may be damaged i e scratched reflective coating removed a hair moisture or dew on the disc oversized or have protection encoding Try a known good disc before considering disc player service RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES Under certain conditions the mobile phone being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the mobile phone antenna This condition is not harmful to the radio If your radio performance does not satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the antenna it is recommended that the radio volume be turned do
149. ICLE Se of time typically 30 seconds or less The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as How various systems in your vehicle were operating e Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled fastened e How far if at all the driver was depressing the accelerator and or brake pedal and How fast the vehicle was traveling These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur NOTE EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non trivial crash situation occurs no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data e g name gender age and crash loca tion are recorded However other parties such as law enforcement could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation To read data recorded by an EDR special equipment is required and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed In addition to the vehicle manufacturer other parties such as law enforcement that have the special equip ment can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR Child Restraints Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all times including babies and children Every state in the United States and every Canadian province requires that small children ride in proper restraint systems This is the law and you can
150. Indicated By Oil vals exceed 10 000 miles 16 000 km or twelve months Change Indicator System whichever comes first e Change oil and filter Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip e Rotate the tires Rotate at the first sign of irregu lar wear even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on Check engine oil level e Check windshield washer fluid level e Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as Check the tire inflation pressures and look for unusual required wear or damage e Inspect automatic transmission fluid if equipped Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir brake with dipstick master cylinder and power steering and fillas needed Inspect brake pads shoes rotors drums hoses and park brake e Check function of all interior and exterior lights z e Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses Required Maintenance Intervals e Inspect exhaust system M A l N T E N A N e E S e H E D U L E S 8 Refer to the maintenance schedules on the following Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or page for the required maintenance intervals off road conditions LU 570 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Sx A A W Maintenance Chart N i Mileage or time passed whichever comes first e e e ele ele el2 2 2 21 28 N o o olojojocl555 sss5sss2 sis A SIS ISISI 8 8 S 2 8 99 9 x Or Years 2 3 4 56 7
151. MENT CLUSTER PREMIUM 040340809 312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 1 Tachometer This gauge measures engine revolutions per minute RPM x 1000 2 Park Headlight ON Indicator If Equipped This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on 00 3 Turn Signal Indicators The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal when the turn signal lever is operated If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile 1 6 km with either turn signal on a continuous chime will sound to alert you to turn the signals off If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate check for a defective outside light bulb 4 Front Fog Light Indicator If Equipped O This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on 5 High Beam Indicator E This indicator shows that the high beam head lights are on Push the multifunction lever for ward to switch the headlights to high beam and pull toward yourself normal position to return to low beam 6 Odometer Display I Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Display Odometer Display The odometer display shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven U S Federal regulations require that upon transfer of vehicle ownership the seller certify to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven If your odometer needs to be repaired or
152. Mirrors If Equipped Heated Mirrors If Equipped Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped Slide On Rod And Extender Features Of Sun Visor ll BLIND SPOT MONITORING BSM IE EQUIPPED ced coesa man aa ok R ar Cross Paths uda ae Ps wes Q Modes Of Operation 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se E Uconnect Phone 84 84N sess 125 Power Lumbar If Equipped 185 Uconnect 8 4A 8 4N Sd were TIE 125 Heated Seats If Equipped eee ee ene 186 Operations sce acd tecto We 128 Ventilated Seats If Equipped 189 Phone Call Features 000 0 140 Head Restraints 0 00cccc cee eee 191 Uconnect Phone Features 145 Folding Rear Seat 0 00 00 cece euue 193 Advanced Phone Connectivity 150 lg DRIVER MEMORY SEAT IF EQUIPPED 195 Things You Should Know About Your Programming The Memory Feature 196 Uconnect Phone 0000 151 Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless General Information 4 167 Entry Transmitter To Memory l i 196 Bl VOICE COMMAND 000 0005 167 Memory Position Recall 197 Uconnect 8 4 8 4 INaV baie oS wt exer oes 167 Easy Entry Exit Seat Available With Uconnect amp Voice
153. NG Door Lock System 1 Open the rear door Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the Child Protection locks are engaged locked 2 Insert the tip of the emergency key into the lock and rotate to the LOCK or UNLOCK position NOTE For emergency exit from the rear seats when the Child Protection Door Lock System is engaged manually raise the door lock knob to the unlocked position roll down the window and open the door using the outside door handle 021835329 Child Protection Door Lock Function ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 KEYLESS ENTER N GO The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the vehicle s Remote Keyless Entry RKE system and a feature of Keyless Enter N Go This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle s door s without having to press the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons NOTE e Passive Entry may be programmed ON OFF refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instru ment Panel for further information If wearing gloves on your hands or if it has been raining on the Passive Entry door handle the unlock sensitivity can be affected resulting in a slower re sponse time If the vehicle is unlocked by the Passive Entry Door Handle and no door goes ajar within 60 seconds the vehicle will re lock and if equipped will arm the theft alarm To Unlo
154. OPERATING Tread Wear Indicators These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes 1 16 in 2 mm When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the tire should be replaced Refer to replacement tires in this section for further informa tion Life Of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be replaced e Driving style e Tire pressure e Distance driven 055007576 Performance tires tires with a speed rating of V or higher and summer tires typically have a reduced tread life Rotation of these tires per the vehicle main tenance schedule is highly recommended 1 Worn Tire 2 New Tire ee STARTING AND OPERATING 439 WARNING Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years regardless of the remaining tread Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death Keep dismounted tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and gasoline Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold
155. OWING iioa ati e rescREET E Redes 468 Cooling System Tips resessie Tiie watia 481 Hitches 240uske RR Goa ex P3 aa ae 471 Minimum Requirements 04 474 TAPS ia gus Gi nits pee gig RSG a a Rs tate eg 479 Trailer and Tongue Weight 472 Wiring sek e ee ee EROR eR Rak ERE 478 Trailer Towing Guide llle 472 Trailer Weights isse bea ceva ee ea is 472 Transfer Case llle 541 NIG arn eich teas arth ce siete ees eae Tt 541 Maintenance lee 541 Transmission Automatic v k ee Goh DER Bog dha ROPA dr cs 377 Pd cna aie bode PS ae hag edo 539 Maintenances oues aca Bk CU E BERE 539 SHINS n 377 Transmitter Battery Service Remote Keyless Entry 24 Transmitter Programming Remote Keyless Entry 21 Transmitter Remote Keyless Entry RKE 21 Tread Wear Indicators 0000000 438 Trip Odometer si 6 esac s m nns 312 Trunk Lid Deck Lid essre e besa genes bade 44 Trunk Release Emergency llle 45 Trunk Release Remote Control l l 44 lur 5ignals iros oq ier aos eee tane ceres 207 UCI Connecta ceeace ta sche eee ad e RES 352 Uniform Tire Quality Grades llus 583 Universal Consumer Interface UCI CONNECIOR zur eas bean ee Bad dn PR RR Cr cs 352 606 INDEX eae Unleaded Gasoline esi iasa iaa aea ea aei 455 Untwisting Procedure Seat Belt 55 Vanity Mirrors 2nes trenak gaa HS aaa aga E 114 Vehicle Certifica
156. PERATING Se Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any given time WARNING Compact spares are for temporary emergency use only With these spares do not drive more than 50 mph 80 km h Temporary use spares have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced Be sure to follow the warnings which apply to your spare Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control Full Size Spare If Equipped The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle but it is not This spare tire may have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the temporary use full size spare tire needs to be replaced Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire replace or repair the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity Limited Use Spare If Equipped The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use only This tire is identified by a label located on the limited use spare wheel This label contains the driving limitations for this spare This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle but it is not Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling Since
157. PHOLDERS sse 292 us ee T Les 2 Front Seat Cupholders 00 292 E REAR WINDOW FEATURES 302 Rear Scat APMC yarkc ipii al eee nae ae Rear Window Defroster 302 Ba STORAGE c cvenewsaacveriowe ete nt Rees 295 Pewee Sanshade d T sie ds eos 303 Glovebox Storages rovs sasar rdar eee eee 295 E LOAD LEVELING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED 305 Console Features i ces er iiaea 296 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE x MIRRORS Automatic Dimming Mirror This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you This feature will be defaulted on and only be disabled when the vehicle is moving in reverse NOTE This feature is disabled when the vehicle is moving in reverse 030436523 Automatic Dimming Mirror CAUTION To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 Outside Mirrors To receive maximum benefit adjust the outside mirror s to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror NOTE The passenger side convex outside mirror will give a much wider view to the rear and especially of the lane next to your vehicle WARNING Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side convex mirror will look smalle
158. Pressure Warning Telltale A7 This telltale indicates low engine oil pressure If the light turns on while driving stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible A chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns on Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected This light does not show how much oil is in the engine The engine oil level must be checked under the hood e Charging System Telltale This telltale shows the status of the electrical charging system If the telltale stays on or comes on while driving turn off some of the vehicle s non essential electrical devices or increase engine speed if at idle If the charging system telltale remains on it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY See an authorized dealer 328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL If jump starting is required refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emergencies e Electronic Throttle Control ETC Telltale This telltale informs you of a problem with the Xx Electronic Throttle Control ETC system If the telltale comes on while driving have the sys tem checked by an authorized dealer If a problem is detected the telltale will come on while the engine is running Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is placed in the PARK position The telltale should turn off If the telltal
159. Programming Transmitters Remote Keyless Entry 21 Radial Ply Tires iex doa ee ae Saeed dae 432 Radiator Cap Coolant Pressure Cap 534 Radio Operation 1 6 6 00 356 Radio Remote Controls llle 354 Rain Sensitive Wiper System llus 215 Rear Axle Differential 00 541 Rear Camera 4 uve d eese ns d dope desea E 265 Rear Cupholder s sse csse t en RR ens 294 Rear Park Sense System ce act emeses ds aeia 255 es INDEX 601 Rear Seat Folding 4 063 esia den e Poe 193 Rear Window Defroster llle en 302 Rear Window Features 0 00000005 302 Recorder Event Data 0 0 0 eee eae 73 Recreational Towing 0 0 0 00002 e eee 481 Reformulated Gasoline 0 0000 456 Refrigerant s 92240 9440244 Rae Ree PR RR n 524 Release Hood 0 0 cee eee eee 199 Reminder Lights On mende a E sss 205 Reminder Seat Belt 0 0 00 0c eee 58 Remote Control Starting System i c duae aue wae 27 Remote Keyless Entry RKE 21 Remote Sound System Radio Controls 354 Remote Starting System 00000 27 Remote Trunk Release 0 0 00 cee eae 44 Replacement Bulbs zs s Rm ERR ees 558 Replacement Keys jus em em re Res 17 Replacement Parts cec cestita eaaa iniae 515 Replacement Tires 2 0 0 0 000000000005 439 Reporting Safety Defects 00 0 581 Resetting Oil Chan
160. RATING Se The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have engaged the transmission into the PARK position e When shifting into PARK firmly move the shift lever all the way forward and to the left until it stops and is fully seated e With brake pedal released verify that the shift lever will not move out of PARK REVERSE R This range is for moving the vehicle backward Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop NEUTRAL N Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with the engine running The engine may be started in this range Apply the parking brake and shift the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle WARNING Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions You might lose control of the vehicle and have a collision CAUTION Towing the vehicle coasting or driving for any other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause severe transmission damage Refer to Recreational Towing in Starting And Operating and Towing A Disabled Vehicle in What To Do In Emergencies for further information ee STARTING AND OPERATING 387 DRIVE D This range should be used for most city and highway driving It provides the smoothest upshifts and down shifts and the best fuel economy The transm
161. ROLS 354 Hard Keys iari emp REOR RE eee ta ES 336 Radio Operation 0000006 354 Soft Keys oun dede pet eoa Re inem 336 CD Player ium arer e ERa ERES tes 355 Customer Programmable Features E CD DVD DISC MAINTENANCE 355 Uconnect 8 4 Settings llle 336 E RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES 356 SEUNG TEE ANATEL OR eira i oe B CLIMATE CONTROLS 0 0 356 Wi iPod USB MP3 CONTROL eene nn DE General Overview eee 357 ll HARMAN KARDON Logic7 HIGH Climate Control Functi 362 PERFORMANCE MULTICHANNEL SURROUND 2M E I ee ee CE SOUND SYSTEM WITH DRIVER SELECTABLE Automatic Temperature Control ATC 363 SURROUND DSS IF EQUIPPED 353 Operating TIPS rasare wn is Geis E RR ra ca 365 ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 309 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 040136841 1 Air Outlet 7 ESC Off Switch 13 Engine Start Stop Button 2 Instrument Cluster 8 Uconnect System Hard Controls 14 Trunk Release Button 3 Hazard Switch 9 SD Memory Card Slot 15 Dimmer Controls 4 Uconnect System 10 Power Outlet 16 Hood Release 5 Climate Control Hard Controls 11 CD DVD Slot 17 Headlight Switch 6 Glove Compartment 12 Storage Compartment 18 Analog Clock 310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 040340808 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311 INSTRU
162. ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at different loads and perform different steering driving and braking functions For these reasons they wear at unequal rates STARTING AND OPERATING 443 These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type tires Rotation will increase tread life help to maintain e mud snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth quiet ride E Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals The reasons for any rapid or E E unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed The suggested rotation method is the forward cross sserenrrt shown in the following diagram This rotation pattern Tire Rotation does not apply to some directional tires that must not be reversed 444 STARTING AND OPERATING Ss TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM TPMS The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom mended cold placard pressure The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 6 5 C This means that when the outside temperature decreases the tire pressure will decrease Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure This is defined as the tire pressure after
163. Radio dii Player Controls Climate Phone More The Options pop up will display touch Remove from Favs e Emergency And Towing Assistance The Emergency and Towing Assistance Favorite numbers can only be altered These cannot be deleted and the names cannot be changed To change the Emergency or Towing Assistance numbers follow these steps Touch the Phonebook soft key from the Phone main screen Touch the Favorites soft key Scroll to the bottom of the list to locate the Emergency and Towing Assistance Favorites Touch the Options soft key Touch the next to appropriate Favorite that is to be altered 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se 68 FM91 7 54 out Ww 72 Phonebook gt zi x Voicemail Edit Number Reset to Default Pepe Roni tie Buddy s Pizza i z Si o Phone Radio Player Controts Climate Nav More The Options pop up will appear and you can choose between Editing the number or resetting the number to default Phone Call Features The following features can be accessed through the Uconnect Phone if the feature s are available and supported by Bluetooth on your mobile service plan For example if your mobile service plan provides three way calling this feature can be accessed through the Uconnect Phone Check with your mobile service pro vider for the features that you have Ways To Initiate A Phone Call Listed
164. Restraining Children In Vehicles Child Size Height Weight or Age Recommended Type of Child Restraint Infants and Toddlers Children who are two years old or younger and who have not reached the height or weight limits of their child restraint Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Restraint facing rearward in the rear seat of the vehicle Small Children Children who are at least two years old or who have out grown the height or weight limit of their rear facing child restraint Forward Facing Child Restraint with a five point Harness facing forward in the rear seat of the vehicle Larger Children Children who have out grown their forward facing child restraint but are too small to properly fit the vehicle s seat belt Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat belt seated in the rear seat of the vehicle Children Too Large for Child Restraints Children 12 years old or younger who have out grown the height or weight limit of their booster seat Vehicle Seat Belt seated in the rear seat of the vehicle en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77 Infants And Child Restraints Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear facing child safety seat Two types of child restraints can be used rearward facing infant carriers and con
165. STRUMENT PANEL Se 19 Seat Belt Reminder Light When the ignition switch is first turned to ON RUN this light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check During the bulb check if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled a chime will sound After the bulb check or when driving if the driver s seat belt remains unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will illuminate and the chime will sound Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Start ing Your Vehicle for further information 20 Temperature Gauge The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera ture Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera ture when driving in hot weather up mountain grades or when towing a trailer It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range CAUTION Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H and you hear continuous chimes turn the engine off immediately and call an autho rized dealer for service ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321 Teel ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER EVIC tis MADE cooling system is
166. TION When rocking a stuck vehicle by shifting be tween DRIVE and REVERSE do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph 24 km h or drivetrain damage may result e Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transmission overheating and failure It can also damage the tires Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph 48 km h while in gear no trans mission shifting occurring 502 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage or even failure of the axle and tires A tire could explode and injure someone Do not spin your vehi cle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE 5 SPEED TRANSMISSION If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be moved out of the PARK position you can use the following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever 1 Turn the engine OFF 2 Firmly apply the parking brake 3 Remove the rubber liner from the storage tray located next to the shifter on the center console 4 Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal 5 Insert a screwdriver or similar tool into the access port in the left side of the storage bin and push and hold the override release lever in WHAT TO DO IN EMERGEN
167. The options pop up will be displayed Touch the Disconnect Device soft key Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen Deleting A Phone Or Audio Device e e Touch the Settings soft key Touch the Phone Bluetooth soft key Touch the soft key located to the right of the device name for a different Phone or Audio Device than the currently connected device The options pop up will be displayed Touch the Delete Device soft key Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen Making A Phone Or Audio Device A Favorite Touch the Settings soft key Touch the Phone Bluetooth soft key Touch the soft key located to the right of the device name The options pop up will be displayed Touch the Make Favorite soft key you will see the chosen device move to the top of the list Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Phonebook Download Automatic Phonebook Transfer From Mobile Phone If Equipped If equipped and specifically supported by your phone Uconnect8 Phone automatically downloads names text names and number entries from the mobile phone s phonebook Specific Bluetooth amp Phones with Phone Book Access Profile may support this feature See Uconnect amp website www UconnectPhone com for supported phones e e To call a name from a downloaded mobile phone book follow the procedure
168. The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when the ignition switch is in the ON RUN position 12 Air Bag Warning Light e ry This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned to ON RUN If the light is either not on during starting stays on or turns on while driving have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information 13 Anti Lock Brake ABS Light es This light monitors the Anti Lock Brake System ABS The light will turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving it indicates that the Anti Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required However the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on If the ABS light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti Lock brakes If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position have the light inspected by an authorized dealer 14 Sport Mode If Equipped This light will illuminate when the sport mode sporry is selected This mode provides performance based tuning For further in
169. The tongue weight of the trailer your bumper or trailer hitch The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle The weight of the driver and all passengers NOTE Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle Also additional factory installed options or dealer installed options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard for the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle 057003767 474 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Towing Requirements WARNING To promote proper break in of your new vehicle drive train components the following guidelines are recom mended CAUTION Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles 805 km the new vehicle is driven The engine axle or other parts could be damaged Improper towing can lead to an injury collision Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and it will not shift during travel When trailering cargo that is not fully secured dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control You could lose control of your vehicle and Then during the first 500 miles 805 km that a have a collision trailer is towed do not drive over 50 mph 80 km h and do not make starts at full throttle This helps
170. To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury 9 Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise 10 Finish tightening the lug nuts Push down on the wrench while at the end of the handle for increased leverage Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each nut has been tightened twice For the correct lug nut torque refer to Torque Specifications in this section If in doubt about the correct tightness have them checked with a torque wrench by your autho rized dealer or at a service station 11 Stow the jack tools and flat tire Make sure the base of the jack faces the front of the vehicle before tightening down the fastener WARNING A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve hicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided Have the deflated flat tire repaired or replaced immediately 496 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME Road Tire Installation 1 Mount the road tire on the axle 2 Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward the wheel Lightly tighten the lug nuts WARNING To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered Failure to follow t
171. Uconnect screen e Uconnect Phone will display an in process screen while the system is connecting e When the pairing process has successfully completed the system will prompt you to choose whether or not this is your favorite device Selecting Yes will make this device the highest priority This device will take precedence over other paired devices within range NOTE For devices which are not made a favorite the device priority is determined by the order in which it was paired The latest device paired will have the higher priority You can also use the following VR command to bring up a list of paired audio devices e Show Paired Phones or e Connect My Phone Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or Audio Device After Pairing Uconnect Phone will automatically connect to the high est priority paired phone and or Audio Device within range If you need to choose a particular phone or Audio Device follow these steps Touch the Settings soft key Touch the Phone Bluetooth soft key Touch to select the particular Phone or the Paired Audio Sources soft key and then an Audio Device e Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 Disconnecting A Phone or Audio Device e e e e e Touch the Settings soft key Touch the Phone Bluetooth soft key Touch the soft key located to the right of the device name
172. Usage Precautions for limi tations of this system and recommendations ParkSense will retain the last system state enabled or disabled from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is changed to the ON RUN position ParkSense can be active only when the shift lever is in REVERSE or DRIVE If ParkSense is enabled at one of these shift lever positions the system will remain active until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately 7 mph 11 km h or above The system will become active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately 6 mph 9 km h 256 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M ParkSense amp Sensors The four ParkSense sensors located in the rear fascia bumper monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the sensors field of view The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 12 in 30 cm up to 59 in 150 cm from the rear fascia bumper in the horizontal direction depending on the location type and orienta tion of the obstacle The six ParkSense sensors located in the front fascia bumper monitor the area in front of the vehicle that is within the sensors field of view The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 12 in 30 cm up to 47 in 120 cm from the front fascia bumper in the horizontal direction depending on the location type and orienta tion of the obstacle ParkSense Warning Display The ParkSense Warning screen will only be
173. Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Vehicle delivery date and mileage Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center P O Box 21 8004 Auburn Hills MI 48321 8004 Phone 800 247 9753 es F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 579 Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center P O Box 1621 Windsor Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone 800 465 2001 English 800 387 9983 French In Mexico contact Av Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma 1240 Sante Fe C P 05109 Mexico D F In Mexico City 5081 7568 Outside Mexico City 1 800 505 1300 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY To assist customers who have hearing difficulties the manufacturer has installed special TDD Telecommuni cation Devices for the Deaf equipment at its customer center Any hearing or speech impaired customer who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter TTY in the United States can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1 800 380 CHRY Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada For TTY teletypewriter users dial 711 and for Voice callers dial 1 800 855 0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator 580 Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires The manufacturer stands behind only the
174. Warning feature is Off The telltale is On when the front radar sensor is blocked and requires cleaning the ACC FCW sensors require service or the ACC FCW system is unavailable because of a system error For further infor mation refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle i e Low Fuel Telltale When the fuel level reaches approximately 3 0 gal 11 0 L this light will turn on and remain on until fuel is added e Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator 4 4v This telltale will turn on to indicate the wind shield washer fluid is low e Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Malfunction RI This light will turn on when a ACC is not operating and needs service For further informa tion refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327 e SERV AWD Service All Wheel Drive Indicator If Equipped SERV This light will turn on when the All Wheel Drive AWD feature requires service For further information refer to All Wheel Drive in Starting And Operating EVIC Red Telltales This area will show reconfigurable red telltales These telltales include Door Ajar This telltale turns on when one or more doors are ajar The telltale will show which doors are ajar e Trunk Ajar P This light will turn on to indicate that the trunk lid is ajar e Oil
175. accelerates to a speed above the set speed The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of the sensor The vehicle ahead slows to a speed below 15 mph 25 km h and the system automatically disengages itself The distance setting is changed The system disengages Refer to the information on ACC Activation The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited how ever the driver can always apply the brakes manually if necessary NOTE The brake lights will illuminate whenever the ACC system applies the brakes A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to maintain the set distance If this occurs a visual alert BRAKE will flash in the EVIC and a chime will sound while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking capacity When this occurs you should immediately apply the brakes as needed to maintain a safe distance from the vehicle ahead 240 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NE 156789mi 102 BRAKE NE 156789mi 102 BRAKE 032363710 032363711 Brake Alert 3 Brake Alert 2 NE 156789mi 102 BRAKE Brake Alert 1 032363712 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 241 Overtake Aid When driving with ACC engaged and following a target vehicle the system will provide an additional accelera tion to assist in passing vehicles in front This additional acceleration is triggered when the driver utilizes the
176. adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least in 1 cm gap between the overhead e console if equipped and the mirror e Always wait for the beep before speaking e Speak normally without pausing just as you would speak to a person sitting a few feet meters away from you Make sure that no one other than you is speaking during a voice command period e Performance is maximized under low to medium blower setting low to medium vehicle speed UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151 e low road noise e smooth road surface e fully closed windows dry weather condition Even though the system is designed for many lan guages and accents the system may not always work for some When navigating through an automated system such as voice mail or when sending a page before speaking the digit string make sure to say Send It is recommended that you do not store names in your favorites phonebook while the vehicle is in motion Phonebook Mobile and Favorites name recognition rate is optimized when the entries are not similar You can say O letter O for 0 zero 152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e Even though international dialing for most number combinations is supported some shortcut dialing number combinations may not be supported In a convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down Far End Audio Performance Audio qu
177. ailers in excess of 2 000 Ibs 907 kg Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle s hydraulic brake lines It can overload your brake system and cause it to fail You might not have brakes when you need them and could have a CAUTION If the trailer weighs more than 1 000 Ibs 454 kg loaded it should have its own brakes and they collision Towing any trailer will increase your stopping distance When towing you should allow for addi tional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you Failure to do so could result in a collision should be of adequate capacity Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear higher brake pedal effort and longer stopping distances 478 STARTING AND OPERATING Towing Requirements Trailer Lights And Wiring Whenever you pull a trailer regardless of the trailer size stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety The Trailer Tow Package may include a four and seven pin wiring harness Use a factory approved trailer har ness and connector NOTE Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles wiring harness The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector Refer to the following illustrations 1 Female Pins 2 Male Pin 3 Ground 057003766 Four Pin Connector 4 Park 5 Left Stop Turn 6 Right Stop Turn 7 ont
178. ality is maximized under low to medium blower setting low to medium vehicle speed low road noise e smooth road surface e fully closed windows dry weather conditions and operation from the driver s seat Performance such as audio clarity echo and loudness to a large degree rely on the phone and network and not the Uconnect Phone Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by lowering the in vehicle audio volume e In a convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down Voice Text Reply Uconnect amp Phone can read or send new messages on your phone Your phone must support SMS over Bluetooth in order to use this feature If the Uconnect Phone determines your phone is not compatible with SMS messaging over Bluetooth the Messaging button will be grayed out and the feature will not be available for use NOTE Uconnect Phone SMS is only available when the vehicle is not moving 68 sf P FM 91 7 10 10 NW 54 out Messaging gt Inbox EI 14 James Butler Ea 13 248 576 5459 b 12 Beatrice Adams Listen Listen Listen 11 Sanjiv Prabaker EA 10 Lin Ford G3 9 Jay Kay 7 items in list 1 a Listen Listen Listen Nav More OFF Radio Player Controls Climate Read Messages If you receive a new text message while your phone is connected to Uconnect Phone an announcement will be made to notify you that you have a new t
179. ally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph 120 km h For speeds above 75 mph 120 km h refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures While studded tires improve performance on ice skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non studded tires Some states pro hibit studded tires therefore local laws should be checked before using these tire types Run Flat Tires If Equipped Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles 80 km at 50 mph 80 km h after a rapid loss of inflation pressure This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation pressure is of or below 14 psi 96 kPa Once a Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immedi ately A Run Flat tire is not repairable It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat mode See the tire pressure monitoring section for more infor mation Spare Tires If Equipped NOTE For vehicles equipped with TIREFIT instead of a spare tire please refer to TIREFIT KIT in What To Do In Emergencies for further information ee STARTING AND OPERATING 435 C
180. amage are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed Front And Side Impact Sensors In front and side impacts impact sensors can aid the ORC in determining appropriate response to impact events Enhanced Accident Response System In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment if the communication network remains intact and the power remains intact depending on the nature of the event the ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow ing functions Cut off fuel to the engine e Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is turned off Turn on the interior lights which remain on as long as the battery has power until the ignition key is re moved or the ignition switch is changed to OFF using the Keyless Go Start Stop button Unlock the doors automatically In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System functions after an event the ignition switch must be changed from IGN ON to IGN OFF If A Deployment Occurs The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment NOTE Front and or side air bags will not deploy in all collisions This does not mean something is wrong with the air bag system ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags any irritation rinse the area with cool water For nose or or al
181. amps If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush the area imme diately with large amounts of water Battery gas is flammable and explosive Keep flame or sparks away from the battery Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts Do not allow cable Battery Location clamps to touch each other Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds Wash hands after handling The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that should not be disconnected and should only be replaced with a battery of the same type vented 072602046 ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 523 CAUTION e It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post Battery posts are marked positive and negative and are identified on the battery case Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion e If a fast charger is used while the battery is in the vehicle disconnect both vehicle battery cables be fore connecting the charger to the battery Do not use a fast charger to provide starting voltage Air Conditioner Maintenance For best possible performance your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start of each warm season This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a p
182. an be reviewed from the Messages main menu item As long as there is a stored message an i will be displayed in the EVIC s compass outside temp line Examples of this message type are Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out and Low Tire Pressure e Unstored Messages This message type is displayed indefinitely or until the condition that activated the message is cleared Examples of this message type are Turn Signal On if a turn signal is left on and Lights On if driver leaves the vehicle e Unstored Messages Until RUN These messages deal primarily with the Remote Start feature This message type is displayed until the ignition is in the RUN state Examples of this message type are Remote Start Aborted Door Ajar and Press Brake Pedal and Push Button to Start e Five Second Unstored Messages When the appropriate conditions occur this type of message takes control of the main display area for five seconds and then returns to the previous screen Ex amples of this message type are Memory System Un available Not in Park and Automatic High Beams On The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into the white telltales area on the right amber telltales in the middle and red telltales on the left EVIC White Telltales This area will show reconfigurable white caution tell tales These telltales include e Shift Lever Status The selected AutoStick gear is displayed as 1 2 3 4 or 5 for
183. ance number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 1 800 528 2069 for the U S 1 800 363 4869 for Canada 55 14 3454 for Mexico City and 1 800 712 3040 for out side Mexico City in Mexico Please refer to the Chrysler Group LLC 24 Hour Roadside Assistance coverage details in the Warranty Information Booklet and on the 24 Hour Roadside Assistance Card Voice Mail Calling To learn how to access your voice mail refer to Working with Automated Systems Working With Automated Systems This method is used in instances where one generally has to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while navigating through an automated telephone system You can use your Uconnect Phone to access a voice mail system or an automated service such as a paging service or automated customer service line Some services re quire immediate response selection In some instances that may be too quick for use of the Uconnect Phone When calling a number with your Uconnect Phone that normally requires you to enter in a touch tone sequence on your mobile phone keypad you can utilize the touch screen or press the Sve button and say the word Send then the sequence you wish to enter For example if required to enter your PIN followed with a pound 3 7 4 6 you can press the SVR button and say Send 3 7 4 6 Saying Send followed by a number or sequence of numbers is also to be used for navigating t
184. ancel the delay ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203 If you turn the headlights off before the ignition they will turn off in the normal manner NOTE The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds of placing the ignition in the OFF position to activate this feature e The headlight delay time is programmable using the Uconnect System refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control If Equipped The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system provides increased forward lighting at night by automat ing high beam control through the use of a digital camera mounted on the inside rearview mirror This camera detects vehicle specific light and automatically switches from high beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view NOTE e Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be turned on or off using the Uconnect System refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instru ment Panel for further information Broken muddy or obstructed headlights and taillights of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to remain on longer closer to the vehicle Also dirt film and other obstructions on the windshield or camera lens will cause the system to function improperly If the windshield or Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control mirror is replaced the mirror must be re aimed
185. and may require immediate service or other additives is not needed under normal conditions Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance and they would result in additional cost Therefore you should not have to add anything to the fuel The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as octane enhancers is not recommended Fuel System Cautions Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor mance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer CAUTION Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle s performance The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor mance and damage the emissions control system Continued en STARTING AND OPERATING 459 NOTE Intentional tampering with the emissions control WARNING Continued system can result in civil penalties being assessed against you a garage and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period adjust the ventilation system to force fresh outside air into Carbon Monoxide Warnings WARNING Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon the vehicle Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main t
186. antifreeze when the engine is overheated Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine Heat causes pres sure to build up in the cooling system To prevent scalding or injury do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure Continued ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 535 WARNING Continued Do not use a pressure cap other than the one speci fied for your vehicle Personal injury or engine damage may result Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community To prevent ingestion by ani mals or children do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground If ingested by a child or pet seek emergency assistance immediately Clean up any ground spills immediately Coolant Level The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is adequate With the engine OFF and cold the level of the engine coolant antifreeze in the bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle The radiator normally remains completely full so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for engine coolant antifreeze freeze point or replacing cool ant Advise your service attendant of this As long as
187. arate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full size The air bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes The air bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the air bag In this way the air bags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag Inflator Unit The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag unit is located in the instrument panel trim beneath the steering column When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Advanced Front Air Bags it signals the inflator units A large quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag The trim cover separates and folds out of the way allowing the air bag to inflate to the full size The air bag fully inflates in about 15 to 20 milliseconds en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bag SAB Inflator Units The Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB are designed to activate only in certain side collisions The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side air bags to inflate based on the severity and type of collision Based on the severity and type of collision the side air bag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be triggered releas
188. are on the system will request the appropriate visual alert only When the system is in RCP the system shall respond with both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is present Whenever an audible alert is requested the radio volume is reduced Turn hazard signal status is ignored the RCP state always requests the chime Blind Spot Alert Off When the BSM system is turned off there will be no visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP systems NOTE The BSM system will store the current operating mode when the vehicle is shut off Each time the vehicle is started the previously stored mode will be recalled and used Uconnect amp Phone 8 4 8 4N Uconnect amp 8 4A 8 4N Uconnect Phone is a voice activated hands free in vehicle communications system Uconnect Phone allows you to dial a phone number with your mobile phone Uconnect Phone supports the following features Voice Activated Features e Hands Free dialing via Voice Call John Smith Mobile or Dial 248 555 1212 e Hands Free text to speech listening of your incoming SMS messages e Hands Free text messaging Send a message to John Smith Mobile Redialing last dialed numbers Redial 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Calling Back the last incoming call number Call Back e View Call logs on screen Show incoming calls Show Outgoing calls Show missed Calls Show Recen
189. arranty DEALER SERVICE Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person nel special tools and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any procedure yourself 516 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed systems may void your warranty and could result in civil Maintenance Schedule there are other components penalties being assessed against you which may require servicing or replacement in the future WARNING CAUTION You can be badly injured working on or around a Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform motor vehicle Only do service work for which you repairs and service when necessary could result in more costly repairs damage to other components or negatively impact vehicle performance Immediately have potential malfunctions examined by an autho have the knowledge and the proper equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent mechanic rized dealer or qualified repair center Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES that protect the performance and durability of your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance inter vals Do not use chemical flushes in
190. arted Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans mission cannot be started this way Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started ignite and damage the converter and vehicle e If the vehicle has a discharged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly Refer to Jump Starting in What To Do In Emergen cies for further information Clearing A Flooded Engine Using ENGINE START STOP Button If the engine fails to start after you have followed the Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather proce dures it may be flooded To clear any excess fuel 1 Press and hold the brake pedal 2 Press the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it 3 Press and release the ENGINE START STOP button once The starter motor will engage automatically run for 10 seconds and then disengage Once this occurs release the accelerator pedal and the brake pedal wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure ee STARTING AND OPERATING 377 WARNING Remember to disconnect the engine block heater After Starting The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will decrease as the engine warms up ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED The engine block heater warms the engine and permits quicker starts in cold weather Connec
191. aso lines Properly blended reformulated gasolines will pro vide excellent performance and durability of engine and fuel system components Gasoline Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy genates such as Ethanol Fuels blended with oxygenates may be used in your vehicle CAUTION DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gaso line containing more than 10 Ethanol Use of these blends may result in starting and drivability prob lems damage critical fuel system components cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard and or cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to illumi nate Pump labels should clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater than 10 Ethanol Problems that result from using gasoline containing Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10 Ethanol are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may not be covered under New Vehicle Limited Warranty ee STARTING AND OPERATING 457 E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles Non FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline contain ing 10 ethanol E10 Gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty If a Non FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E 85 fuel the engine will have some or all of these symptoms Operate in a lean mode e OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on Poor engine performance Poor cold start and cold drivability ncreased risk for fuel system c
192. at Use this simple 5 step test to decide whether the child can use the vehicle s seat belt alone 1 Can the child sit all the way back against the back of the vehicle seat 2 Do the child s knees bend comfortably over the front of the vehicle seat while they are still sitting all the way back 3 Does the shoulder belt cross the child s shoulder between their neck and arm 4 Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible touching the child s thighs and not their stomach 5 Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip If the answer to any of these questions was no then the child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle If the child is using the lap shoulder belt check belt fit peri odically A child s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck move the child closer to the center of the vehicle Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back 80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints Restraint Type Combined Use any attachment method shown with an X Below Child Restraint 65 Ibs 29 5 kg Weight of the LATCH Child Child EI Lower Anchors Seat Belt Top Restraint Lower Anchors Seat Belt Only Top Tether Tether Anchor Only Anchor Rear Facing Up to 65 Ibs X X Child Restraint 29
193. at controls Seat travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat s path Power Lumbar If Equipped Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats may also be equipped with power lumbar The power lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the power seat Push the switch forward or rearward to increase or decrease the lumbar support Push the switch upward or downward to raise or lower the lumbar support Power Lumbar Switch 186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Heated Seats If Equipped WARNING Continued On some models the front and rear seats may be Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions and insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion seatbacks This may cause the seat heater to overheat Sitting The front driver and passenger heated seats are operated in a seat that has been overheated could cause using the Uconnect System serious burns due to the increased surface tempera ture of the seat WARNING Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use exhaus Press the Controls soft key located on the bottom of the tion or other physical condition must exercise care Uconnect display when using the seat heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures especially
194. at may be susceptible to interference caused by improperly installed or high output radio transmitting equipment This interference can cause possible loss of anti lock braking capa bility Installation of such equipment should be performed by qualified professionals Pumping of the Anti Lock Brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to a collision Pumping makes the stopping distance longer Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop Continued WARNING Continued e The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys ics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded The ABS cannot prevent collisions including those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydroplaning e The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and type and tires must be properly inflated to produce accurate signals for the computer 410 STARTING AND OPERATING Se ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic brake control system that include Anti Lock Brake Sys tem ABS Traction Control System TCS Brake Assist System
195. ation Damaged Run Flat tires or Run Flat tires that have experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced imme diately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and service description Load Index and Speed Code Tire Types All Season Tires If Equipped All Season tires provide traction for all seasons spring summer fall and winter Traction levels may vary be tween different all season tires All season tires can be identified by the M S M amp S M S or MS designation on the tire sidewall Use all season tires only in sets of four failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle Summer Or Three Season Tires If Equipped Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry conditions and are not intended to be driven in snow or on ice Summer tires will not contain the all season designation or mountain snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall Use summer tires only in sets of four failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle Snow Tires Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during the winter Snow tires can be identified by a mountain snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall If you need snow tires select tires equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires Use snow tires only in sets of four failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle 434 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Snow tires gener
196. ature displays instantaneous fuel economy in a bar graph below the DTE this function cannot be reset Press the BACK button to return to the main menu ACC Cruise Control If Equipped Press and release the UP or DOWN button until ACC if equipped with Adaptive Cruise Control or Cruise is highlighted in the EVIC Status of the ACC or Cruise is displayed in the menu line also Press and release the SELECT right arrow button to display the following information If equipped with ACC one of several messages will be displayed giving a dynamic status update of the feature as the driver changes feature status or follow ing conditions change If ACC is active and a warning es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 333 or other feature is in the EVIC main display the ACC status will be displayed in place of the EVIC odometer line For vehicles with Cruise one of several messages will be displayed giving a dynamic status update of the feature as the driver changes feature status or condi tions change If Cruise is active and a warning or other feature is in the EVIC main display the Cruise status will be displayed in place of the EVIC odometer line Press and release the BACK button to return to the main menu Vehicle Speed Press and release the UP or DOWN button until Vehicle Speed is highlighted in the EVIC Press the SELECT button to view a digital display of the current speed in mph or km h Pressing the SELECT b
197. back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Sound Horn With Lock When this feature is selected the horn will sound when the remote start is activated To make your selection touch the Sound Horn With Lock soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu 346 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME e Sound Horn With Remote Start When this feature is selected the horn will sound when the remote start is activated To make your selection touch the Sound Horn With Remote Start soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks When 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is selected only the driver s door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter UNLOCK button When 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is selected you must press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger s doors When Unlock All Doors On 1st Press is selected all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button NOTE If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks all doors will unlock no matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped If 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is programmed only the driver s door will unlock
198. be prosecuted for ignoring it ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75 Children 12 years or younger should ride properly NOTE buckled up in a rear seat if available According to crash statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt Always check the child seat Owner s Manual to make sure you have the correct seat for your child Before buying any restraint system make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards You should also make sure that you can install it in the vehicle where you will use it e For additional information refer to www seatcheck org or call 1 866 SEATCHECK Cana dian residents should refer to Transport Canada s website for additional information e http www tc gc ca eng roadsafety safedrivers childsafety index 53 htm WARNING In a collision an unrestrained child can become a projectile inside the vehicle The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could not hold the child no matter how strong you are The child and others could be badly injured Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child s size 76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M Summary Of Recommendations For
199. been selected the display will read Adaptive Cruise Control Ready ACC SET e When ACC is set the set speed will display The set speed will continue to display in place of the odometer reading when changing the EVIC display while ACC is set The ACC screen will display once again if any ACC activity occurs which may include any of the following e Set Speed Change Distance Setting Change e System Cancel Driver Override e System Off e ACC Proximity Warning ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 243 e ACC Unavailable Warning e The EVIC will return to the last display selected after five seconds of no ACC display activity Display Warnings And Maintenance Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle Warning The ACC Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle warning will display when conditions temporarily limit system performance This most often occurs at times of poor visibility such as in snow or heavy rain The ACC system may also become temporarily blinded due to obstructions such as mud dirt or ice In these cases the EVIC will display Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle and the system will deactivate The Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle message can sometimes be displayed while driving in highly reflective areas i e tunnels with reflective tiles or ice and snow The ACC system will recover after the vehicle has left these areas Under rare conditions when the
200. below are all the ways you can initiate a phone call with Uconnect Phone e Redial Dial by touching in the number Voice Commands Dial by Saying a Name Call by Saying a Phonebook Name Redial or Call Back ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141 Favorites Mobile Phonebook Recent Call Log e SMS Message Viewer Dial By Saying A Number Press the button to begin e After the Listening prompt and the following beep say Dial 248 555 1212 e The Uconnect Phone will dial the number 248 555 1212 Call By Saying A Phonebook Name e Press the button to begin e After the Listening prompt and the following beep say Call John Doe Mobile The Uconnect Phone will dial the number associated with John Doe or if there are multiple numbers it will ask which number you want to call for John Doe Call Controls The touch screen allows you to control the following call m features Answer End Ignore Hold unhold Mute unmute Transfer the call to from the phone Swap two active calls Join two active calls together 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Touch Tone Number Entry Touch the Phone soft key e Touch the Dial soft key The Touch Tone screen will be displayed Use the numbered soft keys to enter the number and touch Call To send a touch tone using Voice Recognition VR press the Sve button while in a call and
201. c system to provide immunity to radio frequency signals Mobile two way radios and telephone equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel The following must be observed during installation The positive power connection should be made directly to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible The negative power connection should be made to body sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection This connection should not be fused Antennas for two way radios should be mounted on the roof or the rear area of the vehicle Care should be used in mounting antennas with magnet bases Magnets may affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible Use only fully shielded coaxial cable Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio SWR Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal may require special precautions All installations should be checked for possible interference be tween the communications equipment and the vehicle s electronic systems Chrysler Group LLC 14C481 126 AA CHttyYS Leff SERV T CCE STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS AR FirstEdition Printed in U S A
202. can be placed on hold at a time You can also press the w button to toggle between the active and held phone call Join Calls When two calls are in progress one active and one on hold touch the Join Calls soft key on the Phone main screen to combine all calls into a Conference Call ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145 Call Termination To end a call in progress momentarily press the Se but ton or the end soft key Only the active call s will be terminated and if there is a call on hold it will become the new active call If the active call is terminated by the far end a call on hold may not become active automati cally This is cell phone dependent Redial e Press the Redial soft key e or press the w and after the Listening prompt and the following beep say Redial e The Uconnect amp Phone will call the last number that was dialed from your mobile phone Call Continuation Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the Uconnect Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been switched to OFF NOTE The call will remain within the vehicle audio system until the phone becomes out of range for the Bluetooth connection It is recommended to press the transfer soft key when leaving the vehicle Uconnect amp Phone Features Emergency Assistance If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is reachable Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency number
203. can be programmed to come on during a remote start Refer to Remote Starting Sys tem If Equipped in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information Rear Heated Seats On some models the two outboard seats are equipped with heated seats The heated seat switches for these seats are located on the rear of the center console There are two heated seat switches that allow the rear passen gers to operate the seats independently You can choose from HI LO or OFF heat settings Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use Two indicator lights will illuminate for HI one for LO and none for OFF Press the switch once to select HI level heating Press the switch a second time to select LO level heating Press the switch a third time to shut the heating elements OFF NOTE Once a heat setting is selected heat will be felt within two to five minutes The engine must be running for the heated seats to operate When the Hl level setting is selected the heater will provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes of operation Then the heat output will drop to the ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189 normal Hl evel If the Hl level setting is selected the system will automatically switch to LO level after ap proximately 60 minutes of continuous operation At that time the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two to one indicating the c
204. ce to activate the cupholder press the symbol a second time to turn off the cupholder WARNING When using the cupholder in the Hot position avoid contact with the heated portion of the cup holder in order to reduce the possibility of burns Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin Your vehicle may be equipped with heated and cooled cupholders The cupholders are designed to help keep warm beverages warm and cold beverages cool because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injuries medication alcohol use exhaus tion or other physical condition must exercise par ticular care in order to prevent serious burn injury Keep the cupholder free of debris or stray objects when operated in the Heat position 035136627 Heated And Cooled Cupholder Switches 294 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Rear Seat Cupholders The rear seat cupholders are located in the center armrest between the rear seats The cupholders are positioned forward in the armrest and side by side to provide conve nient access to beverage cans or bottles while maintaining a resting place for the rear occupant s elbows 035139997 Rear Seat Cupholders Lighted Cupholders If Equipped On some vehicles the rear cupholders are equipped with a light ring that illuminates the cupholders for the rear passengers The light ring is controlled by the Dimmer Control Refer to Lights in Understanding T
205. ced if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Retractor ALR feature or any other seat belt function is not working properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions Energy Management Feature This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy Management feature in the front seating positions to help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head on collision This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner This feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on the occupant s chest Seat Belt Pretensioner The seat belts for both front seating positions are equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision These devices may improve the performance of the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early in a collision Pretensioners work for all size occu pants including those in child restraints NOTE These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re straint Controller ORC Like the air bags the preten sioners are single use items A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag mus
206. certifi cation mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used Synthetic Engine Oils You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom mended oil quality requirements are met and the recom mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed Materials Added To Engine Oil The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addi tion of any additives other than leak detection dyes to the engine oil Engine oil is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle Used oil and oil filters indiscriminately discarded can present a problem to the environment Contact your authorized dealer service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at every engine oil change Engine Oil Filter Selection This manufacturer s engines have a full flow type oil filter Use a filter of this type for replacement The quality of replacement filters varies considerably Only high ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 521 quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine oil filters are a high quality oil filter and are recommended Engine Air Cleaner Filter
207. ch lock the seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large item in a seat if equipped Please pay close attention to the information in this section It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 If you will be carrying children too small for adult sized seat belts the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH feature also can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems For more information on LATCH refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH NOTE The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator design This allows the air bag to have different rates of inflation based on several factors including the severity and type of collision Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag 1 Children 12 years old and under should always ride buckled up in a rear seat WARNING e Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an air bag A deploying passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger including a child in a rearward facing infant seat Only use a rearward facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat Children that are not big enoug
208. ck it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics In addition if the light begins to flash after the bulb check it indicates that someone used an invalid Key Fob to start the engine Either of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle operation vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds it indicates that there is a fault in the electron ics Should this occur have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an authorized dealer ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 CAUTION Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat CAUTION The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compat ible with some aftermarket remote starting systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics Replacement Keys NOTE Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle tended e For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go always remember to place the ignition in the OFF position At the time of purchase the original owner is provided with a four digit Personal Identi
209. ck From The Driver s Side With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft 1 5 m of the driver s door handle grab the front driver door handle to unlock the driver s door automatically The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the door is unlocked Grab The Door Handle To Unlock 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee NOTE If Unlock All Doors 1st Press is programmed all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the front driver s door handle To select between Unlock Driver Door 1st Press and Unlock All Doors 1st Press refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instru ment Panel for further information To Unlock From The Passenger Side With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft 1 5 m of the passenger door handle grab the front passenger door handle to unlock all four doors automati cally The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the door is unlocked NOTE All doors will unlock when the front passenger door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver s door unlock preference setting Unlock Driver Door 1st Press or Unlock All Doors 1st Press Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE Transmitter In Vehicle To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle the Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door unlock feature which will function if the ignition switc
210. contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle If you do not read this entire Owners Manual you may miss important information Observe all Warnings and Cautions VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The Vehicle Identification Number VIN is on the left front corner of the instrument panel The VIN is visible from outside of the vehicle through the windshield This number also appears on the Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle the vehicle registration and the title 010805185 VIN Location The vehicle identification number VIN is also located on the right front strut tower inside the engine compart ment INTRODUCTION 7 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS WARNING Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death 010840680 VIN Location NOTE It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN Information Provided by DEALER THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS B ll A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS 12 To Arm TheSystem 0 00000 19 Keyless Ignition Node KIN 12 To Disarm The System 000 19 Key Pob iss ess een cae ba oa dex esas 13 Security System Manual Override 21
211. could result in a collision Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts causing the brake fluid to catch fire Brake fluid can also damage painted and vinyl surfaces care should be taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate the brake fluid Brake seal components could be damaged causing partial or complete brake failure This could result in a collision Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 539 CAUTION Continued shudder and will require more frequent fluid and Automatic Transmission Selection Of Lubricant It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to ensure optimum transmission performance and life Use only the manufacturer s specified transmission fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for fluid specifications It is important to maintain the transmission fluid at the correct level using the recommended fluid No chemical flushes should be used in any transmission only the approved lubricant should be used CAUTION Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac turer s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and or torque converter Continued filter changes Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genu
212. ction as intended Refer to Rear Window Features in Understanding The Fea tures Of Your Vehicle for further information Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped An illuminated vanity mirror is located on the sun visor To use the mirror rotate the sun visor downward and swing the mirror cover upward The light turns on automatically Closing the mirror cover turns off the light UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 rearwards until the sun visor is in the desired position To use the extender feature of the sun visor grab the extender which is located at the rear of the visor and pull rearward Illuminated Vanity Mirror Slide On Rod And Extender Features Of Sun Visor 030440176 To use the Slide On Rod feature of the sun visor rotate Slide On Rod Feature the sun visor downward and swing the sun visor so it is parallel to the side window grab the sun visor and pull 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE BLIND SPOT MONITORING BSM IF EQUIPPED The Blind Spot Monitoring BSM system uses two radar based sensors located inside the rear bumper fascia to detect highway licensable vehicles automobiles trucks motorcycles etc that enter the blind spot zones from the rear front side of the vehicle Rear Detection Zones When the vehicle is started the BSM warning light will momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors to let the driver know that the sys
213. d Chil dren should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN mode A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Continued 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING Continued Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death CAUTION An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves Always remove the Key Fob from vehicle cycle the ignition OFF and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended SENTRY KEY The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthor ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine The system does not need to be armed or activated Operation is automatic regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked The system uses a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter a Keyless Ignition Node KIN and a RF receiver to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation Therefore only Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle After cycling the ignition to the ON RUN position the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check If the light remains on after the bulb che
214. d conditions NOTE e Each time the ignition is cycled ON the ESC system will be ON even if it was cycled off previously The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation b ee Electronic Stability Control ESC is partially off or full off The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates the 5 418 STARTING AND OPERATING Synchronizing ESC If the power supply is interrupted battery E disconnected or discharged the ESC Le Activation Malfunction Indicator Light may illuminate with the engine running If this should occur turn the steering wheel completely to the left and then to the right The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light should go out However if the light remains on have the ESC and BAS checked at your authorized dealer as soon as possible TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION Tire Markings D var rg v NOUS 054903773 1 U S DOT Safety Standards Code TIN 2 Size Designation 3 Service Description 4 Maximum Load 5 Maximum Pressure 6 Treadwear Traction and Temperature Grades en STARTING AND OPERATING 419 NOTE e e e P Passenger Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards P Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example P215 65R15 95H Eur
215. ded i should be checked monthly when cold and in flated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should deter mine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires 314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illumi nates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator
216. dible alert when the turn signal is on When Off is selected the Blind Spot Monitor BSM system is deacti vated To change the Blind Spot Alert status touch the Off Lights or Lights amp Chime soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key NOTE If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located even if the fascia is not damaged the sensor may have become misaligned Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment Having a sensor that is misaligned will result in the BSM not operating to specification e ParkView Backup Camera If Equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on screen image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the shift lever is put into REVERSE The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a caution note to check entire surroundings across the top of the screen After five seconds this note will disappear The ParkView camera is located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear License plate To make your selection touch the ParkView Backup Camera soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 343 e Rain Sensing Auto Wipers If Equipped When this feature is selected the system will automat
217. displayed if Sound and Display is selected from the Uconnect System Refer to Uconnect Settings in Understand ing Your Instrument Panel for further information The ParkSense amp Warning screen is located within the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC It provides visual warnings to indicate the distance between the rear fascia bumper and or front fascia bumper and the de tected obstacle UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 257 ParkSense Display The warning display will turn ON indicating the system status when the vehicle is in REVERSE or when the vehicle is in DRIVE and an obstacle has been detected Ready Park Assist l 032741298 Park Assist Ready Park Assist Display 032763177 Park Assist System ON 258 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE N Omi 10F Park Assist System OFF 032741296 Park Assist System OFF The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing three solid arcs and will produce a one half second tone As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle the EVIC display will show fewer arcs and the sound tone will change from slow to fast to continuous Park Assist Slow Tone 0327412599 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 259 Park Park Assist D 032741298 032741297 Fast Tone Continuous Tone 260 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M The vehicle is close to the obstacle when th
218. dren should remain in a forward facing child seat with a harness for as long as possible up to the highest weight or height allowed by the child seat All children whose weight or height is above the forward facing limit for the child seat should use a belt positioning booster seat until the vehicle s seat belts fit properly If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle s seat cushion while the child s back is against the seatback they should use a belt positioning booster seat The child and belt positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the seat belt WARNING Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint It could come loose in a collision The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the child restraint manufacturer s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint When your child restraint is not in use secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchor ages or remove it from the vehicle Do not leave it loose in the vehicle In a sudden stop or accident it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79 Children Too Large For Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback should use the seat belt in a rear se
219. e EVIC display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle WARNING ALERTS Continuous Rear Distance Greater than 59 39 in 39 25 in 25 12 in Less than 12 in in cm 59 in 150 cm 150 100 cm 100 65 cm 65 30 cm 30 cm Front Distance Greater than 47 39 in 39 25 in 25 12 in Less than 12 in in cm 47 in 120 cm 120 100 cm 100 65 cm 65 30 cm 30 cm Audible Alert None Single Slow for rear Fast Continuous Chime 1 2 second tone only for rear only Arc None 3 Solid 3 Slow Flashing 2 Slow Flashing 1 Slow Flashing ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 261 Front Park Assist Audible Alerts ParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist audible alert chime after approximately 3 seconds when an obstacle has been detected the vehicle is stationary and brake pedal is applied Adjustable Chime Volume Settings Front and Rear chime volume settings can be selected from the Uconnect System The chime volume settings include LOW MEDIUM and HIGH The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state through ignition cycles Enabling And Disabling ParkSense ParkSense can be enabled and disabled using the Uconnect System The available choices are Off Sound Only or Sound and Display Refer to Uconnect S
220. e Inflation Pressures 430 MI TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM TPMS 444 Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation 432 Base SySteM sss odes PSN SOAS RUE Radial Ply Tires sarriena higo i 432 Premium System If Equipped Tire Dyp Sss i24 ce Ra eu eg 433 General Information sinpi irs Run Flat Tires If Equipped 434 W FUEL REQUIREMENTS 455 Spare Tires If Equipped 434 3 6L Engine If Equipped 455 Tire Spinning sesser RR RE Ras 437 5 7L Engine If Equipped 455 Tread Wear Indicators 00 438 Reformulated Gasoline Ls 456 370 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Gasoline Oxygenate Blends 456 SALW ve oS hte be Eden SaaS Saeed 462 E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles 457 Cruising Range as ia ge ened ow eee E 462 MMT In Gasoline 1 2 2 0 00 000 06 457 Replacement Parts 00056 462 Materials Added To Fuel 458 Maintenance 0 cece eee eee eee 462 Fuel System Cautions 0 0 458 W ADDING FUEL oi 003 445 RR Rr e 463 Carbon Monoxide Warnings 459 Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release 465 E FLEXIBLE FUEL 3 6L ENGINE ONLY B VEHICLE LOADING 1 5224 na 466 Ae du qu
221. e MIL is flashing while the engine is running severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS ES 7 In some localities it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle s emissions control system Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration 514 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M For states that require an Inspection and Mainte LS nance I M this check verifies the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is functioning and is not on when the engine is running and that the OBD II system is ready for testing Normally the OBD II system will be ready The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced recently had a dead battery or a battery replace ment If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I M test your vehicle may fail the test Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test which you can use prior to going to the test station To check if your vehicle s OBD II system is ready you must do the following 1 Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position but do not crank or start the engine NOTE If you crank or start the engine you will have to start this test over 2 As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON position you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check 3 Approximately 15 seconds later one of two thi
222. e Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster will flash Rearming Of The System If something triggers the alarm and no action is taken to disarm it the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn the horn off after three minutes turn all of the visual signals off after 15 additional minutes and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will rearm itself es THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 To Arm The System Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm n e Remove the key from the ignition system refer to Starting Procedures in Starting And Operating for further information For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter N Go make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF and the key is physically removed from the ignition Perform one of the following methods to lock the vehicle Press LOCK on the interior power door lock switch with the driver and or passenger door open Press the LOCK button on the exterior Passive Entry Door Handle with a valid Key Fob available in the same exterior zone refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information Press the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry a RKE transmitter 3 If any doors are open close them To Disarm The System The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of the fol
223. e blower speed e If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected check the front of the A C condenser lo cated in front of the radiator for an accumulation of dirt or insects Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser reducing air conditioning performance MAX A C Max A C sets the control for maximum cooling perfor mance Press and release to toggle between Max A C and the prior settings The soft key illuminates when Max A C is ON ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 363 In MAX A C the blower level and mode position can be adjusted to desired user settings Pressing other settings will cause the MAX A C operation to switch to the prior settings and the MAX A C indicator will turn off Recirculation When outside air contains smoke odors or cx high humidity or if rapid cooling is desired you may wish to recirculate interior air by pressing the Recirculation control button The recirculation indicator will illuminate when this button is selected Push the button a second time to turn off the Recirculation mode and allow outside air into the vehicle NOTE In cold weather use of Recirculation mode may lead to excessive window fogging The recirculation feature may be unavailable soft button greyed out if conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of the windshield On systems wi
224. e cable to the negative post of the Failure to follow these procedures could result in discharged battery The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and could result in damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle personal injury or the discharged vehicle 5 Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery let the engine idle a few minutes and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery 1 Connect the positive 4 end of the jumper cable to the remote positive post of the discharged vehicle 2 Connect the opposite end of the positive jumper cable to the positive 4 post of the booster battery 500 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME Once the engine is started remove the jumper cables in the reverse sequence 6 Disconnect the negative jumper cable from the remote negative post of the vehicle with the dis charged battery Disconnect the negative end of the jumper cable from the negative post of the booster battery Disconnect the positive jumper cable from the positive post of the booster battery Disconnect the positive end of the jumper cable from the remote positive post of the discharged vehicle If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle you should have the battery and charging system in spected at your authorized dealer CAUTION Accessories plugged into the
225. e child restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seat ing position 5 If the child restraint has a tether strap connect it to the top tether anchorage See the section Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage for direc tions to attach a tether anchor 6 Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat Remove slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufac turer s instructions 7 Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path It should not move more than 1 inch 25 4 mm in any direction How To Stow An Unused ALR Seatbelt When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used by other occupants or being used to secure child restraints An unused belt could injure a child if they play with it and accidentally lock the seatbelt retractor Before installing a child restraint using the LATCH system buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of the child s reach If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation instead of buckling it behind the child restraint route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it Do not lock the seatbelt Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with them en T
226. e commands are universal and can be used from any menu All other commands can be used depending upon the active application When using this system you should speak clearly and at a normal speaking volume The system will best recognize your speech if the win dows are closed and the heater air conditioning fan is set to low At any point if the system does not recognize one of your commands you will be prompted to repeat it To hear available commands press the Uconnect Voice Command vRbutton and say Help You will hear available commands for the screen displayed Natural Speech Natural speech allows the user to speak commands in phrases or complete sentences The system filters out certain non word utterances and sounds such as ah and eh The system handles fill in words such as I would like to The system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase or sentence such as make a phone call and to Kelly Smith For multiple inputs in the same phrase or sen tence the system identifies the topic or context and provides the associated follow up prompt such as Who do you want to call in the case where a phone call was requested but the specific name was not recognized 170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M The system utilizes continuous dialog when the system Changing the Volume requires more information from the user it will ask a question to which the user can respond
227. e entire system for leaks 532 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M With the engine at normal operating temperature but not running check the cooling system pressure cap for proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of engine coolant antifreeze from the radiator drain cock If the cap is sealing properly the engine coolant anti freeze will begin to drain from the coolant recovery bottle DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT Cooling System Drain Flush And Refill If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or contains visible sediment have an authorized dealer clean and flush with OAT coolant antifreeze conforming to MS 12106 Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals Selection Of Coolant Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information CAUTION Mixing of engine coolant antifreeze other than specified Organic Additive Technology OAT en gine coolant antifreeze may result in engine dam age and may decrease corrosion protection Organic Additive Technology OAT engine coolant is differ ent and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT engine coolant anti freeze or any globally compatible coolant anti freeze If a non OAT engine coolant antifreeze is Continued ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 533 CAUTION Continued Adding Coolant
228. e normal Cruise Control without erasing the memory if To Cancel NOTE You must observe the display when setting or changing speed not the speedometer e You softly tap or depress the brake pedal e You press the CANCEL button The Electronic Stability Control Traction Control Sys tem ESC TCS activates 252 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se To Resume Press the RES button and then remove your foot from the accelerator pedal The EVIC will display the last set speed To Turn Off The system will turn off and erase the set speed in memory if e You push and release the ON OFF button e You turn off the ignition You switch off ESC If the Cruise Control system is turned off and reactivated the system will return to the last driver setting ACC or Normal Cruise Control Forward Collision Warning If Equipped The Forward Collision Warning FCW system provides the driver with audible and visual warnings within the EVIC when it detects a potential frontal collision The warnings are intended to provide the driver with enough time to react and avoid the potential collision FCW monitors the information from the forward looking sensor as well as the Electronic Brake Controller EBC wheel speed sensors i e to calculate a probable rear end collision When the system determines that a rear end collision is probable a warning message both audible and visual will be displayed on the EVIC When
229. e of any of the four road tires The TPMS will only monitor the pressure in the full size spare when it is used in place of a road tire Otherwise a spare with a pressure below the low pressure limit will not cause the TPM Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to sound STARTING AND OPERATING 447 Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings 4 The TPM Telltale Light will illuminate in the d instrument cluster a LOW TIRE message will be displayed and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires An Inflate to XX message will also be displayed Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle and inflate each tire to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value as shown in the Inflate to XX message Once the system receives the updated tire pressures the system will automatically update and the TPM Telltale Light and LOW TIRE message will turn off The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 min utes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information 448 STARTING AND OPERATING M Service TPMS Warning If a system fault is detected the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid The system fault will also sound a chime If the ignition switch is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists The TPM Telltale Light
230. e of your vehicle It is supplemented by Warranty Information and various customer oriented documents Please take the time to read these publications carefully Following the instruc tions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle NOTE After reviewing the owner information it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referencing and remain with the vehicle when sold When it comes to service remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best has factory trained techni cians and genuine parts and cares about your satisfaction HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle s equipment The detailed index at the back of this Owner s Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner s Manual INTRODUCTION 5 amp OGXD e3ax 0220 8i 1910 A 12 3 3 X SEE OWNER S an se MALFUNCTION ITABILITY TOP OWN meu SR Lain orr 010533317 6 INTRODUCTION WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This Owners Manual contains WARNINGS against oper ating procedures that could result in a collision or bodily injury It also
231. e remains lit with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable However see an autho rized dealer for service as soon as possible If the telltale is flashing when the engine is running immediate service is required You may experience reduced performance an elevated rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing e Engine Temperature Warning Telltale This telltale warns of an overheated engine con dition As temperatures rise and the gauge ap proaches H or 260 F this telltale will illuminate and a single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H or 260 F a continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed to cool If the telltale turns on while driving safely pull over and stop the vehicle If the A C system is on turn it off Also shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve hicle If the temperature reading does not return to normal turn the engine off immediately and call for service Refer to If Your Engine Overheats in What To Do In Emergencies for more information ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329 e Transmission Temperature Warning Telltale WARNING This telltale indicates that the transmission fluid temperature is running hot This may occur with severe usage such as trailer towing If this telltale turns on safely pull over and stop the vehicle Then shift the transm
232. e shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck The retrac tor will withdraw any slack in the belt 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se 6 To release the belt push the red button on the buckle The belt will automatically retract to its stowed posi tion If necessary slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the belt to retract fully WARNING A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays or loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged i e bent retractor torn web bing etc Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage In the driver and front passenger seats the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt away from your neck Push and fully depress the button above the webbing to release the anchorage then move it up or down to the position that fits you best 4 022667971 Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 As a guide if you are shorter than average you will prefer a lower position and if you are taller than average you will prefer a higher position When you release the anchorage try to move it up and down to make sure that it is locked in po
233. e sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead The offset vehicle may move in and out of the line of travel which can cause your vehicle to brake or accelerate unexpectedly 032400170 Turns And Bends In turns or bends ACC may detect a vehicle ahead too late or too early This may cause your vehicle to brake late or unexpectedly Give extra attention in curves and be ready to apply the brakes if necessary Be sure to select an appropriate speed while driving in curves 032400171 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 247 ACC may occasionally provide braking and or a driver Using ACC On Hills alert that you consider unnecessary This may be the system s response to signs guardrails and other station ary objects in a curve This may also occur at the base of steep hills This is normal operation and your vehicle does not require service When driving on hills ACC may not detect a vehicle in your lane Depending on the speed vehicle load traffic conditions and the steepness of the hills ACC perfor mance may be limited 032400172 248 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Lane Changing ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane in which you are traveling In the illustration shown ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and it may not detect the vehicle until it s too late for the ACC system to take action ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completel
234. e the blower setting and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar area between the icons 11 Modes The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes from the instrument panel outlets floor outlets demist outlets and defrost outlets The Mode settings are as follows Panel Mode Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets Bi Level Mode Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets NOTE BI LEVEL mode is designed under comfort con ditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets Floor Mode w Air comes from the floor outlets A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets Mix Mode D Air comes from the floor defrost and side window demist outlets This mode works best in cold or snowy conditions UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 361 Defrost Mode ov Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets U
235. e to distrac tion resulting in death or injury Upper Storage Tray 298 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Door Storage Rear Seat Armrest Storage If Equipped The door panels contain storage areas For rear passengers there is a storage bin located in the armrest Lift upward on the latch to open the storage compartment 035235231 Front Door Trim Storage Rear Armrest Storage ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 299 cago Area Vehicles Equipped with 64 Split Folding Rear Seat a a The 60 40 split folding rear seat provides cargo carrying Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into versatility The seatbacks fold down easily by pulling position If the seatback is not securely locked into nylon tabs between the seatbacks and the bolsters When position the seat will not provide the proper sta the seats are folded down they provide a continuous bility for child seats and or passengers An improp nearly flat extension of the load floor erly latched seat could cause serious injury The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle with the rear seatbacks in the locked up or folded down position should not be used as a play area by children when the vehicle is in motion They could be seriously injured in a collision Children should be seated and using the proper restraint system To help protect against personal injury passengers should not be seated in the rear cargo area The rear
236. e to use the correct fluid may affect the function or perfor mance of your transmission Automatic Transmission Use only ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid Failure to use ATF 4 fluid 5 Speed Transmission may affect the function or performance of your transmission We recommend MOPAR ATF 4 fluid Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use MOPAR DOT 3 and SAE J1703 If DOT 3 brake fluid is not available then DOT 4 is acceptable Power Steering Reservoir We recommend you use MOPAR Hydraulic Fluid or equivalent meeting MS 11655 such as Fuchs EG ZH 3044 or Pentosin CHF 11s Front Axle We recommend you use API GL 5 SAE 75W90 Synthetic Gear Lubricant Rear Axle We recommend you use API GL 5 SAE 75W140 Synthetic Gear Lubricant Transfer Case We recommend you use MOPAR Transfer Case Lubricant for BorgWarner 44 40 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS B MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE 568 Maintenance Chart llle M A N T E N A N e I S e H E D U L E S 8 M A l N T E N A N ie E S ie H E D U L E S 8 568 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Se MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change indicator system The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance Based on engine operation conditions the oil change indicator message will illuminate This means that ser vice is requ
237. e with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed such as when diagnostic testing or for prolonged periods during very rough idle or malfunctioning operating conditions ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 531 Cooling System WARNING e When working near the radiator cooling fan dis connect the fan motor lead or cycle the ignition switch to the LOCK position The fan is tempera ture controlled and can start at any time the igni tion switch is in the ON position You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot Coolant Checks Check engine coolant antifreeze protection every 12 months before the onset of freezing weather where applicable If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty the system should be drained flushed and refilled with fresh OAT coolant conforming to MS 12106 only ac cording to Chrysler Service Manual procedure or by an authorized dealer Check the front of the radiator for any accumulation of bugs leaves etc If dirty clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub ber cracking tears cuts and tightness of the connection at the bottle and radiator Inspect th
238. eadlight switch counterclockwise to the AUTO position When the system is on the headlight time delay feature is also on This means the headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place the ignition into the OFF position To turn the automatic system off move the headlight switch out of the AUTO position NOTE The engine must be running before the head lights will come on in the automatic mode Headlights On With Wipers Available with Automatic Headlights Only When this feature is active the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position In addition the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature NOTE The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be turned on or off using the Uconnect System refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instru ment Panel for further information Headlight Time Delay This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination for up to 90 seconds programmable when leaving your vehicle in an unlit area To activate the delay feature place the ignition in the OFF position while the headlights are still on Then turn off the headlights within 45 seconds The delay interval begins when the headlight switch is turned off If you turn the headlights or parking lights on or place the ignition in ACC or RUN the system will c
239. economy and performance when us ing high quality unleaded gasoline having 800dfab an octane range of 87 to 89 The manufac turer recommends the use of 89 octane for optimum RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING STARTING AND OPERATING 455 performance The use of premium gasoline is not recom mended as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine However continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting stalling and hesitations If you experi ence these symptoms try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications the World wide Fuel Charter WWFC which define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions performance and durability for your vehicle The manufacturer recom mends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC speci fications if they are available 456 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as Reformulated Gasoline Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are spe cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im prove air quality The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated g
240. ed by the driver using the shift lever or the shift paddles if equipped unless an engine lugging or overspeed condition would result It will remain in the selected gear until another upshift or downshift is cho sen except as described below If AutoStick is engaged while in DRIVE mode the transmission will automatically shift up when maxi mum engine speed is reached On some models the transmission will downshift when possible based on vehicle speed and gear if the accelerator is fully depressed If AutoStick is engaged while in SPORT mode manual gear selection will be maintained until either SPORT mode is exited or as described below The transmission will not upshift automatically at redline in this mode nor will downshifts be obtained if the accelerator pedal is pressed to the floor ee STARTING AND OPERATING 399 e e The transmission will automatically downshift as the vehicle slows to prevent engine lugging and will display the current gear The transmission will automatically downshift to first gear when coming to a stop After a stop the driver should manually upshift the transmission as the vehicle is accelerated You can start out from a stop in first or second gear Tapping at a stop will allow starting in second gear Starting out in second gear is helpful in snowy or icy conditions The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low of a vehicle speed Avoid using speed c
241. ed off This helps the driver avoid inadvertently leaving the vehicle without placing the transmission in PARK This system also locks the transmission in PARK whenever the ignition switch is in the OFF position Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift Interlock system BTSI that holds the shift lever in PARK unless the brakes are applied To shift the transmission out of PARK the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON RUN position engine running for vehicles with 8 speed transmission and the brake pedal must be pressed 380 STARTING AND OPERATING Se In 8 speed vehicles the brake pedal must also be pressed to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds Eight Speed Automatic Transmission If Equipped Your vehicle is equipped with a state of the art fuel efficient eight speed transmission The electronic shift lever in this vehicle does not slide like a conventional shifter Instead the shift lever is spring loaded and moves forward and rearward always returning to the center position after each gear is selected The transmission gear range PRND is displayed both on the shift lever and in the Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC To select a gear range press the lock button on the shift lever and move the lever rearward or forward You must also press the brake pedal to shift the transmission out of
242. ed with a cargo net Grocery Bag Hooks CAUTION Rear Cargo Net Do not exceed the maximum weight limit 50 Ibs 22 kg of the grocery bag hook Damage may occur to hook and mounting surface 302 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M REAR WINDOW FEATURES CAUTION Rear Window Defroster Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements ste The rear window defroster button is located on e Use care when washing the inside of the rear the climate control Press this button to turn on the window Do not use abrasive window cleaners on rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors if the interior surface of the window Use a soft cloth equipped An indicator in the button will illuminate and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to the when the rear window defroster is on The rear window heating elements Labels can be peeled off after defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10 soaking with warm water minutes For an additional five minutes of operation Do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abrasive press the button a second time window cleaners on the interior surface of the window e Keep all objects a safe distance from the window ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 303 Power Sunshade If Equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with a power sunshade that will reduce the amount of sunlight that will shine through the rear windshield
243. ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 291 CAUTION CAUTION Continued e After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the alternator to recharge the vehicle s battery Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only Do not hang any type of accessory or acces sory bracket from the plug Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage e Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use ie cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting e Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers vacuum cleaners lights etc will degrade the bat tery even more quickly Only use these intermit tently and with greater caution Continued 292 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CUPHOLDERS Front Seat Cupholders The cupholders are located in the forward edge of the center console 035135226 Front Cupholders Retractable Cover UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 293 Heated and Cooled Cupholders If Equipped Press the Cold symbol once to turn on the cupholder press the symbol a second time to turn the cupholder off Press the Hot symbol on
244. ee ud De tede PORE ID tn 520 br Aree 519 Oil Filter Selection llle 520 Onboard Diagnostic System llus 513 Operating Precautions lees 513 Operator Manual Owner s Manual 4 Outside Rearview Mirrors 00 111 Overdrive ccs ieee sea s a e ees 396 Overdrive OFF Switch 0 0 0 0 0000000008 396 Overheating Engine s re eedem bos 320 Owner s Manual Operator Manual 600 INDEX MM PairitCate uud dons baee oar aig Pee c es 542 Panic Alarms ss demere s 24 Parking Brake 9 i44 p eR RR XR RR ed 405 Park Sense System Rear siget rateng adaa aa 255 Passing Eight ieri Ree e RES he Redes 207 Pedals Adjustable rm mee 221 Pets suas Rb moon E oh cer E Re Rice 96 Pets Transporting llle 96 Placard Tire and Loading Information 425 Power Deck Lid Release 0 0 00 00000000 44 Distribution Center Fuses 553 Door Loeks e ee ze RD Rea Y UR ee 32 MIEIOIS 22 ches dee ed CREME CORRIGE 113 Outlet Auxiliary Electrical Outlet 287 Seals o ces nee Leese ed Y Gere 182 rss A PP M 404 SUNOD eredera bonae kk e HERR EUR RO 279 Tilt Telescoping Steering Column 218 VDndOoWS v3 um eect aahe Bees NEAR EU SUR d 40 Power Steering Fluid llle 566 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts 59 Preparation for Jacking llle 490 Pretensioners Seat Belis ite ed ee GI OG eee ede eR bade 57
245. eed Operation The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and within posted speed limits Where speed limits or condi tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera tion Refer to your authorized tire or original equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures WARNING High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi mum load is dangerous The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail You could have a serious collision Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph 120 km h Radial Ply Tires WARNING Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly The instability could cause a collision Al ways use radial ply tires in sets of four Never combine them with other types of tires Tire Repair If your tire becomes damaged it may be repaired if it meets the following criteria e The tire has not been driven on when flat e The damage is only on the tread section of your tire sidewall damage is not repairable and e The puncture is no greater than 4 6 mm ee STARTING AND OPERATING 433 Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and additional inform
246. ehicle As with all vehicles you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running Before exiting a vehicle always apply the parking brake shift the transmission into PARK turn the engine OFF and remove the key fob When the ignition is in the OFF position the transmis sion is locked in PARK securing the vehicle against unwanted movement e When leaving the vehicle always remove the key fob and lock your vehicle Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 385 WARNING Continued CAUTION e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with e Before moving the shift lever out of PARK you access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to must turn the ignition switch from the OFF poss be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number tion to the ON RUN position and also press the of reasons A child or others could be seriously or brake pedal Otherwise d to the shift 1 fatally injured Children should be warned not to el d E REIR AES NUM UE RUNE touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift e DO NOT race the engine when shifting from lever PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range as this e Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN mode A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle can damage the drivetrain 386 STARTING AND OPE
247. el Drive AWD change the front axle fluid if using your vehicle for any of the X X X following police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary X The spark plug change interval is mileage based only yearly intervals do not apply M A l N T E N A N e E S Cc H E D U L E S 8 574 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Se WARNING e You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to per form a service job take your vehicle to a competent mechanic e Failure to properly inspect and maintain your ve hicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance This could cause an accident M A l N T E N A N ie E S C H E D U L E S 8 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS ll SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or FOR YOUR VEHICLE 04 577 Speech Impaired TDD TTY 579 Prepare For The Appointment 577 Service Contract onse oem Ree 580 Prepare A List sse cope RERO 577 WI WARRANTY INFORMATION 581 Be Reasonable With Requests 577 BM MOPARG PARIS ie R 540085 581 Bl IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE 577 IB REPORTING
248. eld Washers parisa 214 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Headlights On With Wipers Available with Automatic Headlights Only Rain Sensing Wipers If Equipped E TILT TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN ll POWER TILT TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN IF EQUIPPED ll HEATED STEERING WHEEL IF EQUIPPED ll ADJUSTABLE PEDALS IF EQUIPPED ll ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL IF EQUIPPED To Activate To Set A Desired Speed To Deactivate To Resume Speed 215 z217 218 23219 To Vary The Speed Setting To Accelerate For Passing ll ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL ACC IF EQUIPPED Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Operation Activating Adaptive Cruise Control ACC To Activate To Set A Desired ACC Speed To Cancel To Turm Off cy a a s Gio amp enp Siew axe av ata To Resume Speed To Vary The Speed Setting Setting The Following Distance In ACC ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 Overtake Aid is sis xus me eres 241 Enabling And Disabling ParkSense 261 Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Menu 242 Service The ParkSense Park Assist System 262 Display Warnings And Maintenance
249. em serviced by an authorized dealer immediately ANTI LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM The Anti Lock Brake System ABS provides increased vehicle stability and brake performance under most braking conditions The system automatically pumps the brakes during severe braking conditions to prevent wheel lock up The Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD prevents the rear wheels from over braking and provides greater control of available braking forces applied to the rear axle When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph 11 km h you may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some related motor noises These noises are the system per forming its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS is working properly This self check occurs each time the vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph 11 km h ABS is activated during braking under certain road or stopping conditions ABS inducing conditions can in clude ice snow gravel bumps railroad tracks loose debris or panic stops You also may experience the following when the brake system goes into Anti Lock The ABS motor running it may continue to run for a short time after the stop e The clicking sound of solenoid valves Brake pedal pulsations and Aslight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end of the stop ee STARTING AND OPERATING 409 These are all normal characteristics of ABS WARNING e The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equip ment th
250. ement bulb 11 Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly into the tail lamp assembly and then turn it clockwise MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 563 12 Reinstall the tail lamp assembly fasteners electrical connector and trunk trim 13 Close the trunk License Lamp 1 Remove the screws securing the lamp to the rear fascia 2 Remove the bulb and socket assembly 3 Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and install the replacement bulb 073300294 1 License Lamp Bulb 2 Socket 7 4 Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly 5 Reattach the lamp to the rear fascia and then install the screws 564 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M FLUID CAPACITIES U S Metric Fuel Approximate All Engines 19 Gallons 72 Liters Engine Oil With Filter 3 6 Liter Engine SAE 5W 20 API Certified 6 Quarts 5 6 Liters 5 7 Liter Engine SAE 5W 20 API Certified 7 Quarts 6 6 Liters Cooling System 3 6 Liter Engine We recommend you use MOPAR Antifreeze 10 Quarts 9 5 Liters Engine Coolant 10 Year 150 000 Mile Formula or equivalent 5 7 Liter Engine without Severe Duty II Cooling System 14 5 Quarts 13 9 Liters We recommend you use MOPAR Antifreeze Engine Coolant 10 Year 150 000 Mile Formula 5 7 Liter Engine with Severe Duty II Cooling System We recommend 15 Quarts 14 3 Liters you use MOPAR Antifreeze Engine Coolant 10 Year 150 000 Mile Formula ncludes heater and coolant reco
251. emicals can damage your engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Engine Oil Viscosity 3 6L Engine MOPAR SAE 5W 20 engine oil or equivalent Pennzoil or Shell Helix is recommended for all operating tem peratures This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to the Engine Com partment illustration in this section NOTE SAE 5W 30 engine oil may be used when SAE 5W 20 engine oil meeting MS 6395 is not available Engine Oil Viscosity 5 7L Engine MOPAR SAE 5W 20 engine oil or equivalent Pennzoil or Shell Helix is recommended for all operating tem peratures This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to Engine Compart ment in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion NOTE Vehicles equipped with a 5 7L engine must use SAE 5W 20 oil Failure to do so may result in improper operation of the Fuel Saver Technology Refer to Fuel Saver Technology If Equipped in Starting and Oper ating for further information 520 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Lubricants that do not have both the engine oil
252. en DRIVE and SPORT modes Manual shifts can be made using the AutoStick shift ram control refer to AutoStick in this section Pressing the shift paddles while in the DRIVE or SPORT position will manually select the transmission gear and will display the current gear in the instrument cluster as 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 382 STARTING AND OPERATING Ss Shifting From PARK To DRIVE Firmly press the brake pedal press the lock button on the shift lever then pull and hold the shift lever fully rearward until D is displayed in the EVIC To shift back into PARK from DRIVE bring the vehicle to a complete stop fully press the brake pedal press the lock button on the shift lever then push and hold the shift lever fully forward until P is displayed in the EVIC Shifting From REVERSE To NEUTRAL Pull the shift lever rearward to the first detent and release N will display in the EVIC To shift back into REVERSE from NEUTRAL firmly press the brake pedal press the lock button on the shift lever then push the shift lever forward to the first detent and release R will display in the EVIC Shifting From NEUTRAL To DRIVE Firmly press the brake pedal press the lock button on the shift lever then pull the shift lever rearward and release D will display in the EVIC To shift back into NEUTRAL from DRIVE push the shift lever forward to the first detent and release N will display in the EVI
253. en a more spirited driving experience is desired It is also intended for driving in deep snow sand or gravel This mode disables the TCS portion of the ESC and raises the threshold for ESC activation which allows for more wheel spin than what ESC normally allows ee STARTING AND OPERATING 413 The ESC Off switch is located on the switch bank in the center of the instrument panel To enter the Partial Off mode momentarily press the ESC Off switch and the ESC off indicator light will illuminate To turn the ESC on again momentarily press the ESC Off switch and the ESC off indicator light will turn off NOTE To improve the vehicle s traction when driving with snow chains or when starting off in deep snow sand or gravel it may be desirable to switch to the Partial Off mode by momentarily pressing the ESC Off switch Once the situation requiring Partial Off mode is overcome turn the ESC on again by momen tarily pressing the ESC Off switch This may be done while the vehicle is in motion Full Off If Equipped This mode is intended for off highway or off road use only and should not be used on any public roadways In this mode all TCS and ESC stability features are turned OFF To enter the Full Off mode press and hold the ESC Off switch for five seconds while the vehicle is stopped with the engine running After five seconds a chime will sound the ESC Of
254. en the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M The engine can be started two consecutive times two 15 minute cycles with the RKE transmitter However the ignition must be cycled to the RUN position before you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The Vehicle Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle NOTE To avoid unintentional shutdowns the system will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote Start request To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle Before the end of 15 minute cycle press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm if equipped Then prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle press and release the START STOP button NOTE The message Push Start Button will display in the EVIC until you push the START button DOOR LOCKS Manual Door Locks To lock each door push the door lock knob on each door trim panel downward To unlock the front doors pull the inside door handle to the first detent To unlock the rear doors pull the door lock knob on the door trim panel upward THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 WARNING For personal security and safety in the event of a collision lock the
255. enance Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly Until repaired drive with all side windows fully open monoxide poisoning Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which can kill Never run the engine in a closed area such as Continued 460 STARTING AND OPERATING Se FLEXIBLE FUEL 3 6L ENGINE ONLY Ethanol Fuel E 85 Eee E 85 is a mixture of approximately 85 fuel ethanol and E 85 General Information 15 unleaded gasoline The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel ve hicles only These vehicles can be identified by a unique fuel filler door label that states Ethanol E 85 or Un Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could leaded Gasoline Only This section only covers those cause serious personal injury Never have any smok subjects that are unique to these vehicles Please refer to ing materials lit in or near the vehicle when remov the other sections of this manual for information on ing the fuel filler tube cap gas cap or filling the features that are common between Flexible Fuel and tank Do not use E 85 as a cleaning agent and never gasoline only powered vehicles use it near an open flame CAUTION Fuel Requirements Only vehicles with the E 85 fuel filler door label can If your vehicle is E 85 compatible it will operate on operate on E 85 unleaded gasoline wit
256. equip ment manufacturer s instructions Use of safety chains is mandatory Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main structural members of the vehicle not to bumpers or associated brackets State and local laws regarding vehicles under tow must be observed If you must use the accessories wipers defrosters etc while being towed the ignition must be in the ON RUN position not the ACC position If the key fob is unavailable or the vehicle s battery is discharged see Manual Park Release or Shift Lever Override in this section for instructions on shifting the transmission out of PARK for towing CAUTION Do not use sling type equipment when towing Damage to the fascia will occur When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck do not attach to the front or rear suspension components Damage to your vehicle may result from improper towing e Do not push or tow this vehicle with another vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and trans mission may result e The manufacturer does not recommend towing this vehicle using a tow dolly Vehicle damage may occur Flatbed towing is recommended DO NOT tow an AWD vehicle with the rear wheels on the ground 508 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME If the transmission is operable vehicles WITHOUT AWD CAUTION may be towed with rear wheels on the ground under the following conditions Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require Thetransn ssion
257. er 000 402 Shallow Standing Water 402 B POWER STEERING 5 5424 Ike je eR 404 ll FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5 7L ENGINE ONLY IF EQUIPPED oo eee ee E RR 405 B PARKING BRAKE 52 42 69 eb RR EE 405 E ANTI LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM 408 ll ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM 410 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 410 Traction Control System TCS i 410 Brake Assist System BAS 411 Electronic Stability Control ESC 412 Hill Start Assist HSA 00 414 Ready Alert Braking 416 Rain Brake Support 000 416 ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC OFF Indicator Light 416 Synchronizing ESC 0 000006 418 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION 418 Tire Markings cen RR 418 Tire Identification Number TIN 422 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 369 Tire Terminology And Definitions 424 Life OF Tire acea ee asser erret 438 Tire Loading And Tire Pressure 425 Replacement Tires 000000 439 E TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION 429 W TIRE CHAINS TRACTION DEVICES 441 Tire Pressure 5 iaa Acasa bd reat king as 429 W TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS 442 Tir
258. er The climate control system filters outside air containing dust pollen and some odors Strong odors cannot be totally filtered out Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle for filter replacement instructions STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS Bl STARTING PROCEDURES 372 W AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION 377 Automatic Transmission 372 Key Ignition Park Interlock 379 Keyless Enter N Go 00 373 Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System Normal Starting ds po RR wee 373 Eight Speed Automatic Transmission Extreme Cold Weather If Equipped iue Below 20 F Or 29 C lt sssrsserssesasa 375 Five Speed Automatic Transmission If Engine Fails To Start 005 375 ICEQUIDDED aj dosdsadublep tod aqaa oe Hi After Starting ccce tte PRX Re na 377 AUTRES A TASES pem Senate aa 298 Operation Eight Speed Transmission E ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED 377 If Equipped sse et a a ei ean 396 Operation Five Speed Transmission 398 368 STARTING AND OPERATING Ss ll ALL WHEEL DRIVE AWD IF EQUIPPED 400 E DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES 401 Acceleration saci cst dre ahaa oes 401 Jracton 13 59 edu ea sede eR 401 E DRIVING THROUGH WATER 402 Flowing Rising Wat
259. erent size and type M S Snow ram RWD vehicle on 235 55R18 100V and P235 55R18 between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable 99V tires reduced size snow chains or traction devices handling You could lose control and have a collision with a maximum projection of 6 mm beyond the tire profile is recommended Install on Rear Tires Only 442 STARTING AND OPERATING Se CAUTION To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires observe the following precautions Because of restricted traction device clearance be tween tires and other suspension components it is important that only traction devices in good condi tion are used Broken devices can cause serious damage Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could indicate device breakage Remove the damaged parts of the device before further use e Install device as tightly as possible and then re tighten after driving about mile 0 8 km Do not exceed 30 mph 48 km h Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps especially with a loaded vehicle Continued CAUTION Continued Do not drive for prolonged period on dry pave ment Observe the traction device manufacturer s instruc tions on the method of installation operating speed and conditions for use Always use the suggested operating speed of the device manufac turer s if it is less than 30 mph 48 km h Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire TIRE
260. erformance test Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning system as the chemicals can damage your air condi tioning components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty 524 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air condi tioning system Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode injuring you Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail requiring costly repairs Refer to Warranty Information Book located on the DVD for further warranty information The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced technician Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R134a If Equipped R 134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro carbon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone saving product How ever the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealer or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C system sealers stop leak products seal conditioners compressor oil and refr
261. esired To lengthen or shorten the steering column pull the steering wheel outward or push it inward as desired To lock the steering column in position push the control handle up until fully engaged WARNING Do not adjust the steering column while driving Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv ing with the steering column unlocked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death 218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE POWER TILT TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN IF EQUIPPED This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column The power tilt telescoping steering column switch is located below the multifunc tion lever on the steering column Power Tilt Telescoping Steering Switch To tilt the steering column move the switch up or down as desired To lengthen or shorten the steering column pull the switch toward you or push the switch away from you as desired ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219 NOTE For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat you can use your Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmit ter or the memory switch on the driver s door trim panel to return the tilt telescopic steering column to pre programmed positions Refer to Driver Memory Seat in this section WARNING Do not adjust the steerin
262. esponsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal distance check for these two conditions 1 A weak battery in the RKE transmitter The expected life of the battery is a minimum of three years 2 Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower airport transmitter and some mobile or CB radios REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry C RKE transmitter to start the engine conve niently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security The system has a range of approximately 300 ft 91 m 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE Battery at an acceptable charge level The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic e RKE PANIC button not pressed transmission to be equipped with Remote Start f e System not disabled from previous remote start event e Obstructions between the vehicle and RKE transmitter may reduce this range e Vehicle theft alarm not active How To Use Remote Start e Ignition in OFF position All of the following conditions must be met before the engine will remote start e Shift lever in PARK e Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or confined area Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon e Doors closed oxide CO which is odorless and colorless Carbon 2 Hood dosed Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious in jury
263. et tings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information When the ParkSense soft key is pressed to disable the system the EVIC will display the PARK ASSIST SYS TEM OFF message for approximately five seconds Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE position and ParkSense is turned off the instrument cluster will display PARK ASSIST OFF message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE 262 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Service The ParkSense Park Assist System During vehicle start up when the ParkSense Park Assist system has detected a fault condition the Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will actuate a single chime once per ignition cycle and it will display the CLEAN PARK ASSIST SERVICE PARK ASSIST or the SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM message Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further in formation When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system has detected a fault condition the EVIC will display the CLEAN PARK ASSIST SERVICE PARK ASSIST or SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE Under this condition ParkSense will not operate Cleaning The ParkSense System Clean the ParkSense sensors with water car wash soap
264. ext message UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153 di FM 95 5 70 out Me lil be there soon Reply Forward Inbox Sy Ey OFF Radio Player Controls Climate More Once a message is received and viewed or listened to you will have the following options e Send a Reply e Forward e Call 154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Send Messages Using Soft Keys FM 95 5 Messagi gt You can send messages using Uconnect Phone To send See a new message inbox 1 Yes New 2 No 4 L4 Mi e Touch the Phone soft key ENS E e Touch the messaging soft key then New Message 4 can t talk right now 5 Call me e Touch one of the 18 preset messages and the person STORM ToU MG you wish to send the message to 18 toms in st JUL a OFF NW o av Phone More If multiple numbers are available for the contact select which number you would like to have the message sent Radio Player Controls Climate N e Press Send or Cancel ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155 Send Messages Using Voice Commands VENOSE e Press the b button LY EXSEST Te liste n Inbox 1 Yes e After the Listening prompt and the following beep pmo say Send message to John Smith mobile E e After the system prompts you for what message you 4 I can t talk right now want to send say the message you wish to send or say 5 Call me List
265. extreme condi tions will have an adverse effect on paint metal trim and underbody protection The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle What Causes Corrosion Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle The most common causes are e Road salt dirt and moisture accumulation e Stone and gravel impact Insects tree sap and tar ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 543 CAUTION Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such as steel wool or scouring powder that will e Salt in the air near seacoast localities e Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants Washing Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your ve hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash or a mild car wash soap and rinse the panels completely with clear water e If insects tar or other similar deposits have accumu lated on your vehicle use MOPARO Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove e Use a high quality cleaner wax such as MOPAR Cleaner Wax to remove road film stains and to protect your paint finish Take care never to scratch the paint Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish scratch metal and painted surfaces Use of power washers exceeding 1 200 psi 8 274 kPa can result in damage or removal of
266. f Indicator Light will illuminate and the ESC OFF message will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC To turn ESC ON again momentarily press the ESC Off switch WARNING The Electronic Stability Control ESC cannot pre vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions ESC cannot prevent all accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning ESC also cannot prevent collisions Continued 414 STARTING AND OPERATING xe WARNING Continued resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappro priate driver input for the conditions Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Hill Start Assist HSA The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill HSA will maintain the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the brake pedal If the driver does not apply the throttle during this short period of time the system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill The system will release brake pressure in proportion t
267. f the transmission can be reset we recom mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest possible convenience Your authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur If the transmission cannot be reset authorized dealer service is required Five Speed Automatic Transmission If Equipped The transmission gear position display located in the instrument cluster indicates the transmission gear range You must press the brake pedal to move the shift lever out of PARK refer to Brake Transmission Shift Inter lock System in this section To drive move the shift lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position The electronically controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule The transmission electronics are self calibrating therefore the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt This is a normal condition and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles kilometers Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting between these gears The transmission shift lever has only PARK REVERSE NEUTRAL and DRIVE shift positions Manual shifts can be made using the AutoStick shift control refer to AutoStick in this section Moving the shift lever to the left or right while in the DRIVE position or tapping one
268. f tire wear or visible damage E STARTING AND OPERATING 431 CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the valve stem Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tire inflation pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with temperature changes Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi 7 kPa per 12 F 7 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in the winter Example If garage temperature 68 F 20 C and the outside temperature 32 F 0 C then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi 21 kPa which equals 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 7 C for this outside temperature condition Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi 13 to 40 kPa during operation DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low 432 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Tire Pressures For High Sp
269. fication Number PIN Keep the PIN in a secure location This number is required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an autho rized dealer this procedure consists of programming a blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics A blank Key Fob is one that has never been programmed 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME NOTE When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer Sys tem serviced bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer Customer Key Programming Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be performed at an authorized dealer General Information The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules Part 15 and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause unde sired operation VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM IF EQUIPPED The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors for unauthorized entry and the Keyless Enter N Go Start Stop button for unauthorized operation While the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed interior switches for door locks and decklid release are disabled If something triggers the alarm the Vehicle Security Alarm will pro vide the following audible and visible signals the horn will pulse the park lamps and or turn signals will flash and th
270. for your area 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect Phone is operational you may reach the emergency number as follows e Press the button to begin e After the Listening prompt and the following beep say Call Emergency or Dial Emergency and the Uconnect Phone will instruct the paired mobile phone to call the emergency number This feature is supported in the U S Canada and Mexico NOTE The Emergency call may also be initiated by using the touch screen The emergency number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 911 for the U S and Canada and 060 for Mexico The number dialed may not be applicable with the available mobile service and area The Uconnect Phone does slightly lower your chances of successfully making a phone call as to that for the mobile phone directly WARNING Your phone must be turned on and connected to the Uconnect Phone to allow use of this vehicle feature in emergency situations when the mobile phone has network coverage and stays connected to the Uconnect Phone Roadside Assistance Towing Assistance If you need roadside towing assistance e Press the w button to begin e After the Listening prompt and the following beep say Roadside Assistance or say Towing Assistance ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147 NOTE The roadside towing assist
271. formation refer to Sport Mode in Starting And Operating UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317 15 Vehicle Security Light If Equipped This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi mately 15 seconds when the vehicle security alarm is arming and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed 16 Electronic Stability Control ESC OFF Indicator Light If Equipped This light indicates the Electronic Stability Con 8 trol ESC is off OFF 17 Brake Warning Light This light monitors various brake functions BRAKE including brake fluid level and parking brake application If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied that the brake fluid level is low or that there is a problem with the anti lock brake system reservoir 318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti Lock Brake System ABS Electronic Stability Control ESC system In this case the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected If the problem is related to the brake booster the ABS pump will run when applying the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop The dual brake system provides a reserve braking
272. g column while driving Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv ing with the steering column unlocked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death HEATED STEERING WHEEL IF EQUIPPED The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps warm your hands in cold weather The heated steering wheel has only one temperature setting Once the heated steering wheel has been turned on it will operate for up to 80 minutes before automatically shutting off The heated steering wheel can shut off early or may not turn on when the steering wheel is already warm The heated steering wheel can be turned on and off using the Uconnect System 220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Touch the Controls soft key then touch the Heated Wheel soft key to turn on the heated steering wheel Press the Heated Wheel soft key a second time to turn the heated steering wheel off 70 out 6 1600 950 audio OFF fl EVA Controls More Player Clirnate Controls Soft Key t FM 95 5 70 ou Controls x Driver Passenger Heated Heated at Seat Sea Heated Wheel mi Screen OFF m L F Climate Nav ei y Radio Player w Controls More Phone Heated Steering Wheel Soft Key NOTE The engine must be running for the heated steering wheel to operate ee UNDERST
273. g vehicle under most passenger and cargo loading conditions A hydraulic pump contained within the shock absorbers mm raises the rear of the vehicle to the correct height It takes approximately 1 mile 1 6 km of driving for the leveling to complete depending on road surface conditions If the leveled vehicle is not moved for approximately 15 hours the leveling system will bleed itself down The vehicle must be driven to reset the system Information Provided by DEALER UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS E INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 309 EVIC Red Telltales 0 eese 327 E INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 000 00 310 Oil Change Due E INSTRUMENT CLUSTER PREMIUM 311 Fuel Economy iis ee E INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 312 ACC Cruise Control If Equipped 332 E ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION Vehicle Speed isses 333 CENTEINEVIC ada sudebtFedaeqt oss stri Se Hn PMRRREEERRERERTEERS 333 PR aod ud M nd Tere aee T AT MAI 334 EVIC White Telltales 0 LL LLL 325 Vehicle Info Customer Information Features 335 EVIC Amber Telltales o o esses pag ERE chine etd aed ee fos ds Turn Menu OFF ies 336 308 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Bl Uconnect SETTINGS lessen 336 Mi STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONT
274. ge Indicator 313 Restraint Heades sse bg Ob Se DAR EE ee 191 Restraints Child 0 0 0 ee ns 74 Restraints Occupant 2 6 eee eee 46 Rocking Vehicle When Stuck 500 Rotation Tires ier un RR ER RR 442 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle 99 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 102 Safety Defects Reporting lle 581 Safety Exhaust GaS sece cesera 0000000 eee eee 98 Safety Information Tire 000 418 Safety Tips es c6 eases dean sade re eee aes 98 Schedule Maintenance 000 00008 568 Seat Belt Maintenance i e 547 Seat Belt Reminder 602 INDEX eee Seat Belts i54 zo pa ac EE raria RR 8964 46 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage 54 And Pregnant Women llle 59 Child Restraint llle een 74 EXtend ef 2 5 0040034 a ee Y Re bw eai E edo ps 59 Front 5eab 42a dera Marais ea eaa RC EC den e x 50 Inspection 4a yeso t ras ee oe 99 Operating Instructions lesse 51 PretensionletS s sn 8444 HRs Sh GERE GR EV 57 R ar Seat eoa ea WO RH C edes 50 Untwisting Procedure 000 55 OedlS idea so cg na PHS SNS ER Ra E E oe Pes 181 Adj stment cues e rdi E RR UA 181 Easy Entry 24 9 ee dah oe a ege qus 198 Head Restraints 0 0000 cece eee 191 Heated iuc bas dh aoe bo fae pena aes 186 Height Adjustment 0 00 182 Me MOFY cut 3e bee ei a Ree e a mt
275. h is in the OFF position If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door panel switch is used to lock the vehicle once all open doors have been closed the vehicle checks the inside and outside of the vehicle for any valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters If one of the vehicle s Passive Entry RKE transmitters is detected inside the vehicle and no other valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters are detected out side the vehicle the Passive Entry System automatically unlocks all vehicle doors and chirps the horn three times on the third attempt ALL doors will lock and the Passive Entry RKE transmitter can be locked in the vehicle ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 NOTE The vehicle will only unlock the doors when the doors are locked using the door panel switch a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter is detected inside the vehicle and no valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter is detected outside the vehicle The vehicle will not unlock the doors when any of the following conditions are true The doors are locked using the RKE transmitter The doors are locked using the LOCK button on the Passive Entry door handles The doors are manually locked using the door lock knobs There is a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter outside the vehicle and within 5 ft 1 5 m of either Passive Entry door handle Three attempts are made to lock the doors using the door panel switch and then close the doors To Enter The Trunk W
276. h Low Beam Switch Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam Pull the multifunction lever toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam Flash To Pass You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you This will turn on the high beams headlights until the lever is released 208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Front Map Reading Lights time visibility To turn the lights off press the switch a second time The lights will also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE is pressed The front map reading lights are mounted in the over head console 031433150 031433151 Front Map Reading Lights Each light can be turned on by pressing a switch on either side of the console These buttons are backlit for night Front Map Reading Light Switches UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209 Courtesy Lights Ambient Light The courtesy lights can be turned on by pressing the top The overhead console is equipped with an ambient light corner of the lens To turn the lights off press the lensa feature This light casts illumination for improved visibil second time ity of the floor center console and PRNDL area 031464435 033333449 Courtesy Lights Ambient Light 210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Interior Lights Dimmer Controls The interior lights come on when a d
277. h an octane rating of 87 or E 85 fuel or any mixture of these two fuels ee STARTING AND OPERATING 461 For best results a refueling pattern that avoids alternating between E 85 and unleaded gasoline is recommended When you do switch fuel types it is recommended that e you do not add less than 5 gallons 19 Liters when refueling you drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at least 5 miles 8 km Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard starting and or significant deterioration in driveability during warm up NOTE Use seasonally adjusted E 85 fuel ASTM D5798 With non seasonally adjusted E 85 fuel you may experience hard starting and rough idle following start up even if the above recommendations are followed especially when the ambient temperature is below 32 F 0 C e Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully compatible with E 85 and may form deposits in your engine To eliminate driveability issues that may be caused by these deposits a supplemental gasoline additive such as MOPAR Injector Cleanup or Techron may be used Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles E 85 And Gasoline Vehicles FFV vehicles operated on E 85 require specially formu lated engine oils These special requirements are included in MOPAR engine oils and in equivalent oils meeting Chrysler Specification MS 6395 The manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API Certified a
278. h downward on the seat switch the seat will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when the desired position is reached 184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Tilting The Seat Up Or Down WARNING The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four directions Pull upward or push downward on the front or rear of the seat switch the front or rear of the seat cushion will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when the desired position is reached e Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death e Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat Reclining The Seatback belts and while the vehicle is parked Serious The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted rearward Push the seatback switch forward or rearward seat belt the seat will move in the direction of the switch Release Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the the switch when the desired position is reached shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt which could result in serious injury or death ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185 CAUTION Do not place any article under a power seat or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the se
279. h rearward and release it within one half second The sunroof and sunshade will open automati cally from any position The sunroof and sunshade will open fully and stop automatically This is called Express Open During Express Open operation any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof Opening Sunroof Manual Mode To open the sunroof press and hold the switch rearward to full open Any release of the switch will stop the movement The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and held rearward again Closing Sunroof Express Press the switch forward and release it within one half second and the sunroof will close automatically from any ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 281 position The sunroof will close fully and stop automati cally This is called Express Close During Express Close operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Closing Sunroof Manual Mode To close the sunroof press and hold the switch in the forward position Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially closed condition until the switch is pushed and held forward again Pinch Protect Feature This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close operation If an ob struction in the path of the sunroof is detected the sunroof will automatically retract Remove
280. h the or soft keys to adjust the hours up or down Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu or touch the X soft key to close out of the settings screen e Set Time Minutes When in this display you may adjust the minutes The Sync with GPS Time soft key must be unchecked To make your selection touch the or soft keys to adjust the minutes up or down Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu or touch the X soft key to close out of the settings screen 340 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M e Time Format When in this display you may select the time format display setting Touch the Time Format soft key until a check mark appears next to the 12hrs or 24hrs setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Show Time In Status Bar If Equipped When in this display you may turn on or shut off the digital clock in the status bar To change the Show Time Status setting touch the Show Time in Status Bar soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Safety Assistance After pressing the Safety Assistance soft key the fol lowing settings will be available e Front Collision Sensitivity If Equipped The Front Collision Warning FCW feature can be set to Far set to Near or turned Off The default statu
281. h to wear the vehicle seat belt properly see section on Child Restraints should be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt positioning booster seats Older children who do not use child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M If a child from 2 to 12 years old not in a rear facing child 5 If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be seat must ride in the front passenger seat move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint Refer to Child Restraints You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly 2 All occupants should always wear their lap and shoulder belts properly 3 The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front Air Bags room to inflate 4 Do notlean against the door or window Your vehicle has Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABIC or Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB and if deployment occurs the SABIC and SAB air bags will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the door modified to accommodate a disabled person contact the Customer Center Phone numbers are provided under If You Need Assistance WARNING e Relying on the a
282. hange The LO level setting will turn OFF automatically after approximately 45 minutes Ventilated Seats If Equipped On some models both the driver and passenger seats are ventilated Located in the seat cushion and seatback are small fans that draw air from the seat surface through fine perforations in the seat cover to help keep the driver and front passenger cooler in higher ambient tempera tures The ventilated seats can be operated using the Uconnect System Front Ventilated Seat Operation Uconnect 8 4 8 4 Nav Press the Controls soft key located on the bottom of the Uconnect display 2 Player OFF wl Controls Climate More Controls Soft Key 190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Press the Driver or Passenger seat soft key once to select HI level ventilation Press the soft key a second time to select LO level ventilation Press the soft key a third time to shut off the seat ventilation FM 91 7 Controls Driver I 5 Vented Heated Wheel e OFF Climate kj E L EA Controls More 030564881 Radio Player Phone Ventilated Seats Soft Keys NOTE The engine must be running for the ventilated seats to operate Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start On models that are equipped with remote start the driver s ventilated seat can be programmed to come on during a remote start Refer to Auto On Comfort amp Remote Start in Understa
283. he Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power sunroof switch will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature NOTE e For vehicles equipped with the EVIC the power sunroof switch will remain active for up to approxi mately ten minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature The Ignition Off time is programmable using the Uconnect System Refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS There are three 12 Volt 13 Amp electrical power outlets on this vehicle The power outlets are protected by a fuse Insert cigar lighter or accessory plug into the power outlets for use to ensure proper operation NOTE To ensure proper operation a MOPAR knob and element must be used CAUTION Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts 13 Amps at 12 Volts If the 160 Watt 13 Amp power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will need to be replaced Continued 288 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION Continued Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by yo
284. he Features Of Your Vehicle for further information Light Ring In Rear Cupholder UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 295 STORAGE Glovebox Storage f The glovebox storage compartment is located on the passenger side of the instrument panel Opened Glovebox Storage Compartment Glovebox Storage Compartment 296 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Console Features There is a cubby bin located forward of the shift lever The cubby bin is covered with a push push actuated door Push inward on the door to open it push the door a second time to close it Two separate storage compartments are also located underneath the center console armrest Center Console Inside the center console armrest there is a removable upper storage tray that can be slid forward rearward on rails for access to the lower storage area This tray has an integrated coin holder along with additional area for UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 297 small items like an ipod or phone Below the upper tray WARNING the lower storage compartment is made for larger items like CDs and tissue boxes In addition the 12 volt power Do not operate this vehicle with a console compart outlet USB and Aux jack are located here ment lid in the open position Cellular phones music players and other handheld electronic devices should be stowed while driving Use of these devices while driving can cause an accident du
285. he belt path of the child restraint Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight against the child seat Tolock the seat belt pull down on the shoulder part of the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor Then allow the webbing to retract back into the retractor As the webbing retracts you will hear a clicking sound This means the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor If it is locked you should not be able to pull out any web bing If the retractor is not locked repeat step 5 Finally pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint while you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle seat If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the seating position has a top tether anchorage connect the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether strap Refer to Lower Anchors and Tethers for Chil dren LATCH Restraint System for directions to attach a tether anchor 9 Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path It should not move more than 1 inch 25 4 mm in any direction Any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and
286. heting sound as the belt retracts Allow the webbing to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfort ably wrap around the occupant s mid section Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click Automatic Locking Retractor Mode ALR If Equipped In this mode the shoulder belt is automatically pre locked The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt The Automatic Locking Mode is available on all passenger seating positions with a combination lap shoulder belt Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating position that has a belt with this feature Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in the rear seat How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode 1 Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt 2 Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is extracted 3 Allow the belt to retract As the belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode Unbuckle the combination lap shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive emergency locking mode ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 WARNING e The belt and retractor assembly must be repla
287. hicle Month Day and Hour of Manufacture MDH The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the VIN Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers and cargo The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR WARNING Because the front wheels steer the vehicle it is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have a collision Overloading The load carrying components axle springs tires 5 wheels etc of your vehicle will provide satisfactory service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and the front and rear GAWR The best way to figure out the total weight of your vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for operation Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that it is not over the GVWR 468 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle separately It is important that you distribute the load evenly over the front and rear axles Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and shorten useful service life Heavie
288. hicle Idle the vehicle with do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops Proper lug nut bolt torque is very important to ensure mm back into the normal range If the pointer remains on that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle Any the H turn the engine off immediately and call for time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the service vehicle the lug nuts bolts should be torqued using a properly calibrated torque wrench 486 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Torque Specifications Lug Nut Bolt Torque Lug Nut Lug Nut Bolt Size Bolt Socket Size 130 Ft Lbs 176 N m M14 x 1 50 22mm Use only Chrysler recommended lug nuts bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles 0605005441 Wheel Mounting Surface Tighten the lug nuts bolts in a star pattern until each nut bolt has been tightened twice After 25 miles 40 km check the lug nut bolt torque to be sure that all the lug nuts bolts are properly seated against the wheel WHAT TO DO INEMERGENCIES 487 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING WARNING Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle c
289. his warning may result in personal injury 3 Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise 4 Refer to Torque Table for proper lug nut torque 5 After 25 miles 40 km check the lug nut torque with a torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly seated against the wheel JUMP STARTING PROCEDURES If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack Jump starting can be dangerous if done improperly so please follow the procedures in this section carefully NOTE When using a portable battery booster pack follow the manufacturer s operating instructions and precautions WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 497 CAUTION Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other booster source with a system voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery starter motor alternator or electrical system may occur WARNING Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury 220 060836876 Preparations For Jump Start Remote Battery Post Locations The battery is stored under an access cover in the trunk 1 Remote Positive 4 Post Remote battery posts are located on the right side of the 2 Remote Negative Post engine compartment for jump starting 498 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Se Remote
290. hrough an automated customer service center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se You can also send stored mobile phonebook entries as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager entries For example if you previously created a Phone book entry with First and or Last Name as Voicemail Password then if you press the vk button and say Send Voicemail Password the Uconnect Phone will then send the corresponding phone number associated with the phonebook entry as tones over the phone NOTE e The first number encountered for that contact will be sent All other numbers entered for that contact will be ignored You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone network configurations This is normal e Some paging and voice mail systems have system time out settings that are too short and may not allow the use of this feature Pauses wait or other characters that are supported by some phones are not supported over Bluetooth These additional symbols will be ignored in the dialing a numbered sequence Barge In Overriding Prompts The VR button can be used when you wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice command immediately For example if a prompt is asking There are two numbers with the name John Say the full name you could press the EVR button and say John Smith to select that option without having to liste
291. ht speed change on moderate hills is normal In addition downshifting may occur while climbing uphill or descending down hill This is normal operation and necessary to main tain set speed Setting The Following Distance In ACC The specified following distance for ACC can be set by varying the distance setting between 3 long 2 me dium and 1 short Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed ACC calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead This distance setting displays in the EVIC NE 156789mi 102 ACC 200 km h Distance 3 032363707 Distance Set 3 long 238 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NE 156789mi 102 ACC 200 km h Distance 2 b P LI Distance Set 2 medium 032363708 NE 156789mi 102 ACC 200 km h Distance 1 032363709 Distance Set 1 short To change the distance setting press the Distance button and release Each time the button is pressed the distance setting adjusts between 3 long 2 medium and 1 short ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 239 If there is no vehicle ahead the vehicle will maintain the set speed If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the same lane the EVIC displays the Sensed Vehicle Indi cator icon and the system adjusts vehicle speed auto matically to maintain the distance setting regardless of the set speed The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until The vehicle ahead
292. i cally activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on the windshield To make your selection touch the Rain Sensing soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Hill Start Assist If Equipped When this feature is selected the Hill Start Assist HSA system is active Refer to Electronic Brake Control System in Starting And Operating for system function and operating information To make your selection touch the Hill Start Assist soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Lights After pressing the Lights soft key the following settings will be available e Headlight Illumination On Approach When this feature is selected the headlights will activate and remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter To change the Illuminated Approach status touch the or soft key to select your desired time interval Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Headlights With Wipers If Equipped When this feature is selected and the headlight switch is in the AUTO position the headlights will turn on ap proximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on 344 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
293. igerants Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling HFO 1234yf If Equipped HFO 1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydro fluorocarbon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmen tal Protection Agency and is an ozone saving product ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 525 However the manufacturer recommends that air condi tioning service be performed by authorized dealer or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C system sealers stop leak products seal conditioners compressor oil and refrigerants A C Air Filter The filter is located in the fresh air inlet under the hood behind a removable panel in the cowl on the passenger side of the vehicle next to the windshield wipers When installing a new filter ensure its proper orientation 1 Remove the access door in the cowl screen by pressing the retaining clips Access Door 526 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 2 Unsnap both ends and lift the filter access cover 072610693 A C Air Filter Filter Access Cover 5 Close the filter access cover 3 Remove the used filter Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper 4 Install the new filter with arrows pointing in the maintenance intervals direction of airflow which is toward the rear of the vehicle text and arrows on the filter will indicate this ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 527 Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points inc
294. il gasoline etc NOTE Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on geographical area and frequency of use Poor perfor mance of blades may be present with chattering marks water lines or wet spots If any of these conditions are present clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary 528 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Adding Washer Fluid The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the front of the engine compartment Be sure to check the fluid level at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent not radiator antifreeze and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water When refilling the washer fluid reservoir apply some washer fluid to a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper blades clean This will help blade performance To prevent freeze up of your windshield washer system in cold weather select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 gal 4 L of washer fluid when the message Low Washer Fluid appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped WARNING Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution Exhaust System The best protection against carbon mono
295. ildup on the front brake rotors It only functions when the windshield wipers are in the LO or HI mode it does not function in the intermittent mode When Rain Brake Support is active there is no notification to the driver and no driver interaction is required ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC OFF Indicator Light The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch is cycled to the ON position It should go out with the engine If the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Lal ee running ee STARTING AND OPERATING 417 Light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your autho rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light lo cated in the instrument cluster starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is active If the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during ac celeration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing roa
296. ile the vehicle is moving You could lose control and have an accident Always adjust the pedals while the vehicle is parked 224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL IF EQUIPPED When engaged the Electronic Speed Control takes over accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph 40 km h The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the In right side of the steering wheel i CANCEL 032209541 Electronic Speed Control Buttons 1 ON OFF 2 RES 4 CANCEL 3 SET ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225 NOTE In order to ensure proper operation the Elec tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at the same time If this occurs the Electronic Speed Control System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic Speed Control ON OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed To Activate Push the ON OFF button The Cruise Indicator Light in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will illuminate To turn the system off push the ON OFF button a second time The Cruise Indicator Light will turn off The system should be turned off when not in use WARNING Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have an accident A
297. in the SET position the set speed will continue to decrease until the button is released Release the button when the desired speed is reached and the new set speed will be established Pressing the SET button once will result in a 1 mph 1 0 km h decrease in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph 1 0 km h NOTE Tap results of 1 mph or 1 km h depends on selection of US or METRIC units in the EVIC display settings menu or the RADIO settings menu dependent on vehicle configuration ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 227 To Accelerate For Passing Press the accelerator as you would normally When the pedal is released the vehicle will return to the set speed Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the vehicle set speed NOTE The Electronic Speed Control system maintains speed up and down hills A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed Control WARNING Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed Your ve hicle could go too fast for the conditions and you could lose control and have an accident Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding icy snow covered or slippery ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL
298. ined Occupant s Cargo Luggage and from Tire Placard weight Trailer Tongue Occupant 1 200 Ibs Weight Occupant 2 130 Ib Occupant 3 160 Ibs 865 Ibs 195 Ibs Occupant 1 210 Ibs Occupant 2 180 Ibs Occupant 3 150 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 540 Ibs 540 Ibs 325 Ibs Occupant 1 200 lbs Occupant 2 200 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 400 Ibs 865 Ibs 400 Ibs 465 Ibs 811a4d11 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 429 WARNING Safety WARNING Overloading of your tires is dangerous Overloading can cause tire failure affect vehicle handling and Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause collisions Under inflation increases tire flexing and can re sult in over heating and tire failure increase your stopping distance Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle Never overload them Over inflation reduces a tire s ability to cushion TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION y mn M i shock Objects on the road and chuckholes can Tire Pressure cause damage that result in tire failure e Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect ve hicle handling and can fail suddenly resulting in loss of vehicle control e Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob lems You could lose control of your vehicle Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Three primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure Continued 430 STARTING AND OPERATING Se W
299. ing Continued 102 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns Check for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks Inspect sidewalls for cuts cracks and bulges Check the wheel nuts for tightness Check the tires including spare for proper cold inflation pressure Lights Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and exterior lights while you work the controls Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel Door Latches Check for positive closing latching and locking Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel engine coolant oil or other fluid leaks Also if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel power steering fluid if equipped or brake fluid leaks are suspected the cause should be located and corrected immediately UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS ll MIRRORS Automatic Dimming Mirror Outside Mirrors Outside Mirrors Folding Feature If Equipped Driver s Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped Outside Mirrors With Turn Signal And Approach Lighting If Equipped Tilt Mirrors In Reverse If Equipped Power Mirrors Power Folding Outside
300. ing a quantity of non toxic gas The inflating SAB exits through the seat seam into the space between the occupant and the door The SAB fully inflates in about 10 milliseconds The side air bag moves at a very high speed and with such a high force that it could injure you if you are not seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side air bag inflates This especially applies to children Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC Inflator Units During collisions where the impact is confined to a particular area of the side of the vehicle the ORC may deploy the SABIC air bags depending on the severity and type of collision In these events the ORC will deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle A quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the side curtain air bag The inflating side curtain air bag pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the window The air bag inflates in about 30 mil liseconds about one quarter of the time that it takes to blink your eyes with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side curtain air bag inflates This especially applies to children The side curtain air bag is only about 3 1 2 in 9 cm thick when it is inflated 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Because air bag sensors estimate deceleration over time vehicle speed and d
301. ing between the eight available gears To engage AutoStick simply tap one of the steering wheel mounted shift paddles while in DRIVE or SPORT mode Tapping to enter AutoStick ee STARTING AND OPERATING 397 mode will downshift the transmission to the next lower gear while using to enter AutoStick mode will retain the current gear When AutoStick is active the current transmission gear is displayed in the instrument cluster In AutoStick mode the transmission will shift up or down when is manually selected by the driver unless an engine lugging or overspeed condition would result It will remain in the selected gear until another upshift or downshift is chosen except as de scribed below e If AutoStick is engaged while in DRIVE mode the transmission will automatically shift up when maxi mum engine speed is reached If the accelerator is fully depressed the transmission will downshift when pos sible based on current vehicle speed and gear Lack of accelerator pedal activity will cause the transmis sion to revert to automatic operation e If AutoStick is engaged while in SPORT mode manual gear selection will be maintained until either SPORT mode is exited or as described below The transmission will not upshift automatically at redline in this mode nor will downshifts be obtained if the accelerator pedal is pressed to the floor In either DRIVE or SPORT mode the transmission will automaticall
302. ing cold start ups the blower fan will remain on low until the engine warms up The blower will increase in speed and transition into Auto mode Manual Operation The system allows for manual selection of blower speed air distribution mode A C status and recirculation con trol The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by adjusting the blower control The fan will now operate at a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected This allows the front occupants to control the volume of air circulated in the vehicle and cancel the Auto mode The operator can also select the direction of the airflow by selecting one of the available mode settings A C operation and Recirculation control can also be manually selected in Manual operation E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 365 Operating Tips NOTE Refer to the chart at the end of this section for suggested control settings for various weather condi tions Summer Operation The engine cooling system must be protected with a high quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corro sion protection and to protect against engine overheating A solution of 50 OAT Organic Additive Technology coolant that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 12106 and 50 water is recommended Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle for proper coolant selection Winter Operation Use of the air Recirculation mode during Winter months is
303. ion into the ACC or RUN position When you remove the Key Fob from the ignition or change the ignition to OFF for vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go the driver seat will move to a position 0 3 in 7 7 mm forward of the rear stop if the driver seat position is between 0 9 in and 27 in es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199 22 7 mm and 67 7 mm forward of the rear stop The TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD seat will return to its previously set position when you n tch t be released t the hood place the ignition to the ACC or RUN position ML E MEM dd A di MM EUN 1 Pull the hood release lever located under the left side of the instrument panel Z The Easy Entry Easy Exit feature is disabled when the driver seat position is less than 0 9 in 22 7 mm forward of the rear stop At this position there is no benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit or Easy Entry Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy Entry and Easy Exit position NOTE The Easy Entry Easy Exit feature can be enabled or disabled using the Uconnect System refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instru ment Panel for further information Hood Release Lever 200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Sx 2 Move to the outside of the vehicle and push the safety catch to the left The safety catch is located under the CAUTION center front edge of the hood To prevent po
304. ion with the vehicle in front of you NOTE In the Off setting FCW OFF will be displayed on the Uconnect display The system will retain the last setting selected by the driver after ignition shut down 254 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M FCW will not react to irrelevant objects such as over head objects ground reflections objects not in the path of the car stationary objects that are far away oncom ing traffic or leading vehicles with the same or higher rate of speed If the FCW becomes disabled then a warning will display on the EVIC screen FCW Unavailable Warning If the system turns off and the EVIC displays ACC FCW Unavailable Service Required there may be a temporary malfunction that limits FCW functionality Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions FCW will be temporarily unavailable If this occurs try activating FCW again later following a key cycle If the problem persists see your authorized dealer 3mi ACC FCW BIETET Service Required 035468894 ACC FCW Unavailable Service Required Warning ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 255 PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST IF EQUIPPED The ParkSense Park Assist system provides visual and audible indications of the distance between the rear and or front fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up or moving forward e g during a parking maneuver Refer to ParkSense System
305. ir bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions the air bags won t deploy at all Always wear your seat belts even though you have air bags e Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment could cause serious injury including death Air bags need room to inflate Sit back comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel Continued ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 WARNING Continued Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver even s on short trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver e Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain and cause a collision that includes you This can happen SABIC and Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB also far away from home or on your own street aS need room to inflate Do not lean against the door or window Sit upright in the center of the seat Research has shown that seat belts save lives and they e In a collision you and your passengers can suffer can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision Some much greater injuries if you are not properly buck of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown led up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility of other passengers or you can be thrown out of the ejec
306. ired for your vehicle Operating conditions such as frequent short trips trailer tow extremely hot or cold ambient temperatures and E85 fuel usage will influence when the Change Oil or Oil Change Re quired message is displayed Severe Operating Condi tions can cause the change oil message to illuminate as early as 3 500 miles 5 600 km since last reset Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 500 miles 805 km On Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC equipped vehicles Oil Change Required will be dis played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary On Non EVIC equipped vehicles Change Oil will flash in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change If a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your authorized dealer the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Oil Change Required in Understanding Your Instrument Panel or under In strument Cluster Description Odometer Trip Odom eter in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information es MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 569 NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change inter At Every Oil Change Interval As
307. is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subse quent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the sys tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315 CAUTION the ON RUN position before engine start If the bulb does not come on when turning the key from OFF to The TPMS has been optimized for the original ON RUN have the condition checked promptly equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and Certain conditions such as poor fuel quality etc may warning have been established for the tire size illuminate the MIL after engine start The vehicle should equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system opera be serviced if the light stays on through several of your tion or sensor damage may result when using re typical driving cycles In most situa
308. isable 033333450 Overhead Console 268 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Front Map Reading Lights To turn the lights off press the switch a second time The lights also turn on when a door is opened The lights will also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the RKE is pressed Lights are mounted in the overhead console Each light can be turned on by pressing the switch on either side of the console These buttons are backlit for night time visibility 031433151 031433150 Front Map Reading Light Switches Front Map Reading Lights UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 269 Courtesy Lights Sunglasses Bin Door The courtesy lights can be turned on by pressing the top At the front of the console a compartment is provided for corner of the lens To turn the lights off press the lens a the storage of a pair of sunglasses The storage compart second time ment access is a push push design Push the chrome pad on the door to open Push the chrome pad on the door to close 031464435 Courtesy Lights 033333448 Sunglasses Bin Door 270 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE SS GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED HomeLink replaces up to three hand held transmitters that operate devices such as garage door openers motor ized gates lighting or home security systems The HomeLink unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt battery The HomeLink buttons located on either
309. ission automatically upshifts through all forward gears The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteris tics under all normal operating conditions When frequent transmission shifting occurs such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi tions in hilly terrain traveling into strong head winds or while towing heavy trailers use the AutoStick shift control if equipped or the LOW range if equipped to select a lower gear Under these conditions using a lower gear will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup During extremely cold temperatures 22 F 30 C or be low transmission operation may be modified depending on engine and transmission temperature as well as vehicle speed Normal operation will resume once the transmis sion temperature has risen to a suitable level SPORT S If Equipped This mode alters the transmission s automatic shift schedule for sportier driving Upshift speeds are in creased to make full use of available engine power To switch between DRIVE and SPORT modes tap the shift lever rearward SPORT mode is only accessible from DRIVE LOW L If Equipped Use this range for engine braking when descending very steep grades In this range the transmission will down shift for increased engine braking To switch between DRIVE and LOW modes tap the shift lever rearward LOW mode is only accessible from DRIVE
310. ission into NEU TRAL and run the engine at idle or faster until the light components and cause a fire nmm turns off If the Transmission Temperature Warning Telltale is illuminated and you continue operating the vehicle in some circumstances you could cause the fluid to boil over come in contact with hot engine or exhaust e Electric Power Steering Malfunction CAUTION e This telltale is on when the Electric Power ae ae Steering is not operating and needs service Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera 5 P 8 ture Warning Telltale illuminated will eventually cause severe transmission damage or transmission failure 330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Oil Change Due Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The Oil Change Due message will display in the EVIC for five seconds after a single chime has sounded at the start of each ignition that an oil change is due The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position To turn off the message temporarily press and release the MENU button To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance perform the following procedure 1 Without pressing the brake pedal push the EN
311. it is not the same as your original equipment tire replace or repair the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity ee STARTING AND OPERATING 437 WARNING Limited use spares are for emergency use only In stallation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling With this tire do not drive more than the speed listed on the limit use spare wheel Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on your Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver s side B Pillar or the rear edge of the driver s side door Replace or repair the original equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control Tire Spinning When stuck in mud sand snow or ice conditions do not spin your vehicle s wheels above 30 mph 48 km h or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop ping when you are stuck Refer to Freeing A Stuck Vehicle in What To Do In Emergencies for further information WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam age or failure A tire could explode and injure some one Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h for more than 30 seconds continu ously when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed 438 STARTING AND
312. ith a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 3 ft 1 0 m of the deck lid press the button on the right side of CHMSL Center High Mounted Stop Light which is located on the deck lid Trunk Passive Entry Button 021836834 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es NOTE If you inadvertently leave your vehicle s Passive Entry RKE transmitter in the trunk and try to close the deck lid the deck lid will automatically unlatch unless another one of the vehicle s Passive Entry RKE transmit ters is outside the vehicle and within 3 ft 1 0 m of the deck lid To Lock The Vehicle s Doors With one of the vehicle s Passive Entry RKE transmitters within 5 ft 1 5 m of the driver or passenger front door handles press the door handle LOCK button to lock all four doors 020273025 Press The Door Handle Button To Lock Do NOT grab the door handle when pressing the door handle lock button This could unlock the door s THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 NOTE e After pressing the door handle LOCK button you must wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors using either Passive Entry door handle This 2 is done to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the door handle without the vehicle reacting and unlocking The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE transmitter battery is dead The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE DO NOT
313. ity of the Voice Command system to recognize user voice commands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised voice level The Uconnect Voice Command system allows you to control your AM FM radio satellite radio disc player SD Card USB iPod and SiriusXM Travel Link 168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following all applicable laws Your attention should be focused on safely operating the vehicle Failure to do so may result in a collision causing serious injury or death When you press the Uconnect Voice Command vn button you will hear a beep The beep is your signal to give a command If no command is spoken the system will say one of two responses e I didn t understand e I didn t get that etc If a command is not spoken a second time the system will respond with an error and give some direction as what can be said based on the context you are in After three consecutive failures of a spoken command the VR session will end Pressing the Uconnect Voice Command Eve button while the system is speaking is known as barging in The system will be interrupted and after the beep you can say a command This will become helpful once you start to learn the options NOTE At any time you can say the words Cancel or Help ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169 Thes
314. k mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Engine Off Power Delay When this feature is selected the power window switches radio Uconnect phone system if equipped DVD video system if equipped power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF Opening either front door will cancel this feature To change the Engine Off Power Delay status touch the 0 seconds 45 seconds 5 minutes or 10 minutes soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key e Headlight Off Delay When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle To change the Headlight Off Delay status touch the or soft key to select your desired time interval Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 349 Compass Settings After pressing the Compass Settings soft key the follow ing settings will be available e Variance Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North To compensate for the differences the variance should be set for the zone where the vehicle is driven per the zone map Once properly set the compass will automatically compensate for the differences and provide the most accurate compass heading NOTE Keep
315. km after sitting for a three hour period Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI pounds per square inch or kPa kilopascals Maximum Inflation The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation Pressure pressure for this tire The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall Recommended Cold Tire Vehicle manufacturer s recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the Inflation Pressure tire placard Tire Placard A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle s loading capacity the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures STARTING AND OPERATING 425 Tire Loading And Tire Pressure Tire And Loading Information Placard Tire And Loading Information Placard Location NOTE The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar or the rear edge of the driver s side door SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL 5 FRONT 2 REAR 3 THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS AND CARGO SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX KG QR XXX BS TIRE FRONT REAR SPARE ORIGINAL TIRE SIZ PI96A7OR14 P195 70R14 T125 70D15 COLD TIRE E 29PSI SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION AR 4N109268 811b5a9a Tire and Loading Information Placard This placard tells you important information about the 1 Number of people that can be carried in the 055001823 Vehicle
316. l grade WARNING e Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle move ment and possible injury or damage Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if itis not completely in PARK Check by trying to move the shift lever out of PARK with the brake pedal released Make sure the transmission is in PARK before leaving the vehicle Continued 392 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING Continued e It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re verse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle As with all vehicles you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running Before exiting a vehicle always apply the parking brake shift the transmission into PARK turn the engine OFF and remove the key Continued WARNING Continued fob When the ignition is in the OFF position the transmission is locked in PARK securing the ve hicle against unwanted movement e When leaving the vehicle always remove the key fob and lock your vehicle e Never leave child
317. l you can get back to cruising speed Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency AutoStick If Equipped When using the AutoStick shift control select the highest gear that allows for adequate performance and avoids frequent downshifts For example choose 4 if the desired speed can be maintained Choose 3 or 2 if needed to maintain the desired speed To prevent excess heat generation avoid continuous driving at high RPM Reduce vehicle speed as neces sary to avoid extended driving at high RPM Return to a higher gear or vehicle speed when grade and road conditions allow ee STARTING AND OPERATING 481 Cooling System To reduce potential for engine and transmission over heating take the following actions City Driving When stopped for short periods of time shift the trans mission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed Highway Driving Reduce speed Air Conditioning Turn off temporarily RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND MOTORHOME ETC Two Wheel Drive And All Wheel Drive Recreational towing with all four wheels on the ground or using a tow dolly is NOT ALLOWED The only acceptable method for towing this vehicle behind an other vehicle is on a vehicle trailer with all four wheels OFF the ground CAUTION Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require ments can cause severe transmission and or transfer case damage Damage
318. l level is about five minutes after a r4 fully warmed engine is shut off Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Maintain the oil level in the SAFE range Adding 1 0 qt 1 0 L of 518 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M oil when the reading is at the bottom of the SAFE range will result in an oil level at the top of the SAFE range on these engines CAUTION Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or loss of oil pressure This could damage your engine Change Engine Oil The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for further informa tion NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change inter vals exceed 10 000 miles 16 000 km or twelve months whichever occurs first Engine Oil Selection For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions the manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 American Petroleum Institute API Engine Oil Identification Symbol This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 519 CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the ch
319. l of the following may occur throat irritation move to fresh air If the irritation continues see your doctor If these particles settle on your clothing follow the garment manufacturer s in structions for cleaning The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions and or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium ployed If you are involved in another collision the air floor They are not caused by contact with chemicals bags will not be in place to protect you They are not permanent and normally heal quickly However if you haven t healed significantly within a few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor immediately Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision Have the air bags e As the air bags deflate you may see some smoke like seat belt pretensioners and the front seat belt retrac particles The particles are a normal by product of the tor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer process that generates the non toxic gas used for air immediately Also have the Occupant Restraint Con bag inflation These airborne particles may irritate the troller ORC system serviced as well skin eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye 72 THINGS TO KNOW B
320. lace in the vertical position The vehicle is now out of PARK and can be towed Release the parking brake only when the vehicle is securely connected to a tow vehicle 061541307 Tether Strap WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 505 To Reset The Manual Park Release 1 Push the latch at the base of the lever on the rear side rearward away from the lever to unlatch the lever 2 Rotate the Manual Park Release lever forward and down to its original position until the locking tab snaps into place to secure the lever 3 Pull up gently on the tether strap to confirm that the lever is locked in its stowed position 4 Tuck the tether strap into the base of the console Reinstall the console storage bin 506 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Se TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial wrecker service Towing Wheels OFF the RWD MODELS AWD MODELS Condition Ground Flat Tow NONE IF Transmission is operable NOT ALLOWED Wheel Lift Front Transmission in NEUTRAL NOT ALLOWED e 30 mph 48 km h max speed e 15 mi 24 km max distance 5 speed trans e 30 mi 48 km max distance 8 speed trans Rear OK Trans in NEUTRAL Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD BEST METHOD ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 507 Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent damage to your vehicle Use only tow bars and other equipment designed for this purpose following
321. ld be even with or slightly below the bottom of the hole Fluid Changes Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals Rear Axle For normal service periodic fluid level checks are not required When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be inspected If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the fluid level Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information 542 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug on the axle The fluid level should be at the bottom of the fill hole Add fluid if necessary to maintain the proper level Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Change Axle Fluid Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo graphic locations and usage Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and chemicals that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle Outside parking which exposes your vehicle to airborne contami nants road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated extreme hot or cold weather and other
322. led illustrations These practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer controlled vehicle systems and features They show exactly how to find and correct ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 583 problems the first time using step by step troubleshoot ing and drivability procedures proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment Owner s Manuals These Owner s Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to ac quaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC vehicles Included are starting operating emergency and mainte nance procedures as well as specifications capabilities and safety tips Call toll free at e 1 800 890 4038 U S e 1 800 387 1143 Canada Or Visit us on the Worldwide Web at e www techauthority com DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration The specific grade rating assigned by the tire s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades Treadwear The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150
323. left turn signal In locations with left hand drive traffic Overtake Aid is active only when passing on the left hand side of the Target vehicles When a vehicle goes from a location with left hand drive traffic to a location with right hand drive traffic the ACC system will automatically detect traffic direction In this condition Overtake Aid is active only when passing on the right side of the Target vehicle This additional acceleration is triggered when the driver utilizes the right turn signal In this condition the ACC system will no longer provide Overtake Aid on the left side until it determines that the vehicle has moved back to a location with left hand drive traffic 242 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Menu The EVIC displays the current ACC system settings The EVIC is located in the upper part of the instrument cluster between the speedometer and the tachometer The information it displays depends on ACC system status Press and release the UP or DOWN button until ACC or Cruise is highlighted in the EVIC Status of the ACC or Cruise is also displayed in the menu line Press and release the SELECT right arrow button to display the following information Adaptive Cruise Control Off e When ACC is deactivated the display will read Adaptive Cruise Control Off Adaptive Cruise Control Ready e When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has not
324. lling down the hill while resuming acceleration manually activate the trailer brake prior to releas ing the brake pedal Always remember the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle HSA is not a parking brake If you stop the vehicle on a hill without putting the transmission in PARK and using the parking brake it will roll down the hill and could cause a collision with another ve hicle or object Always remember to use the park ing brake while parking on a hill and that the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle 416 STARTING AND OPERATING Se HSA Off If you wish to turn off the HSA system it can be done in the Uconnect settings Refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Ready Alert Braking Ready Alert Braking may reduce the time required to reach full braking during emergency braking situations It anticipates when an emergency braking situation may occur by monitoring how fast the throttle is released by the driver When the throttle is released very quickly Ready Alert Braking applies a small amount of brake pressure This brake pressure will not be noticed by the driver The brake system uses this brake pressure to allow a fast brake response if the driver applies the brakes Rain Brake Support Rain Brake Support may improve braking performance in wet conditions It will periodically apply a small amount of brake pressure to remove any water bu
325. load or call log download over Bluetooth then these commands will return a response that the contact does not exist in the phonebook 166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Uconnect Hands Free Calling Universal amp Connect Commands The commands can be spoken from any screen after pushing the Uconnect Phone button on the steering wheel V U 1 n Gare normas Sete hone Listor parea ist ot pare J the previous Settings screen Bluetooth audio Bluetooth your voice wale command will be shown devices will be phones will be command sia alte Connection shown shown process will be completed with touch screen 0305005067 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167 NOTE Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and underlined in the gray shaded boxes General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op eration VOICE COMMAND Uconnect 8 4 8 4 Nav e VR NOTE Take care to speak into the Voice Command system as calmly and normally as possible The abil
326. lose to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel Being under a jacked up vehicle is dangerous The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you You 0605006372 could be crushed Never put any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack If you need to get Torque Patterns under a raised vehicle take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack WARNING To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury Continued 488 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES WARNING Continued The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing tires only The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only Avoid ice or slippery areas Jack Location Spare Tire Stowage The jack and spare tire are both stowed under an access cover in the trunk Follow these steps to access the jack and spare tire Opening The Access Panel 3 Remove the fastener securing the spare tire NOTE The spare tire must be removed in order to access the jack 1 Open the trunk 2 Lift the access cover using the pull strap Spare Tire Fastener Jack Fastener
327. lowing methods e Press the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter e Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle if equipped refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information e Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF position 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es e For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go press the Keyless Enter N Go Start Stop button requires at least one valid Key Fob in the vehicle For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter N Go insert a valid key into the ignition switch and turn the key to the ON position NOTE The driver s door key cylinder and the trunk button on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm e When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed the interior power door lock switches will not unlock the doors The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your vehicle however you can create conditions where the system will give you a false alarm If one of the pre viously described arming sequences has occurred the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not If you remain in the vehicle and open a door the alarm will sound If this occurs disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery becomes disconnected the Vehicle Security Alarm will remain armed
328. luding such items as seat tracks door hinge pivot points and rollers liftgate tailgate sliding doors and hood hinges should be lubri cated periodically with a lithium based grease such as MOPARQ Spray White Lube to assure quiet easy opera tion and to protect against rust and wear Prior to the application of any lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed Particular attention should also be given to hood latching compo nents to ensure proper function When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year preferably in the Fall and Spring Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPAR Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder Windshield Wiper Blades Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner This will remove accumula tions of salt or road film Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine o
329. luid Brake llle ees 566 Fluid Capacities sce cx heme ee E em ets 564 Eluid Leaks iuret te o doppi t Ee dnas iie Rei 102 504 INDEX ees Fluid Level Checks sra sareat hane aea eee eee 542 Automatic Transmission 540 Brakes cow eS os Cee hae al ee ES 537 Cooling System saii tid ses eser soa cate has 531 Engine Oil eree cese heo RE ERE ER e 517 Transfer Case llle 541 Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts 565 Fog Lights RS RR Ry 205 Folding Rearseat sse ie meme d 193 Forward Collision Warning llle 252 Freeing A Stuck Vehicdle llle 500 Fuel 2i 24 403000 RE renta Deo ae J 455 Additives ed ae vas ace mea ua EAE a ae 458 Clean Ag ius haces eA Ha dex Ea un EE 456 ConServilp s ebeased eme cmen T bee RES 331 Ethanol 422m d Rena fae Y 456 Filler Door Gas Cap 000 0000 ee 316 Gasoline cac tte brace pede boe ae ane eared 455 Gauge Light uu cerae te RE Pate UIS aes 326 Materials Added llle 458 Methanol 4 4 4 430048 dere REOR SHEER ed 456 Octane Rating ies chen E EROR ed 455 Requirements isse e Re ey edd 455 Saver Mode 3 c snce ans RR ure RU dris 331 Specifications x seag EIS ES Ue Ras 565 Tank Capacity e sius de pedes Pie ee mue a 564 Fuel Flexible soe ci ema RE 460 Fuel Optimizer ses e s mas 331 Fuel Saver 4 4 64 dango oot be SSG Hee ae a SS 331 FSCS fs geese ha dog wk ee CHA De ae EEG G SEE a 548
330. lways leave the system OFF when you are not using it To Set A Desired Speed Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON When the vehicle has reached the desired speed press the SET button and release Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed NOTE The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pressing the SET button 226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee To Deactivate A soft tap on the brake pedal pushing the CANCEL button or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set speed memory Pressing the ON OFF button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set speed memory To Resume Speed To resume a previously set speed push the RES button and release Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph 32 km h To Vary The Speed Setting When the Electronic Speed Control is set you can in crease speed by pushing the RES button If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released then the new set speed will be established Pressing the RES button once will result in a 1 mph 1 0 km h increase in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph 1 0 km h To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is set push the SET button If the button is continually held
331. m level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle e Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised e Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic transmission in PARK a manual transmission in REVERSE e Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a jack Continued WARNING Continued Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change e If working on or near a roadway be extremely careful of motor traffic A E d Jack Warning Label 492 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME CAUTION 1 Remove the spare tire jack and lug wrench 2 If equipped with aluminum wheels where the center cap covers the lug nuts use the lug wrench to pry the center cap off carefully before raising the vehicle Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on locations other than those indicated in the Jacking Instructions for this vehicle 3 Before raising the vehicle use the lug wrench to loosen but not remove the lug nuts on the wheel with the flat tire Turn the lug nuts counterclockwise one turn while the wheel is still on the ground 4 Place
332. m st be in NEUTRAL ments can cause severe transmission damage Dam age from improper towing is not covered under the e The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph 48 km h New Vehicle Limited Warranty The towing distance must not exceed 15 miles 24 km e Vehicles equipped with AWD can be towed with the TOR Sap eel MUN SION GF DUNS UU km dor transmission in NEUTRAL and the rear wheels OFF the 8 speed transmission ground with no limitation on speed or distance If the transmission is not operable or the vehicle must be towed faster than 30 mph 48 km h or farther than 15 miles 24 km for 5 speed transmission or 30 miles 48 km for 8 speed transmission tow with the rear wheels OFF the ground on a flatbed or with the rear wheels raised using a wheel lift and the transmission in NEUTRAL MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS E ENGINE COMPARTMENT 3 6L 511 E ENGINE COMPARTMENT 5 7L 512 ll ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II 513 ll EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS 513 M REPLACEMENT PARTS 00 515 E DEALER SERVICE 00000 eee 515 Bl MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES 516 Engine OH isole peed ends en 517 Engine Oll Filter ose ps 520 Engine Air Cleaner Filter llus 521 Maintenance Free Battery 521 Air Conditioner Maintenance
333. magnetic materials away from the top of the instrument panel such as iPod s Mobile Phones Laptop Computers and Radar Detectors This is where the com pass module is located and it can cause interference with the compass sensor and it may give false readings 040506040 Compass Variance Map e Perform Compass Calibration Touch the Calibration soft key to change this setting This compass is self calibrating which eliminates the need to manually reset the compass When the vehicle is new the compass may appear erratic and it may need to be 350 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se calibrated You may also calibrate the compass by press ing the ON soft key and completing one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL indicator displayed in the EVIC turns off The compass will now function normally Audio After pressing the Audio soft key the following settings will be available e Balance Fade When in this display you may adjust the Balance and Fade settings e Equalizer When in this display you may adjust the Bass Mid and Treble settings Adjust the settings with the and setting soft keys or by selecting any point on the scale between the and soft keys Then touch the arrow back soft key NOTE Bass Mid Treble allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the setting as well as touch directly on the desired setting e Speed Adjusted V
334. maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure or condition The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte nance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure gauge even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPM Telltale Light e Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire Base System The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure The TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver module e Four TPM sensors and e TPM Telltale Light The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly if equipped has a TPM sensor The matching full size spare can be used in plac
335. manufacturer s service contracts If you purchased a manufacturer s service contract you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date If you have any questions about the service contract call the manufacturer s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1 800 521 9922 Canadian residents call 800 465 2001 English 800 387 9983 French The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer s service contract It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer s service contract If you purchased a ser vice contract that is not a manufacturer s service contract IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M and you require service after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires please refer to the contract documents and contact the person listed in those documents We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities tools and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience You will be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and
336. mergency and Call Towing Assis tance will call the corresponding number stored with those contacts NOTE Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and underlined in the gray shaded boxes 164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Uconnect Text Messaging aaraa MA id The eere san a nier mom ay tor aar put Ma Donee Pene OSEE uc eren tms AB co e tema he w parea te ikama shara taen D on pa stear ma Entar message trom Show defined tat provided massagnQo by system or say roos List to hoar ali 16 Gowntoaded ofred massages trom phone sent to with entry 0455006283 Hn UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165 NOTE 1 You can replace John Smith with any name in your mobile or favorite phone book You can also say Send a message to John Smith and the system will ask you which phone number you want to send a message to for John Smith You can replace Mobile with Home Work or Other You can replace Incoming Calls with Outgoing Calls or Missed Calls Messaging commands only work if the Uconnect system is equipped with this feature and the mobile phone supports messaging over Bluetooth You can replace 248 555 1212 with any phone number supported by your Mobile phone 6 You can replace 4 with any message number shown on the screen If your phone does not support phonebook down
337. mful interference 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause unde sired operation NOTE The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC and IC rules Changes or modifications not ex pressly approved by the party responsible for compli ance could void the user s authority to operate the device 034134074 Power Sunroof Switch The term IC before the certification registration num ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical speci fications were met 280 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING e Never leave children unattended in a vehicle and do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle Do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON Run mode Occupants particularly unattended chil dren can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death Ina collision there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof You could also be seriously injured or killed Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passen gers are also properly secured Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof Never allow your fingers other body parts or any object to project through the sunroof opening Injury may result Opening Sunroof Express Press the switc
338. ms in order of priority At many authorized dealer you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge If you need a rental it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally interested in your satisfaction We want you to be happy with our products and services 578 Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer They know your vehicle the best and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service The manufacturer s authorized dealer have the facilities factory trained technicians special tools and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer service manager first Most matters can be re solved with this process e If for some reason you are still not satisfied talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealer They want to know if you need assistance e If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the concern you may contact the manufacturer s customer center IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M Any communication to the manufacturer s customer cen ter should include the following information e Owner s name and address Owner s telephone number home and office e Authorized dealer name e
339. n and death or serious personal injury To Vary The Speed Setting While ACC is set you can increase the set speed by pressing and holding the RES button If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to in crease in 5 mph 5 km h increments until the button is released The increase in set speed is reflected in the EVIC display Pressing the RES button once will result in a 1 mph 1 km h increase in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph 1 km h While ACC is set the set speed can be decreased by pressing and holding the SET button If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to de crease in 5 mph 5 km h increments until the button is released The decrease in set speed is reflected in the EVIC display ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 237 Pressing the SET button once will result in a 1 mph 1 km h decrease in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph 1 km h NOTE e When you use the SET button to decelerate if the engine s braking power does not slow the vehicle sufficiently to reach the set speed the brake system will automatically slow the vehicle The ACC system can only apply a maximum of 25 of the vehicle s braking capability and will not bring the vehicle to a complete stop The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up hill and down hill However a slig
340. n of Coolant Antifreeze 532 Corrosion Protection 0 0 0 0 000 e eee 542 Cruise Control Speed Control 227 Cupholders s ser ne dentes S E 292 Customer Assistance n a aaua eee eee 577 Data Recorder Event nannaa anaa 73 Daytime Brightness Interior Lights 212 Daytime Running Lights 00 205 Dealer Service llle ee ees 515 Deck Lid Emergency Release 45 Deck Lid Power Release 0 0008 44 Defroster Rear Window esee 302 Defroster Windshield 0 000008 100 Delay Intermittent Wipers 00 213 Diagnostic System Onboard 513 Dimmer Switch Headlight 207 Dipsticks Oil Engine 4 222646 dese ebenso Rees 517 Disabled Vehicle Towing llle 506 Disposal Antifreeze Engine Coolant 535 Door LOCKS acc Gage tenn e eene RES 30 Door Locks Automatic 0 0 0 000000008 33 Driving Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Standing Mates cand e e nee haw hehe He ten ed 402 Driving to Achieve Maximum Fuel Economy 331 E85 Fuel4 4s egre edm dace RA ee Electrical Power Outlets 502 INDEX ME Electric Rear Window Defrost 302 Electric Remote Mirrors 0000 113 Electronic Brake Control System 410 Anti Lock Brake System 04 410 Brake Assist System
341. n the headlamp hous ing and rotate it clockwise to lock it 2 Reach behind the headlamp housing to access the turn signal inboard bulb cap 3 Firmly grasp the cap and rotate it counterclockwise to unlock it 562 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M 4 Squeeze the two tabs on the side of the bulb socket and 4 Remove the three wing nuts from the back of the tail pull straight out from the lamp assembly Disconnect the bulb from the wiring connector and install the replacement bulb Install the bulb and connector assembly straight into the lamp until it locks in place Install the turn signal bulb cap in the headlamp housing and rotate clockwise to lock in place Rear Backup Lamp And Turn Signal Lamps L 2 Open the trunk Remove the trunk trim by removing the grocery hook using a 1 20 torque driver or similar tool remove the fastener and pull back the weather strip Pull back the trunk liner to gain access to the tail lamp wing nuts lamp assembly Pull the tail lamp assembly away from the vehicle enough to access the electrical connector Push the electrical connector locking tab to the side Disconnect the electrical connector Continue removing lamp from vehicle in order to access the bulb s Turn the appropriate bulb and socket assembly coun terclockwise to remove it from the tail lamp assembly 10 Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and install the replac
342. n to the rest of the voice prompt ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149 Voice Response Length Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad It is possible for you to choose between Brief and WARNNG Detailed Voice Response Length WARNING e Touch the More soft key where available then Your new vehicle has many features for the comfort touch the Settings soft key and convenience of you and your passengers Only use such features when it is safe to do so Failure to follow this Warning may result in an accident involv ing serious injury or death Touch the Display soft key then scroll down to Voice Response Length e Select either Brief or Detailed by touching the box next to the selection A check mark will appear to show your selection You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone keypad and still use the Uconnect Phone while dialing via the mobile phone keypad the user must exercise Phone And Network Status Indicators caution and take precautionary safety measures By dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth mobile phone the audio will be played through your vehicle s audio system The Uconnect Phone will work the same as if you dial the number using voice a command Uconnect Phone will provide notification to inform you of your phone and network status when you are attempt ing to make a phone call using Uconnect Phone The status is given for network signal stre
343. nce the system receives the updated tire pressures the system STARTING AND OPERATING 451 will automatically update the graphic display in the EVIC will stop flashing or change color back to the original color and the TPM Telltale Light will turn off The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information NE 156789mi 102 Low Tire Pressure Inflate to 33 33 33 33 ooz dD U 0558007135 Low Tire Pressure Monitor Display 452 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Service TPMS Warning If a system fault is detected the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid The system fault will also sound a chime In addition the EVIC will display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being received If the ignition switch is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists If the system fault no longer exists the TPM Telltale Light will no longer flash and the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message will no longer display and a pressure value will display in place of the dashes A system fault can occur due to any of the following 1 Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing aftermarke
344. ncy key by sliding the mechanical latch on the back of the RKE transmitter sideways with your thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand 0202003287 Emergency Key Removal 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es 2 Insert the tip of the emergency key or a 2 flat blade 3 Remove the battery by turning the back cover over screwdriver into the slot and gently pry the two halves battery facing downward and tapping it lightly on a of the RKE transmitter apart Make sure not to damage solid surface such as a table or similar then replace the the seal during removal battery When replacing the battery match the sign on the battery to the sign on the inside of the battery clip located on the back cover Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers Skin oils may cause battery deterioration If you touch a battery clean it with rubbing alcohol 4 To assemble the RKE transmitter case snap the two halves together 0213004940 Separating The RKE Transmitter Case en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions This device may not cause harmful interference This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op eration NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party r
345. nd braking of your vehicle This can cause unpredict able handling and stress to steering and suspen sion components You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle Continued e Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity other than what was originally equipped on your vehicle Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure You could lose control and have a collision e Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control CAUTION Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer read ings a STARTING AND OPERATING 441 TIRE CHAINS TRACTION DEVICES e Due to limited clearance for an All Wheel Drive AWD vehicle P235 55R19 tire with the use of a traction device that meets the SAE type Class S specification is recommended Use of traction devices require sufficient tire to body clear ance Follow these recommendations to guard against damage e No other tire sizes are recommended for use with a tire chain or traction device Traction device must be of proper size for the tire as recommended by the traction device manufacturer WARNING e Due to limited clearance for a Rear Wheel Drive Using tires of diff
346. nd held forward again ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 285 Opening Power Shade Express Press the shade switch rearward and release it within one half second and the shade will automatically open to the halfway position and stop automatically Press the switch a second time from the halfway position and the shade will automatically open to the full open position and stop automatically This is called Express Open During Express Open operation any movement of the shade switch will stop the shade Opening Power Shade Manual Mode To open the shade press and hold the switch rearward The shade will open and stop automatically at the half open position Press and hold the shade switch rearward again and the shade will open automatically to the full open position Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the shade will remain in a partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and held rearward again Closing Power Shade Express Press the switch forward and release it within one half second and the shade will close automatically from any position If the sunroof is completely closed the shade will close fully and stop automatically This is called Express Close During Express Close operation any movement of the switch will stop the shade NOTE If the sunroof is open the shade will close to the half open position Pressing the shade close button again will automatically clo
347. nd it should not be used when the vehicle is in motion Use it when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance the Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even though the ignition is placed in the OFF position NOTE With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers may wear down your battery IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS In any of the following situations you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac tion On the highways slow down e In city traffic while stopped place the transmission in NEUTRAL but do not increase the engine idle speed NOTE There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition e If your air conditioner A C is on turn it off The A C system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning the A C off can help remove this heat en WHAT TO DO N EMERGENCIES 485 WARNI heat the mode control to floor and the blower control NING to high This allows the heater core to act as a You or others can be badly burned by hot engine supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If from the engine cooling system you see or hear steam coming from under the hood CAUTION Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads H pull over and stop the ve
348. nd meet the requirements of Material Standard MS 6395 MS 6395 contains additional requirements developed during ex tensive fleet testing to provide additional protection to Chrysler Group LLC engines Use MOPAR or an equivalent oil meeting the specification MS 6395 462 STARTING AND OPERATING Ss Starting The characteristics of E 85 fuel make it unsuitable for use when ambient temperatures fall below 0 F 18 C In the range of 0 F 18 C to 32 F 0 C you may experience an increase in the time it takes for your engine to start and a deterioration in driveability sags and or hesitations until the engine is fully warmed up NOTE Use of the engine block heater if equipped is beneficial for E 85 startability when the ambient tempera ture is less than 32 F 0 C Cruising Range Because E 85 fuel contains less energy per gallon liter than gasoline you will experience an increase in fuel consumption You can expect your miles per gallon mpg miles per liter and your driving range to decrease by about 30 compared to gasoline operation Replacement Parts Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle FFV are designed to be compatible with ethanol Always be sure that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol com patible parts CAUTION Replacing fuel system components with non ethanol compatible components can damage your vehicle Maintenance CAUTION Do not use ethanol mixture greater
349. nd on one or both sides of the tire however the date code may only be on one side Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including the date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire es STARTING AND OPERATING 423 EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA Code representing the tire manufacturing location two digits L9 Code representing the tire size two digits ABCD Code used by the tire manufacturer one to four digits 03 Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured two digits 03 means the 3rd week 01 Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured two digits 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000 tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured Example 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 424 STARTING AND OPERATING x Tire Terminology And Definitions Term Definition B Pillar The vehicle B Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door Cold Tire Inflation Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not Pressure been driven for at least 3 hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6
350. nding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information Auto On Comfort amp Remote Start After pressing the Auto On Comfort amp Remote Start soft key the following settings will be available e Horn With Remote Start When this feature is selected the horn will sound when the remote start is activated To make your selection touch the Sound Horn With Remote Start soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Auto On Driver Heated Ventilated Seat amp Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start If Equipped When this feature is selected the driver s heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn on when temperatures are below 40 F 4 4 C When tempera tures are above 80 F 26 7 C the driver vented seat will 348 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME turn on To make your selection touch the Auto Heated Seats soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Engine Off Options After pressing the Engine Off Options soft key the fol lowing settings will be available Easy Exit Seat This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle To make your selection touch the Easy Exit Seats soft key until a chec
351. nding Your Instrument Panel for further information ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191 Head Restraints Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear WARNING The head restraints for all occupants must be prop erly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occu pying a seat Head restraints should never be ad justed while the vehicle is in motion Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision Active Head Restraints Front Seats The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with Active Head Restraints AHR In the event of a rear impact the AHRs will automatically extend forward minimizing the gap between the back of the occupants head and the AHR The AHRs will automatically return to their normal position following a rear impact If the AHRs do not return to their normal position see your authorized dealer immediately 192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To raise the head restraint pull upward on the head restraint To lower the head restraint press the push button located at the base of the head restraint and push downward on the head restraint em 030907490 Push Button NOTE The head res
352. nds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature NOTE For vehicles equipped with the EVIC the power sunroof switch will remain active for up to approxi mately ten minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature The Ignition Off time is programmable using the Uconnect System Refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information een UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 283 Sra A SHADE IF EQUIPPED WASIN e Never leave children unattended in a vehicle and do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle Do AP not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with The power shade switch is located to the right between Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON Run the sun visors on the overhead console The Command View sunroof switch is located to the left between the sun visors on the overhead console mode Occupants particularly unattended chil dren can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death e Ina collision there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof You could also be seriously injured or killed Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passen gers are also properly secured Do not allow
353. ng brake when leaving the vehicle in this range When parking on a level surface you may shift the trans mission into PARK first and then apply the parking brake When parking on a hill apply the parking brake before shifting the transmission to PARK otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK As an added precau tion turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade 384 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING e Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle move ment and possible injury or damage Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if it is not completely in PARK Check by trying to move the shift lever out of PARK with the brake pedal released Make sure the transmission is in PARK before leaving the vehicle e It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and Continued WARNING Continued hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the v
354. ng the SELECT button will allow you to see what the stored messages are Pressing the BACK button takes you back to the Main Menu 336 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Turn Menu OFF Select from Main Menu using the DOWN button Press ing the SELECT button blanks the menu display Pressing any one of the four steering wheel buttons brings the menu back Uconnect SETTINGS The Uconnect system uses a combination of soft and hard keys located on the center of the instrument panel that allows you to access and change the customer programmable features Hard Keys Hard Keys are located below the Uconnect system in the center of the instrument panel In addition there is a Scroll Enter control knob located on the right side of the Climate Controls in the center of the instrument panel Turn the control knob to scroll through menus and change settings i e 30 60 90 press the center of the control knob one or more times to select or change a setting i e ON OFF Soft Keys Soft Keys are accessible on the Uconnect Touch Screen Customer Programmable Features Uconnect 8 4 Settings Press the More soft key then press the Settings soft key to display the menu setting screen In this mode the Uconnect system allows you to access programmable features that may be equipped such as Display Clock Safety Assistance Lights Doors amp Locks Auto On Comfort amp Remote Start Engine Off Operation Compass
355. nger door power window switches have an AUTO down feature Press the window switch to the second detent release and the window will go down automati cally To open the window part way press the window switch to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop To stop the window from going all the way down during a the AUTO down operation pull up on the switch briefly AUTO Up Feature With Anti Pinch Protection If Equipped Lift the window switch to the second detent release and the window will go up automatically To stop the window from going all the way up during the AUTO up operation push down on the switch briefly To close the window part way lift the window switch to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se NOTE Reset Auto Up e If the window runs into any obstacle during auto Should the Auto Up feature stop working the window closure it will reverse direction and then go back probably needs to be reset To reset Auto Up down Remove the obstacle and use the window 1 Make sure the door is fully closed itch again to close the window Mc Mop ME 2 Pull the window switch up to close the window e Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger completely and continue to hold the switch up for an the auto reverse function unexpectedly during auto additional two seconds after the window is closed closure If this
356. ngs will happen The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I M station The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I M station ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 515 If your OBD II system is not ready you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready Regardless of whether your vehicle s OBD II system is ready or not if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I M station The I M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en sure the designed performance Damage or failures caused by the use of non MOPAR parts for mainte nance and repairs will not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited W
357. ngth and phone battery strength 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se NOTE Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the dial ring to the Uconnect Phone to play it on the vehicle audio system so you will not hear it Under this situa tion after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that the call did not go through even though the call is in progress Once your call is answered you will hear the audio Mute Un Mute Mute ON OFF When you mute the Uconnect Phone you will still be able to hear the conversation coming from the other party but the other party will not be able to hear you To mute the Uconnect Phone simply touch the Mute button on the Phone main screen Advanced Phone Connectivity Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans ferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone without terminating the call To transfer an ongoing call from your paired mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone or vice versa press the Transfer button on the Phone main screen Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The Uconnect Phone And Mobile Phone If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth connection between a Uconnect Phone paired mobile phone and the Uconnect Phone follow the instructions described in your mobile phone User s Manual E Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect Phone Voice Command e For best performance
358. nnect PARKING BRAKE Before leaving the vehicle make sure that the parking brake is fully applied and place the shift lever in the PARK position The foot operated parking brake is located below the lower left corner of the instrument panel To apply the park brake firmly push the park brake pedal fully To release the parking brake press the park brake pedal a second time and let your foot up as you feel the brake disengage 406 STARTING AND OPERATING NOTE e When the parking brake is applied and the transmis sion is placed in gear the Brake Warning Light will flash If vehicle speed is detected a chime will sound to alert the driver Fully release the parking brake before attempting to move the vehicle This light only shows that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application When parking on a hill it is important to turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade Apply the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK The parking brake should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle Parking Brake When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON position the Brake Warning Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate ee STARTING AND OPERATING 407 W
359. nstalled in the center position blocks the seat belt webbing or buckle for the outboard position do not use that outboard position If a child seat in the center position blocks the outboard LATCH anchors or seat belt do not install a child seat in that outboard position WARNING Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more than one child restraint Please refer to Installing The LATCH Compatible Child Restraint System for typical installation instructions Always follow the directions of the child restraint manu facturer when installing your child restraint Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here To Install A LATCH compatible Child Restraint 1 If the selected seating position has a Switchable Auto matic Locking Retractor ALR seat belt stow the seat belt following the instructions below See the section Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt to check what type of seat belt each seating position has 2 Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap of the child seat so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages 3 Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for that seating position For some second row seats you may need to recline the seat and or raise the head restraint to get a better fit 88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es 4 Attach the lower hooks or connectors of th
360. o the amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in the intended direction of travel HSA Activation Criteria The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to activate Vehicle must be stopped e Vehicle must be on a 6 approximate grade or greater hill Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction i e vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear vehicle back ing uphill is in REVERSE gear HSA will work in REVERSE and all forward gears when the activation criteria have been met The system will not activate if the vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL or PARK ee STARTING AND OPERATING 415 WARNING There may be situations on minor hills i e less than 8 with a loaded vehicle or while pulling a trailer when the system will not activate and slight rolling may occur This could cause a collision with another vehicle or object Always remember the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle Towing With HSA HSA will provide assistance when starting on a grade when pulling a trailer WARNING e If you use a trailer brake controller with your trailer your trailer brakes may be activated and deactivated with the brake switch If so when the Continued WARNING Continued brake pedal is released there may not be enough brake pressure to hold the vehicle and trailer on a hill and this could cause a collision with another vehicle or object behind you In order to avoid ro
361. o Activate To turn the system OFF push and release the ON OFF Push and release the ON OFF button The ACC menu in peel un i P the cun yo ia ui and the EVIC displays Adaptive Cruise Control Ready He TONERS appve Cruse Contro i NE 156789mi 102 NE 156789mi 102 Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Adaptive Cruise Control ACC OFF Ready f Ma 032363703 Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Ready Adaptive Cruise Control ACC OFF 032363702 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 233 WARNING To Set A Desired ACC Speed When the vehicle reaches the speed desired push the Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control ACC system SET button and release The EVIC will display the set on when not in use is dangerous You could acciden speed tally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have a collision Always leave the system off when you are not using it NE 156789mi 102 ACC Set 032363724 ACC Set 234 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal If you do not the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set speed If this occurs e The message DRIVER OVERRIDE will display in the EVIC e The system will not be controlling the distance be tween your vehicle and the vehicle ahead The vehicle speed will only be determined by the position of the accelerator pedal NE 156789mi Driver Override
362. o close to the belt path opening of the child restraint you may have trouble tightening the seat belt If this happens discon nect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle end belt up to three full turns to shorten it Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out away from the child restraint Repeat steps 4 to 6 above to complete the installation of the child restraint If the belt still cannot be tightened after you shorten the buckle disconnect the latch plate from the buckle turn the buckle around one half turn and insert the latch plate into the buckle again If you still cannot make the child restraint installation tight try a different seating position Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether Anchorage s 1 Look behind the seating position where you l plan to install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage You may need to move the seat forward to provide better access to the tether anchorage If there is no top tether anchorage for that seating position see the charts above move the child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one is available 2 Rotate or lift the cover to access the anchor directly behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint 3 Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for the strap between the anchor and the child seat ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95 If your
363. o o 604 149 Seven Pin Connector 5 Ground 6 Left Stop Turn 7 Running Lamps 1 Battery 2 Backup Lamps 3 Right Stop Turn 4 Electric Brakes STARTING AND OPERATING 479 Towing Tips Before setting out on a trip practice turning stopping and backing up the trailer in an area located away from heavy traffic Automatic Transmission The DRIVE range can be selected when towing The transmission controls include a drive strategy to avoid frequent shifting when towing However if frequent shifting does occur while in DRIVE you can use the AutoStick shift control if equipped or the LOW range if equipped to select a lower gear NOTE Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions will improve perfor mance and extend transmission life by reducing exces sive shifting and heat buildup This action will also provide better engine braking 480 STARTING AND OPERATING ME If you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation then change the trans mission fluid and filter as specified for police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing five speed transmission only Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals Electronic Speed Control If Equipped Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads e When using the speed control if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph 16 km h disengage unti
364. o the memory function Use either the memory recall switch or the RKE transmitter if linked to the memory feature to recall memory positions 1 or 2 The memory seat switch is located on the driver s door trim panel The switch consists of three buttons The S button which is used to activate the memory save function and the 1 and 2 buttons which are used to recall either of two pre programmed memory profiles 031036877 Memory Seat Switch 196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Programming The Memory Feature To create a new memory profile perform the following 1 Place the ignition into the RUN position 2 Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer ences ie seat side mirror adjustable pedals if equipped power tilt and telescopic steering column if equipped and radio station presets 3 Press and release the S Set button on the memory switch 4 Within five seconds press and release either of the memory buttons 1 or 2 The Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC will display which memory posi tion has been set NOTE e Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in PARK but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a memory profile Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter To Memory Your RKE transmitters can be programmed to recall one of two pre programmed memory profiles by pressing the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter NOTE Before
365. o tow vehicle and trailer stability ee STARTING AND OPERATING 471 Trailer sway control and a weight distributing load Trailer Hitch Classification equalizing hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue The following chart provides the industry standard for the Weights TW and may be required depending on vehicl maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and trailer configuration loading to comply with Gross and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct Axle Weight Rating GAWR requirements trailer hitch for your intended towing condition WARNING Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions Class Max Trailer Hitch e An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch Industry Standards system may reduce handling stability braking Class I Light Duty 2 000 Ibs 07 kg performance and could result in a collision Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible Class II Medium Duty 3 500 Ibs 1 587 kg with Surge Brake Couplers Consult with your hitch Class III Heavy Duty 5 000 Ibs 2 268 kg and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational Class IV Extra Heavy Duty 10 000 Ibs 4 540 kg Vehicle dealer for additional information Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight GTW towable for your given drivetrain All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle
366. oaching The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on stationary objects such as guardrails posts walls foliage berms etc However occasionally the system may alert on such objects This is normal operation and your vehicle does not require service UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 Overtaking Passing Stationary Objects The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in adjacent lanes 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Continued system is not designed to detect pedestrians bicy clists or animals Even if your vehicle is equipped with the BSM system always check your vehicle s mirrors glance over your shoulder and use your turn signal before changing lanes Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death Rear Cross Path The Rear Cross Path RCP feature is intended to aid the drivers when backing out of parking spaces where their vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked Proceed slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the rear end of the vehicle is exposed The RCP system will then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an oncoming vehicle is detected alert the driver Opposing Traffic WARNING The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to help detect objects in the blind spot zones The BSM Continued 030405522 RCP Detection Zones RCP monito
367. oblem in the circuit that must be corrected E 072710829 j Front Power Distribution Center 550 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cavity Car Mini Description Cavity Car Mini Description tridge Fuse tridge Fuse Fuse Fuse 1 Fuse Spare 9 20 Amp All Wheel Drive 2 40 Amp Radiator Fan 1 Yellow Module If Green Equipped 3 50 Amp Power Steering 1 10 EE 10 Amp Security Red Red 4 30 Amp Starter 11 20 Amp Horns Pink Yellow 5 40 Amp Anti Lock Brakes 12 10 Amp Air Conditioning Green Red Clutch 6 25 Amp Anti Lock Brakes 13 Fuse Spare Natural 14 E 2m Fuse Spare Z Fuse Spare 15 25 Amp Transmission 8 Fuse Spare Natural 16 Fuse Spare ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 551 Cavity Car Mini Description Cavity Car Mini Description tridge Fuse tridge Fuse Fuse Fuse 18 50 Amp Radiator Fan 2 29 15 Amp Transmission Red Blue Shifter 19 50 Amp Power Steering 2 30 Fuse Spare Red 31 25 Amp Engine Module 20 30 Amp Wiper Motor Natural Pink 32 Fuse Spare 21 30 Amp Headlamp Washers 33 Fuse Spare 34 35Amp Powertrain 1 22 Fuse Spare Natural 23 B Fuse Spare 35 20 Amp Powertrain 2 24 EE Fuse Spare Yellow 28 25 Amp Fuel Pump 36 10 Amp Anti Lock Brake Natural Red M
368. ock the doors open the trunk or activate the Panic Alarm from dis tances up to approximately 66 ft 20 m using a hand held Key Fob with RKE transmitter The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es NOTE Driving at speeds 5 mph 8 km h and above disables the system from responding to all RKE transmit ter buttons for all RKE transmitters 0202008029 Key Fob With RKE Transmitter To Unlock The Doors Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter once to unlock the driver s door or twice within five seconds to unlock all doors The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal The illuminated entry system will also turn on If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry refer to Keyless Enter N Go under Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver s door or all doors on the first press of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter To change the current setting refer to Uconnect Settings in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 Flash Headlights With Lock This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmit
369. ocked into position If the seatback is not securely locked into position the seat will not provide the proper sta bility for child seats and or passengers An improp erly latched seat could cause serious injury After releasing the seatback it can be folded forward The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle with the rear seatbacks in the locked up or folded down position should not be used as a play area by children when the vehicle is in motion They could be seriously injured in a collision Children should be seated and using the proper restraint system 030936863 Folded Rear Seatback When the seatback is folded to the upright position make sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the seatback above the seat strap ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195 DRIVER MEMORY SEAT IF EQUIPPED This feature allows the driver to store up to two different memory profiles for easy recall through a memory switch Each memory profile contains desired position settings for the driver seat side mirrors adjustable pedals if equipped and power tilt and telescopic steer ing column if equipped and a set of desired radio station presets Your Remote Keyless Entry RKE trans mitter can also be programmed to recall the same posi tions when the UNLOCK button is pressed NOTE Only one RKE transmitter can be linked to each of the memory positions Passive Entry door handles cannot be linked t
370. odule 552 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cavity Car Mini Description Cavity Car Mini Description tridge Fuse tridge Fuse Fuse Fuse 37 10 Amp Engine Controller 49 Fuse Spare Red Rad Fan Relays 50 Fuse Spare 38 10 Amp Airbag Module 51 20 Amp Vacuum Pump Red Yellow 39 10 Amp Power Steering 52 Fuse Spare Red Module AC Clutch 53 Fuse Spare Relay 48 10 Amp AWD Module Red Front Axle Disconnect MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 553 Rear Power Distribution Center Fuses There is also a power distribution center located in the trunk under the spare tire access panel This center contains fuses and relays 072800285 Rear Power Distribution Center E 072800284 Opening The Access Cover 554 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Cartidge Mini Description Fuse Fuse e When installing the power distribution center 60 Amp Front PDC cover it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched Failure to do so may allow water to get into the power distribution Yellow Feed 1 Fuse Spare center and possibly result in an electrical system 4 60 Amp a Front PDC failure Yellow Feed 2 When replacing a blown fuse it is important to use 30 Amp m Sunroof only a fuse having the correct amperage rating The Pink
371. of the steering wheel mounted shift paddles 390 STARTING AND OPERATING if equipped will manually select the transmission Gear Ranges gear and will display the current gear in the instrument cluster as 5 4 3 2 1 DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range NOTE e After selecting any gear range wait a moment to allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating This is especially important when the engine is cold e If there is a need to restart the engine be sure to cycle the ignition to the OFF position before restarting Transmission gear engagement may be delayed after restarting the engine if the key is not cycled to the OFF position first Shift Lever ee STARTING AND OPERATING 391 PARK P This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range When parking on a level surface you may shift the transmission into PARK first and then apply the parking brake When parking on a hill apply the parking brake before shifting the transmission to PARK otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it diffi cult to move the shift lever out of PARK As an added precaution turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphil
372. off the transmission is moved out of Park position and the parking brake is off The head light switch must be used for normal nighttime driving NOTE If allowed by law in the country in which the vehicle was purchased the Daytime Running Lights can be turned on and off using the Uconnect System refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instru ment Panel for further information Lights On Reminder If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition is placed in the OFF position a chime will sound to alert the driver when the driver s door is opened Fog Lights If Equipped Front Fog Lights If Equipped The front fog light switch is built into the headlight switch 031464416 Fog Light Switch ZO To activate the front fog lights turn on the parking lights or the low beam headlights and press the 206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE es headlight switch To turn off the front fog lights either press the headlight switch a second time or turn off the headlight switch Rear Fog Lights If Equipped Qt The rear fog light switch is built into the head light switch To activate the rear fog lights turn the headlamp switch to the park lamp or head lamp position Press the headlight switch once for front fog lights press the switch a second time for front and rear fog lights Pressing the switch a third time will deactivate the rear fog lights and a fourth time
373. ol sss ke e n ra meae 456 Mini Trip Computer ae sa snena 0 06 333 MITTS 52i eek aie Read aides bA EA 110 Electric Powered ossos sst aepiasiit nar diah 113 Electric Remote 1 1 eee seriada 113 Exterior Folding 0 0 000 0000 111 Heated 34 cessed ieee e ed ash 114 Outside eeraa Sasa Que ERAS ae 111 VAN cec Ese cates em oe ES eae S 114 ne INDEX 599 Mode FUG SAVER sa uc Rees doxes ER Bere eae ae s 331 Modifications Alterations Vehicle 7 Monitor Tire Pressure System sss 444 Mopar Rants sou esa tava betete Y vd Gee s 515 MIBEZETBE sc aa dus antes gee a ara a ate arate 456 Multi Function Control Lever 206 New Vehicle Break In Period 97 Occupant Restraints s sss prana ig eee ee 46 Occupant Restraints Sedan nunaa naaa aaa 63 Octane Rating Gasoline Fuel 455 Odometer 2 0 pre a ee 312 Oil Change Indicator 0 0 0 000 313 Oil Change Indicator Reset 0 0 313 Oil Engine cx koh cs e ceo o doeet 517 Capacity siae doces a amb Rl e ete des 564 Change Interval Mandan ae duree 330 Checking lt iese teegaa iene eR ed 517 Dipstiek cnc tret ark nite EE aE aRU EE ets 517 Disposal 4a 333b EE ber RE E PRG ade 520 jr M RE D CEN 520 Filter Disposal is 2e bw XE YS 520 Identification Logo llle 518 Materials Added to sss sia llle 520 Recommendation 00000 518 SyDtletie eua n
374. olume This feature increases or decreases volume relative to vehicle speed To change the Speed Adjusted Volume touch the Off 1 2 or 3 soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key e Music Info Cleanup This feature helps organize music files for optimized music navigation To make your selection touch the Music Info Cleanup soft key select On or Off followed by pressing the arrow back soft key e Surround Sound If Equipped This feature provides simulated surround sound mode To make your selection touch the Surround Sound soft key select On or Off followed by pressing the arrow back soft key ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 351 Phone Bluetooth After pressing the Phone Bluetooth soft key the fol lowing settings will be available e Paired Devices This feature shows which phones are paired to the Phone Bluetooth system For further information refer to the Uconnect Supplement SiriusXM Setup After pressing the SIRIUS Setup soft key the following settings will be available e Channel Skip SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude undesirable channels while scanning To make your selection touch the Channel Skip soft key select the channels you would like to skip followed by pressing the arrow back soft key e Subscription Information New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription
375. omatically time out after 30 minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the OFF position ee STARTING AND OPERATING 375 ENGINE START STOP Button Functions With Driver s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal In PARK Or NEUTRAL Position The ENGINE START STOP button operates similar to an ignition switch It has four positions OFF ACC RUN and START To change the ignition switch positions without starting the vehicle and use the accessories follow these steps 1 Starting with the ignition in the OFF position 2 Press the ENGINE START STOP button once to change the ignition to the ACC position EVIC dis plays ACC 3 Press the ENGINE START STOP button a second time to change the ignition to the RUN position EVIC displays RUN 4 Press the ENGINE START STOP button a third time to return the ignition to the OFF position EVIC displays OFF Extreme Cold Weather Below 20 F Or 29 C To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures use of an externally powered electric engine block heater avail able from your authorized dealer is recommended If Engine Fails To Start WARNING Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle This could result in flash fire causing serious personal injury Continued 376 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Continued Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it st
376. omponent corrosion To fix a Non FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with E 85 perform the following Drain the fuel tank see your authorized dealer Change the engine oil and oil filter Disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the engine controller memory More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged exposure to E 85 fuel MMT In Gasoline MMT Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump 458 STARTING AND OPERATING Ss therefore you should ask your gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT MMT is prohibited in Federal CAU HON Commend and California reformulated gasoline e An out of tune engine or certain fuel or ignition i malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to Materials Added To Fuel overheat If you notice a pungent burning odor or All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain some light smoke your engine may be out of tune or effective detergent additives Use of additional detergents malfunctioning
377. on Voice Command Tree Refer to Voice Tree in this section Help Command If you need assistance at any prompt or if you want to know your options at any prompt say Help following the beep To activate the Uconnect Phone from idle simply press the e button and say a command or say help All Uconnect Phone sessions begin with a press of the Xe button on the radio control head Cancel Command At any prompt after the beep you can say Cancel and you will be returned to the main menu You can also press the or amp vabuttons when the system is listening for a command and be returned to the main or previous menu Pair Link Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone To begin using your Uconnect Phone you must pair your compatible Bluetooth enabled mobile phone To complete the pairing process you will need to reference your mobile phone Owner s Manual The Uconnect web site may also provide detailed instructions for pairing NOTE You must have Bluetooth enabled on your phone to complete this procedure e The vehicle must be in PARK ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 1 Press the Phone soft key on the screen to begin 3 2 If there is no phone currently connected with the system a pop up will appear 68 yf FM 91 7 10 10 NW 54 out No phone connected Would you like to pair a phone 4 WJ C Radio Player Controls Climate hone More
378. on in a collision The Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with air bag system electrical components While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance free If any of the following occurs have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately ry e The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the four to eight seconds when the ignition is first cycled to the ON RUN e The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to eight second interval e The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving NOTE If the speedometer tachometer or any engine related gauges are not working the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC may also be disabled The air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection Promptly check the fuse block for blown fuses Refer to Fuses in Maintaining Your Vehicle for the proper air bag fuses See your authorized dealer if the fuse is good Event Data Recorder EDR This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder EDR The main purpose of an EDR is to record in certain crash or near crash like situations such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle s systems performed The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period 74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEH
379. onds 5 Restart the engine 6 Shift into the desired gear range If the problem is no longer detected the transmission will return to normal operation 396 STARTING AND OPERATING Se NOTE Even if the transmission can be reset we recom mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest possible convenience Your authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur If the transmission cannot be reset authorized dealer service is required Overdrive Operation The automatic transmission includes an electronically controlled Overdrive fifth gear The transmission will automatically shift into Overdrive if the following con ditions are present e The shift lever is in the DRIVE position e Vehicle speed is sufficiently high e The driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator AUTOSTICK IF EQUIPPED AutoStick is a driver interactive transmission feature providing manual shift control giving you more control of the vehicle AutoStick allows you to maximize en gine braking eliminate undesirable upshifts and down shifts and improve overall vehicle performance This system can also provide you with more control during passing city driving cold slippery conditions mountain driving trailer towing and many other situations Operation Eight Speed Transmission If Equipped When the transmission is in DRIVE or SPORT mode it will operate automatically shift
380. ones or make another call The EVR button is also used to access the Voice Com mands for the Uconnect Voice Command features if your vehicle is equipped Please see the Uconnect Voice Command section for direction on how to use the A vRbutton The Uconnect amp Phone is fully integrated with the ve hicles audio system The volume of the Uconnect Phone can be adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from the steering wheel radio control right switch if so equipped Operation Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect Phone menu structure Voice commands are required after most Uconnect Phone prompts There are two general meth ods for how Voice Command works 1 Say compound commands like Call John Smith mobile 2 Say the individual commands and allow the system to guide you to complete the task You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options Prior to giving a voice command one must wait for the beep which follows the Listen prompt or another prompt ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 For certain operations compound commands can be used For example instead of saying Call and then John Smith and then mobile the following compound command can be said Call John Smith mobile For each feature explanation in this section only the compound command form of the
381. ontrol when AutoStick is engaged Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when AutoStick is engaged To disengage AutoStick mode hold the shift lever to the right or press and hold the shift paddle if equipped until D is once again indicated in the instrument cluster You can shift in or out of the AutoStick mode at any time without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal WARNING Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface The drive wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid causing a collision or personal injury 400 STARTING AND OPERATING ME ALL WHEEL DRIVE AWD IF EQUIPPED This vehicle is equipped with an active on demand All Wheel Drive AWD system which makes available optimum traction for a wide variety of road surface and driving conditions The system minimizes wheel slip by automatically redirecting torque to the front and rear wheels as necessary To maximize fuel economy your AWD vehicle automati cally defaults to rear wheel drive RWD when road and environmental conditions are such that wheel slip is unlikely to occur When specific road and environmental conditions require increased levels of road traction the vehicle automatically shifts into AWD mode Automatic AWD operation could be activated by outside tempera ture wheel slip or other predetermined conditions there may be a slight delay for AWD engagement after a wheel slip condi
382. ontrols or move the vehicle e When leaving the vehicle always remove the key fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to position before you can start the engine Apply the brakes be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a before shifting into any driving gear number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever Automatic Transmission Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 373 CAUTION Keyless Enter N Go Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow ing precautions are not observed e Do not shift from REVERSE PARK or NEUTRAL into any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed This feature allows the driver to oper ate the ignition switch with the push of a button as long as the Remote Start Keyless Enter N Go Key Fob is in the passenger compartment e Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop e Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle Normal Starting ram Sl ang a complete stop and the engine de at Using The ENGINE START STOP Button e Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot 1 The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL is firmly on the brake pedal 2 Press and
383. oor is opened The dimmer control is part of the headlight switch and is To protect the battery the interior lights will turn off located on the left side of the instrument panel automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is moved to the LOCK position This will occur if the interior lights were switched on manually or are on because a door is open This includes the glove box light but not the trunk light To restore interior light operation either turn the ignition switch ON or cycle the light switch 031463856 Dimmer Controls es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211 With the parking lights or headlights on rotating the left Ambient Light Control dimmer control upward will increase the brightness of the instrument panel lights and lighted cupholders if equipped Rotate the right dimmer control upward or downward to increase or decrease the brightness of the door handle lights and ambient light located in the overhead console 031463857 Door Handle Ambient Light Dimmer Instrument Panel Dimmer 212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Dome Light Position Rotate the left dimmer control completely upward to the second detent to turn on the interior lights The interior lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this position Interior Light Defeat OFF Rotate the left dimmer control to the extreme bottom OFF position The interior lights will remain off when the doors are open
384. opean Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width The letter P is absent from this tire size designation Example 215 65R15 96H LT Light Truck Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards The size designation for LT Metric tires is the same as for P Metric tires except for the letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preced ing the size designation Example LT235 85R16 Temporary spare tires are spares designed for tempo rary emergency use only Temporary high pressure compact spare tires have the letter T or S molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation Example T145 80D18 103M High flotation tire sizing is based on U S design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall Example 31x10 5 R15 LT 420 STARTING AND OPERATING xs Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE Size Designation P Passenger car tire size based on U S design standards blank Passenger car tire based on European design standards LT Light truck tire based on U S design standards T or Temporary spare tire 31 Overall diameter in inches in 215 Section width in millimeters mm 65 Aspect ratio in percent 76 Ratio of section height to section width of tire 10 5 Section width in inches in ee STARTING AND OPERATING 421
385. oper pressure The TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver module e Four TPM sensors e Various TPMS messages which display in the Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC e TPM Telltale Light The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly if equipped has a TPM sensor The full size spare can be used in place of any of the four road tires The TPMS will only monitor the pressure in the full size spare tire when it is used in place of a road tire Otherwise a spare with a pressure below the low pressure limit will not cause the TPM Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to sound Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings y The TPM Telltale Light will illuminate in the d instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires In addition the EVIC will display a LOW TIRE message and a graphic showing the pres sure values of each tire with the low tire pressure values flashing or changing color An Inflate to XX message will also be displayed NE 156789mi 102 Tire Pressure 33 33 33 33 P PSI R N f D S 0558007136 Tire Pressure Monitor Display Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible and inflate the tires with a low pressure condition those flashing or in a different color in the EVIC graphic to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure inflation value as shown in the Inflate to XX message O
386. ough standing water Driving through standing water limits your vehi cle s braking capabilities which increases stopping distances Therefore after driving through stand ing water drive slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes e Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out and leave you stranded e Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your pas sengers and others around you 404 STARTING AND OPERATING POWER STEERING Your vehicle is equipped with an electro hydraulic power steering system that will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces The system will vary its assist to provide light efforts while parking and good feel while driving If the electro hydraulic power steering system experiences a fault that prevents it from providing power steering assist then the system will provide mechanical steering capability CAUTION Extreme steering maneuvers may cause the electri cally driven pump to reduce or stop power steering assistance in order to prevent damage to the system Normal operation will resume once the system is allowed to cool If the SERVICE POWER STEERING SYSTEM el message and a flashing icon are displayed on the EVIC screen it indicates that the vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for service It is likely the vehicle ha
387. our head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together Position the lap belt across your thighs below your abdomen To remove slack in the lap belt portion pull up a bit on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision forward increasing the possibility of injury Wear your seat belt snugly A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision increasing head and neck injury A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries Ribs aren t as strong as shoulder bones Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your stron gest bones will take the force in a collision Continued THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 WARNING e A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of internal injury in a collision The belt forces won t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones but across your abdomen Always wear the lap belt as low as possible and keep it snug A twisted belt may not protect you properly In a collision it could even cut into you Be sure the belt is straight If you can t straighten a belt in your vehicle take it to your authorized dealer immedi ately and have it fixed 022636830 Removing Slack From Belt 5 Position th
388. oven cleaner These products may damage the wheel s protective finish Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel s pro tective finish Only MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 545 Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure If Equipped Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man ner e Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with a clean dry towel Blot any remaining stain with a clean damp towel e For tough stains apply MOPAR Total Clean or a mild soap solution to a clean damp cloth and remove stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue For grease stains apply MOPAR Multi Purpose Cleaner to a clean damp cloth and remove stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of protectants on Stain Repel products Interior Care Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and carpeting Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery MOPAR Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather upholstery Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPARQ Total Clean Care
389. plies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received 5 Once you repair or replace the original road tire and ida including interference that may cause undesired op reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare the TPMS will update automatically In addition the raton TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF and the graphic in The TPM sensors are regulated under one of the follow the EVIC will display a new pressure value instead of ing licenses dashes as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active United States MRXMERCTX1 road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to Canada 2546A MERCTXI 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information FUEL REQUIREMENTS 3 6L Engine If Equipped This engine is designed to meet all emis sions regulations and provide excellent fuel economy and performance when using high quality unleaded regular gasoline 800dfabs having an octane rating of 87 The use of premium gasoline is not recommended as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines 5 7L Engine If Equipped This engine is designed to meet all emis m 4m sions regulations and provide satisfactory ao fuel
390. pressure below the low pressure warn ing limit upon the next ignition switch cycle a chime will sound and the TPM Telltale Light and LOW TIRE message will turn ON The Inflate to XX message will also be displayed After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h the LOW TIRE message will turn off and the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid 4 For each subsequent ignition switch cycle a chime will sound and the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare the TPMS will update automatically and the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information 450 STARTING AND OPERATING Ss Premium System If Equipped The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the pr
391. pull it tight if necessary Installing A Child Restraint With A Cinching Latch Plate CINCH If Equipped 1 Place the child seat in the center of the seating position For some second row seats you may need to recline the seat and or raise the head restraint to get a better fit Next pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path e gt O1 a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93 Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click Finally pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint while you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle seat If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the seating position has a top tether anchorage connect the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether strap Refer to Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether Anchorage for directions to attach a tether anchor Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path It should not move more than 1 inch 25 4 mm in any direction 94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary If the buckle or the cinching latch plate is to
392. r ERE eunti teneant o Vehicle Certification Label 466 E 85 General Information 460 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR 467 Ethanol Fuel E 85 pss mousey eaa eee 460 Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR 467 Fuel Requirements 0 006 460 Overloading ccce 467 Seed Eee OIL For Hebe Puel Loading i ien 468 Vehicles E 85 And Gasoline Vehicles 461 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 371 E TRAILER TOWING 00000 468 Towing Requirements 05 474 Common Towing Definitions 469 Towing Ipse shprisi anne api naia 479 Trailer Hitch Classification 471 Bb RECREATIONAL TOWING Trailer Towing Weights BEHIND MOTORHOME ETC 481 Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings 472 Two Wheel Drive And All Wheel Drive 481 Trailer And Tongue Weight 472 372 STARTING AND OPERATING Se STARTING PROCEDURES WARNING Continued Before starting your vehicle adjust your seat adjust the e Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or inside and outside mirrors fasten your seat belt and if in a location accessible to children and do not present instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with belts Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN WARNINGI mode A child could operate power windows other c
393. r and farther away than they really are Relying too much on your passenger side convex mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror Outside Mirrors Folding Feature If Equipped Some models have outside mirrors that are hinged The hinge allows the mirror to pivot forward and rearward to resist damage The hinge has three detent positions full forward full rearward and normal Driver s Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped This feature is controlled by the inside automatic dim ming mirror and will automatically adjust for headlight glare when the inside mirror adjusts NOTE This feature is also available on the passenger s side when equipped with turn signal and approach lighting Outside Mirrors With Turn Signal And Approach Lighting If Equipped Driver and passenger outside mirrors with turn signal and approach lighting contain four LEDs which are located in the upper outer corner of each mirror 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Three of the LEDs are turn signal indicators which flash with the corresponding turn signal lights in the front and rear of the vehicle Turning on the Hazard Warning flashers will also activate these LEDs The fourth LED supplies illuminated entry lighting which turns on in both mirrors when you use the Remote Keyless Ent
394. r axles or suspension components do not necessarily increase the vehicle s GVWR Loading To load your vehicle properly first figure out its empty weight axle by axle and side by side Store heavier items down low and be sure you distribute their weight as evenly as possible Stow all loose items securely before driving If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you have exceeded either GAWR but the total load is within the specified GVWR you must redistribute the weight Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate NOTE Refer to the Vehicle Certification Label affixed to the rear of the driver s door for your vehicle s GVWR and GAWRs Refer to the Tire Placard for your vehicle s proper tire pressure TRAILER TOWING In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle Before towing a trailer carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing ee STARTING AND OPERATING 469 Common Towing Definitions The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR
395. r or an aftermarket grille or modifying the grille is not recom mended Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit ACC operation ACC Unavailable Warning If the system turns off and the EVIC displays Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Unavailable there may be a temporary malfunction that limits ACC functionality ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 245 Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions ACC will be temporarily unavailable If this occurs try activating ACC again later following a key cycle If the problem persists see your authorized dealer NE 156789mi 102 Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Unavailable P 032363725 Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Unavailable Warning Precautions While Driving With ACC In certain driving situations ACC may have detection issues In these cases ACC may brake late or unexpect edly The driver needs to stay alert and may need to intervene E Adding A Trailer Hitch The weight of a trailer hitch may affect the performance of ACC If there is a noticeable change in performance following the installation of a trailer hitch or if the ACC performance does not return to normal after removing the trailer hitch see your authorized dealer 246 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Offset Driving ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is offset from your direct line of travel or a vehicle merging in from a side lane There may not b
396. reduced energy consumption The new system utilizes proprietary amplifier and speaker technologies deliver ing substantial increases in component and system effi ciency levels The 12 Channel Class D GreenEdge high efficiency amplifier is governed by a high voltage tracking power supply and drives a 7 5 channel playback architecture The Harman Kardon audio system offers the ability to choose Logic 7 surround sound for any audio source The GreenEdge high efficiency speaker designs ensure the system has higher SPL and a dramatic increase in dynamic sound quality The speakers are tuned for maximum efficiency and perfectly matched to the ampli fier output stage ensuring state of the art multi seat surround sound processing Logic7 multichannel surround sound technology deliv ers an immersive accurate sound stage to every seating position This surround effect is available for audio from any source AM FM CD Satellite Radio or dashboard AUX input and is activated through the Uconnect System Refer to Surround Sound under Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel 354 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ses STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel at the three and nine o clock positions Remote Sound System Controls Back View Of Steering Wheel 045035585 The right hand control is a rocker type switch with
397. ren alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever ee STARTING AND OPERATING 393 WARNING Continued Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children and do not leave When shifting into PARK firmly move the shift lever the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless all the way forward and to the left until it stops and is Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN mode A child fully seated could operate power windows other controls or e With brake pedal released verify that the shift lever move the vehicle will not move out of PARK REVERSE R ram CAUTION This range is for moving the vehicle backward Shift into e Before moving the shift lever out of PARK you REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete must turn the ignition switch from the OFT posi stop tion to the ON RUN position and also press the brake pedal Otherwise damage to the shift lever NEUTRAL N could result Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged DO NOT race the engine when shifting from periods with the engine running The engine may be PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range as this started in this range Apply the parking
398. res are essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Refer to Tires General Information in Starting and Oper ating for information on tire pressures and for proper tire inflation procedures Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures before trailer usage Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer Refer to Tires General Information in Starting and Operating for informa tion on tread wear indicators and for the proper inspection procedure 476 STARTING AND OPERATING M When replacing tires refer to Tires General Infor mation in Starting and Operating for information on replacement tires and for the proper tire replace ment procedures Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle s GVWR and GAWR limits Towing Requirements Trailer Brakes Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes When towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system an electronic brake controller is not required ee STARTING AND OPERATING 477 WARNING e Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1 000 Ibs 454 kg and required for tr
399. riously reduce engine perfor mance and cause serious damage to the engine Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In the event of engine malfunction particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance have your vehicle serviced promptly Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat resulting in possible damage to the converter and vehicle 530 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Under normal operating conditions the catalytic con verter will not require maintenance However it is im portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating If this occurs stop the vehicle turn off the engine and allow it to cool Service including a tune up to manufacturer s specifica tions should be obtained immediately To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle Do not idle the engin
400. rous manner that could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others 412 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Electronic Stability Control ESC This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions The ESC corrects for oversteering and understeering the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel Engine power may also be reduced to assist in counteracting the condition of oversteer or understeer and help the vehicle maintain the desired path The ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the path that the driver intends to steer the vehicle and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle When the actual path does not match the intended path the ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the condition of oversteer or understeer Oversteer when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position Understeer when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position ESC Operating Modes The ESC system has two or three available operating modes ESC On This is the normal operating mode for the ESC When ever the vehicle is started the ESC system will be in this mode This mode should be used for most driving conditions The ESC should only be turned OFF for specific reasons as noted in the following paragraphs Partial Off The Partial Off mode is intended for times wh
401. rs the rear detection zones on both sides of the vehicle for objects that are moving toward the side of the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately 3 mph 5 km h to objects moving a maximum of approximately 20 mph 32 km h such as in parking lot situations UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 NOTE In a parking lot situation oncoming vehicles can be obscured by vehicles parked on either side If the sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles the system will not be able to alert the driver When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE the driver is alerted using both the visual and audible alarms including reducing the radio volume WARNING RCP is not a Back Up Aid system It is intended to be used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a parking lot situation Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using RCP Always check carefully behind your vehicle look behind you and be sure to check for pedestrians animals other vehicles obstructions and blind spots before back ing up Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Modes Of Operation Modes Of Operation With EVIC Three selectable modes of operation are available in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Under standing Your
402. ry RKE transmitter or open any door This LED shines outward to illuminate the front and rear door handles It also shines downward to illuminate the area in front of the doors The Illuminated Entry lighting fades to off after about 30 seconds or it will fade to off immediately once the ignition is placed into the RUN position NOTE The approach lighting will not function when the shift lever is moved out of the PARK position Tilt Mirrors In Reverse If Equipped Tilt Mirrors in Reverse provides automatic outside mirror positioning which will aid the driver s view of the ground rearward of the front doors The outside mirrors will move slightly downward from the present position when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE The outside mirrors will then return to the original position when the vehicle is shifted out of the REVERSE position Each stored memory setting will have an associated Tilt Mir rors in Reverse position NOTE The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature is not turned on when delivered from the factory The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature can be turned on and off using the Uconnect System Refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further in formation es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 Power Mirrors The power mirror controls are located on the driver s door trim panel 030434975 Power Mirror Control The power mirror controls consist of mirror select
403. s 27 Automatic Transmission lees 372 Cold Weather llle 375 Engine Fails to Start 0 0 00000000 375 Remote ive emm A Poa eee ae ee a 27 Starting and Operating Starting Procedures iss eie Ph bow bates 372 Steering Column Controls 000000000 206 Column Lock uus amaa areire asa Res 217 POWER uiu S ed Giga an Grane eth Smee dd 404 Tilt Colummtn xe Irt unte Een uera 217 Wheel Heated leeren 219 Wheel Tt 2 2 rr REeIrr eas 217 Steering Wheel Audio Controls 354 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls 354 o Do EET 558 Storage Vehicle 22e 365 Storing Your Vehicle sai ais adie auaina ae aa 558 Stuck Freeing cosca sees e e ga css 500 Sunglasses Storage eee 269 Sun ROOF i ed eee em a eee Sade ee ee 279 Supplemental Restraint System Airbag 59 Synthetic Engine Oll ss esame ees System Remote Starting 600 INDEX eee Tachometer iia ca E d em he Rh Rs 312 Telescoping Steering Column 217 Temperature Control Automatic ATC 363 Temperature Gauge Engine Coolant 320 Theft Alarm Security Alarm 18 Theft System Security Alarm 18 Tilt Steering Column 00002005 217 Time Delay Headlight 0 202 Tire and Loading Information Placard 425 Tire Markings lee 418 lnc P IrT PT 102 Aging Life
404. s B and A repre sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law es F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 585 WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed under inflation or excessive load ing either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure Information Provided by DEALER INDEX 508 INDEX eee About Your Brakes 0 eee eee 405 ABS Anti Lock Brake System 408 Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Cruise Control 227 Adding Engine Coolant Antifreeze 533 Adding Fuel iai erbe ERR RES RS 463 Adding Washer Fluid l ainaani aa 528 Additives Fuel ersari mitia eee ee eee 458 Adjustable Pedals llle 221 Airbag su cag ha eS We he a x xe m eU Ca 59 Airbag Deployment races trari nao a piii oa 70 Airbag Light nis Rer REOR 67 Airbag Maintenance l l eee 72 Airbag Side sexe ace meu CHR ate atin oed 63 Airbag Window Side Curtain 63 Air Cleaner Engine Engine Air Cleaner Filter 521 Air Conditioner Maintenance 523 Air Conditioning Filter llle 366 Air Conditioning Refrigerant 523 Air Conditioning Systemi a so sareren kias roas 363 Air Pressure Tires 0 0 0 0 aaa aaa 430 Alarm Lights sssi nette ele aero Praed
405. s been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 345 e Flash Headlights With Lock When this feature is selected the headlights will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected To make your selection touch the Flash Head lights with Lock soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Doors amp Locks After pressing the Doors amp Locks soft key the following settings will be available e Auto Unlock On Exit When this feature is selected all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver s door is opened To make your selection touch the Auto Unlock On Exit soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Flash Headlight With Lock When this feature is selected the front and headlights will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter To make your selection touch the Flash Lights With Lock soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the
406. s lost power steering assistance Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information EVIC in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information If the POWER STEERING SYSTEM OVER TEMP mes sage and an icon are displayed on the EVIC screen it indicates that extreme steering maneuvers may have occurred which caused an over temperature condition in the power steering system You will lose power steering assistance momentarily until the over temperature con dition no longer exists Once driving conditions are safe then pull over and let vehicle idle for a few moments until the light turns off Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information ee STARTING AND OPERATING 405 NOTE e Even if power steering assistance is no longer opera tional it is still possible to steer the vehicle Under these conditions there will be a substantial increase in steering effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers e If the condition persists see your authorized dealer for service FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5 7L ENGINE ONLY IF EQUIPPED This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting off four of the engine s eight cylinders during light load and cruise conditions The system is automatic with no driver inputs or additional driving skills required NOTE This system may take some time to return to full functionality after a battery disco
407. s of FCW is the Far setting This means the system will warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are farther away This gives you the most reaction time To change the setting for more dynamic driving select the Near setting This warns you of a possible collision when you are much closer to the vehicle in front of you This allows for a more dynamic driving experi ence To change the FCW status touch and release the OFF Near or Far button Then touch the arrow back soft key For further information refer to Adaptive Cruise Con trol ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 341 e ParkSense If Equipped The ParkSense system will scan for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission shift lever is in REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph 18 km h It will provide an alert audible and or visual to indicate the proximity to other objects The system can be enabled with Sound Only or Sound and Display To change the ParkSense status touch and release the Sound Only or Sounds and Display button Then touch the arrow back soft key Refer to ParkSense in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for system function and oper ating information e ParkSense Chime Volume The ParkSense Chime Volume settings can be selected from the EVIC or Uconnect System if equipped The chime volume settings
408. s the wheel spin across a driven axle If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning This feature remains active even if TCS and ESC are in the Partial Off mode Refer to Electronic Stability Control ESC in this section for more information Brake Assist System BAS This system complements the ABS by optimizing the vehicle braking capability during emergency brake ma neuvers This system detects an emergency braking situ ation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes This can help reduce braking distances Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance To receive the benefits of this system you must apply continuous brake pedal pressure during the stopping sequence Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired Once the brake pedal is released the BAS is deactivated WARNING The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions The BAS cannot prevent collisions including those result ing from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dange
409. say Send 1234 or you can say Send Voicemail Password if Voicemail password is stored in your mobile phonebook Recent Calls You may browse up to 34 of the most recent of each of the following call types 68 4 FM 91 7 10 10 NW 54 out Recent calls gt Ana Conda Axel Schweiss Buddy s Pizza 248 990 6543 James Buttler D Dennett wf OFF Controts r l Qu Phone More Radio Player Climate Incoming Calls Outgoing Calls ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143 e Missed Calls e All Calls These can be accessed by touching the recent calls soft key on the Phone main screen You can also press the w button and say Show my incoming calls from any screen and the Incoming calls will be displayed You can also press the w button and say Show my recent calls from any screen and the All calls screen will be displayed NOTE Incoming can also be replaced with Outgoing Recent or Missed Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call No Call Currently In Progress When you receive a call on your mobile phone the Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio sys tem if on and will ask if you would like to answer the call Press the w button to accept the call To ignore the call touch the Ignore soft key on the touch screen You can also touch the answer soft key or touch the caller ID box Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call Call Currently In Progress
410. screen Uconnect Phone will display an in process screen while the system is connecting When the pairing process has successfully completed the system will prompt you to choose whether or not this is your favorite phone Selecting Yes will make this phone the highest priority This phone will take pre cedence over other paired phones within range ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 68 yf FM 91 7 10 10 NW 54 out Bluetooth pairing successful Motorola 5149 Make this phone your favorite 1 Sy E z4 SWy E 3 Radio Playor Controls Climato Nav Phone More NOTE For phones which are not made a favorite the phone priority is determined by the order in which it was paired The latest phone paired will have the higher priority You can also use the following VR commands to bring up the Paired Phone screen from any screen on the radio e Show Paired Phones or e Connect My Phone Pair A Bluetooth Streaming Audio Device 3 Touch the Media soft key to begin Change the Source to Bluetooth Touch the Bluetooth soft key to display the Paired Audio Devices screen Touch the Add Device soft key NOTE If there is no device currently connected with the system a pop up will appear 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e Search for available devices on your Bluetooth en abled audio device When prompted on the device enter the PIN shown on the
411. se Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side win dow defrosting and defogging When the defrost mode is selected the blower level may will increase 12 Climate Control OFF Button Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control ON OFF 13 Driver Temperature Control Down Button Provides the driver with independent temperature con trol Push the button for cooler temperature settings NOTE In Sync mode this button will also automatically adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same time 362 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME 14 Driver Temperature Control Up Button Provides the driver with independent temperature con trol Push the button for warmer temperature settings NOTE In Sync mode this button will also automatically adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same time Climate Control Functions A C Air Conditioning The Air Conditioning A C button allows the operator to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning system When the air conditioning system is turned on cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into the cabin For improved fuel economy press the A C button to turn off the air conditioning and manually adjust the blower and airflow mode settings Also make sure to select only Panel Bi Level or Floor modes NOTE If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass select Defrost mode and increas
412. se both the sunroof and shade completely 286 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE es Closing Power Shade Manual Mode To close the shade press and hold the switch in the forward position Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the shade will remain in a partially closed condition until the switch is pushed and held forward again Pinch Protect Feature This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close operation If an ob struction in the path of the sunroof is detected the sunroof will automatically retract Remove the obstruc tion if this occurs Next press the switch forward and release to Express Close Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window Sunroof Maintenance Use only a non abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 287 Ignition Off Operation For vehicles not equipped with t
413. service ON It may cause serious electrical shock or electro cution if not serviced properly See your authorized dealer for service NOTE On vehicles equipped with HID headlamps when the headlamps are turned on there is a blue hue to the lights This diminishes and becomes more white after approximately 10 seconds as the system charges Standard Low Beam And High Beam Headlamp 1 Open the hood NOTE Removal of the air cleaner filter housing may be necessary prior to replacing bulbs in the headlamp assembly on the driver side of the vehicle ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 561 2 Reach behind the headlamp housing to access the headlamp outboard bulb cap nO Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil 3 Firmly grasp the cap and rotate it counterclockwise to unlock it contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with an oily surface clean the 4 Twist the headlamp bulb assembly counterclockwise bulb with rubbing alcohol and then pull it out of the headlamp assembly r Front Turn Signal Lamps 5 Disconnect the bulb from the wiring assembly and install the replacement bulb 1 Open the hood 6 Reinstall the bulb and wiring assembly into the head NOTE Removal of the air cleaner filter housing may be lamp assembly and then turn it clockwise necessary prior to replacing bulbs in the headlamp assembly on the driver side of the vehicle 7 Install the headlamp bulb cap i
414. serviced the es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313 repair technician should leave the odometer reading the same as it was before the repair or service If s he cannot do so then the odometer must be set at zero and a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was before the repair or service It is a good idea for you to make a record of the odometer reading before the repair service so that you can be sure that it is properly reset or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer must be reset at zero Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Display The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC features a driver interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster For further information refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC The Shift Lever Indicator is self contained within the EVIC display It displays the gear position of the automatic transmission NOTE e You must apply the brakes before shifting from PARK The highest available transmission gear is displayed in the lower right corner of the Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC whenever the Electronic Range Select ERS feature is active Use the selector on the shift lever to activate ERS Refer to Automatic Transmission in Starting And Operating for further information 7 Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light If Equipped Each tire including the spare if provi
415. set There is an ECO icon between the Compass and Outside Temperature info at the top of the EVIC display This icon will appear whenever the Multi Displacement System MDS if equipped allows the engine to operate on four cylinders or if you are driving in a fuel efficient manner This feature allows you to monitor when you are driving in a fuel efficient manner and it can be used to modify driving habits in order to increase fuel economy 332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Distance To Empty DTE Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank This estimated distance is determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous and average fuel economy according to the current fuel tank level DTE cannot be reset through the SELECT button NOTE Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle regardless of the DTE displayed value When the DTE value is less than 30 miles 48 km estimated driving distance the DTE display will change to a LOW FUEL message This display will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the LOW FUEL message and a new DTE value will display Press the BACK button to return to the main menu Miles Per Gallon MPG Liters Per 100 km L 100km The Miles Per Gallon MPG Liters Per 100 km L 100km fe
416. sirable While cruising brief full throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break in Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri mental and should be avoided The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high quality energy conserving type lubricant Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur For the recommended viscosity and quality grades refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle CAUTION Never use Non Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may result NOTE A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles kilometers of operation This should be considered a normal part of the break in and not interpreted as an indication of difficulty 98 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Ses SAFETY TIPS Transporting Passengers NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA WARNING Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure e
417. sition Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap shoulder belt 1 Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point 2 At about 6 to 12 in 15 to 30 cm above the latch plate grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate 3 Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate 4 Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors ALR which are used to secure a child restraint system For additional information refer to Installing Child Re straints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt under the Child Restraints section The chart below defines the type of feature for each seating position Driver Center Passenger First Row N A N A ALR Second ALR ALR ALR Row N A Not Applicable e ALR Automatic Locking Retractor 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR and is being used for normal usage Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the occupant s mid section so as to not activate the ALR If the ALR is activated you will hear a ratc
418. ss MEMORY button number 1 on the driver s door or the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 1 198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To recall the memory setting for driver two press MEMORY button number 2 on the driver s door or the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 2 A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the MEMORY buttons S 1 or 2 on the driver s door during a recall When a recall is cancelled the driver seat side mirror adjustable pedals if equipped and power tilt and telescopic steering column if equipped stop mov ing A delay of one second will occur before another recall can be selected Easy Entry Exit Seat Available With Memory Seat Only This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle The distance the driver seat moves depends on where you have the driver seat positioned when you remove the Key Fob from the ignition or change the ignition to OFF for vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go When you remove the Key Fob from the ignition or change the ignition to OFF for vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go the driver seat will move about 2 4 in 60 mm rearward if the driver seat position is greater than or equal to 2 7 in 67 7 mm forward of the rear stop The seat will return to its previously set position when you place the ignit
419. ssible damage do not slam the hood to close it Lower the hood until it is open approxi mately 6 in 15 cm and then drop it This should secure both latches Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully closed with both latches engaged SS LJ WL WARNING Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle If the hood is not fully latched it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision Failure to follow this warning could result in serious 031339994 me injury or death Hood Safety Latch Use the hood prop rod if equipped to secure the hood in the open position UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201 LIGHTS Headlight Switch TE The headlight switch is located on the left side of the instrument panel This switch controls the operation of the headlights parking lights instrument panel lights instrument panel light dimming interior lights and fog lights 031463855 Headlight Switch Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent for parking light and instrument panel light operation Rotate the headlight switch to the second detent for headlight parking light and instrument panel light op eration 202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee Automatic Headlights If Equipped This system automatically turns the headlights on or off according to ambient light levels To turn the system on rotate the h
420. straints in this Vehicle 022668888 ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91 What is the weight limit child s weight weight of the child restraint for using the Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a forward facing child restraint Weight limit of the Child Restraint Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to install a forward facing child restraint up to the recommended weight limit of the child restraint Can the rear facing child restraint touch the back of the front passenger seat Can the head restraints be removed Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt against the belt path of the child restraint Yes Yes center position only Yes Contact between the front passenger seat and the child restraint is allowed if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact In positions with cinching latch plates CINCH the buckle stalk may be twisted up to 3 full turns Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an ALR retractor 92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Installing A Child Restraint with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor ALR 1 Place the child seat in the center of the seating position For some second row seats you may need to recline the seat and or raise the head restraint to get a better fit Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to pass it through t
421. t Calls Searching Contacts phone number Search for John Smith Mobile Screen Activated Features Dialing via Keypad using touch screen e Viewing and Calling contacts from Phonebooks dis played on the touch screen e Setting Favorite Contact Phone numbers so they are easily accessible on the Main Phone screen e Viewing and Calling contacts from Recent Call logs Reviewing your recent Incoming SMS e Sending a text message via the touch screen e Listen to Music on your Bluetooth Device via the touch screen Pairing up to 10 phones audio devices for easy access to connect to them quickly NOTE Your phone must be capable of SMS messaging via Bluetooth for messaging features to work properly Your mobile phone s audio is transmitted through your vehicles audio system the system will automatically mute your radio when using the Uconnect Phone For Uconnect customer support visit the following web site US residents visit www UconnectPhone com or call 1 877 855 8400 Canadian residents visit www UconnectPhone com or call 1 800 465 2001 English or 1 800 387 9983 French ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls between the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the system s microphone for private conversation WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only
422. t be replaced immediately 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver and front passenger if equipped with front passenger BeltAlert to fasten their seat belts The feature is active whenever the ignition is on If the driver or front seat passenger is unbelted the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until both front seat belts are fastened The BeltAlert warning sequence begins after the vehicle speed is over 5 mph 8 km h by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime Once the sequence starts it will continue for the entire duration or until the respective seatbelts are fastened After the sequence completes the Seat Belt Reminder Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts are fastened The driver should instruct all other occu pants to fasten their seat belts If a front seat belt is unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph 8 km h BeltAlert will provide both audio and visual notification The front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the front passenger seat is unoccupied BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat if equipped It is recommended that pets be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured
423. t block the area of the rear fascia where the radar sensors are located with foreign objects bum per stickers bicycle racks etc 035468893 Sensor Location Driver Side Shown The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an audible chime alert and reducing the radio volume Refer to Modes Of Operation for further information The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three different entry points side rear front while driving to see if an alert is necessary The BSM system will issue an alert during these types of zone entries UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 Entering From The Side Entering From The Rear Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either side of the vehicle side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative speed of less than 30 mph 48 km h Side Monitoring Rear Monitoring 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Overtaking Traffic If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative speed of less than 15 mph 24 km h and the vehicle remains in the blind spot for approximately 1 5 seconds the warning light will be illuminated If the difference in speed between the two vehicles is greater than 15 mph 24 km h the warning light will not illuminate Overtaking Appr
424. t setting the indicator illuminates when ON 4 AUTO Operation Button Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and amount Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch between manual mode and automatic modes Refer to Automatic Operation for more information 5 Front Defrost Button Press and release to change the current airflow setting to Defrost mode The indicator illuminates when this fea ture is ON Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode The blower speed may increase when Defrost mode is selected If the front defrost mode is turned off the climate system will return the previous setting 6 Rear Defrost Button Press and release this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors if equipped ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 359 An indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on The rear window defroster automatically turns off after 10 minutes CAUTION Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements e Use care when washing the inside of the rear window Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to the heating elements Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water e Do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abrasive window cleaners on
425. t the cord to a standard 110 115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded three wire extension cord The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on the driver side of the vehicle It has a removable cap that is located on the driver side of the Integrated Power Module cord before driving Damage to the 110 115 Volt electrical cord could cause electrocution AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION CAUTION Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow ing precautions are not observed e Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop e Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed Continued 378 STARTING AND OPERATING Se CAUTION Continued e Do not shift between PARK REVERSE NEU TRAL or DRIVE when the engine is above idle WARNING Continued PARK turn the engine OFF and remove the key fob When the ignition is in the OFF position the transmission is locked in PARK securing the vehicle against unwanted movement e It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re verse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into
426. t window tinting that contains materials that may block radio wave signals 3 Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors The EVIC will also display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message for a minimum of five seconds when a system fault related to an incorrect sensor location fault is detected In this case the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message is then followed with a graphic display with pressure values still shown This indicates that the pres sure values are still being received from the TPM sensors but they may not be located in the correct vehicle position The system still needs to be serviced as long as the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message is displayed ee STARTING AND OPERATING 453 Vehicles With Full Size Spare 1 The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly has a TPM sensor that can be monitored by the TPMS If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition switch cycle a chime will sound and the TPM Telltale Light will turn ON In addition the EVIC will display a low pressure mes sage and a graphic showing the low tire pressure value flashing or in a different color An Inflate to XX message will also be displayed After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h the TPM Telltale Light will turn 3
427. tem is operational The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand by mode when the vehicle is in PARK AN LL CCS F IE fll es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 030440174 BSM Warning Light The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft or 3 8 m The zone starts at the outside rear view mirror and extends ap proximately 23 ft 7 m to the rear of the vehicle The BSM system monitors the detection zones on both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches approximately 6 mph 10 km h or higher and will alert the driver of vehicles in these areas NOTE The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the de tection zones The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if your vehicle is towing a trailer Therefore visually verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle and trailer before making a lane change If the trailer or other object i e bicycle sports equipment extends beyond the side of your vehicle this may result in the BSM warning light remaining illuminated the entire time the vehicle is in a forward gear 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are located must remain free of snow ice and dirt road contamination so that the BSM system can function properly Do no
428. ter e Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener to complete the training for a Rolling Code Did you unplug the device for programming and remember to plug it back in If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance WARNING Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are programming the universal trans ceiver Do not program the transceiver if people pets or other objects are in the path of the door or gate Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener that has a stop and reverse feature as required by Federal safety standards This includes most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982 Do not use a garage door opener without these safety features Call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for safety information or assistance Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide a dan gerous gas Do not run your vehicle in the garage while programming the transceiver Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 279 General Information POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry The power sunroof switch is located between the sun Canada RSS 210 Operation is subject to the following visors on the overhead console two conditions 1 This device may not cause har
429. th Manual Climate Controls the Recirculation mode is not allowed in De frost mode to improve window clearing operation Re circulation will be disabled automatically if this mode is selected Attempting to use Recirculation while in this mode will cause the LED in the control button to blink and then turn off Automatic Temperature Control ATC Automatic Operation 1 Press the AUTO hard key or soft key button 4 on the Automatic Temperature Control ATC Panel 2 Next adjust the temperature you would like the system to maintain by adjusting the driver and pas senger temperature hard or soft control buttons 7 8 13 14 Once the desired temperature is displayed the system will achieve and automatically maintain that comfort level 364 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M 3 When the system is set up for your comfort level it is not necessary to change the settings You will experi ence the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically NOTE e It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for cold or hot vehicles The system automatically adjusts the temperature mode and blower speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible e The temperature can be displayed in U S or Metric units by selecting the US M customer programmable feature Refer to the Uconnect System Settings in this section of the manual To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic mode dur
430. that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle Determine the condition of the road or the path that is under water and if there are any obstacles in the way before driving through the standing water Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water This will minimize wave effects and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water Furthermore flowing and or rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly Failure to follow this warning may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 403 CAUTION Continued WARNING e Driving through standing water may cause damage to your vehicle s drivetrain components Always inspect your vehicle s fluids i e engine oil trans mission axle etc for signs of contamination i e fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance after driving through standing water Do not continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contami nated as this may result in further damage Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out and cause serious internal damage to the engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Driving through standing water limits your vehi cle s traction capabilities Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving thr
431. the child restraint for using the LATCH anchorage system to attach the child restraint 65 Ibs 29 5 kg Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight of the child and the child restraint is 65 Ibs 29 5 kg Use the seat belt and tether anchor instead of the LATCH system once the combined weight is more than 65 lbs 29 5 kg position using the inner LATCH lower anchorages Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat No Do not use the seat belt when you belt be used together to attach a rear use the LATCH anchorage system to facing or forward facing child restraint attach a rear facing or forward facing child restraint Can a child seat be installed in the center N A 84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Can two child restraints be attached using a common lower LATCH anchorage No Never share a LATCH anchorage with two or more child restraints If the center position does not have dedicated LATCH lower anchorages use the seat belt to install a child seat in the center position next to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position Can the rear facing child restraint touch the back of the front passenger seat Yes The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger seat if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact See your child restraint owner s manual for more information Can the head restraints be removed Yes
432. the fuel e Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the filler door emergency release vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is 4 Open the trunk being filled Never add fuel when the engine is running This is in violation of most state and federal fire regula 2 Remove the access cover located on the left side inner trim panel tions and may cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to turn on e A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle You could be burned Always place fuel containers on the ground while filling Access Cover 466 STARTING AND OPERATING Sx 3 Pull the release cable Release Cable VEHICLE LOADING The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown on the Vehicle Certification Label This information should be used for passenger and luggage loading as indicated Do not exceed the specified Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR or the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR Vehicle Certification Label Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label affixed to the drivers side B Pillar or the rear of the driver s door The label contains the following information e Name of manufacturer e Month and year of manufacture Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR front ee STARTING AND OPERATING 467 Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR rear e Vehicle Identification Number VIN Type of Ve
433. the jack underneath the lift area that is closest to the flat tire Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly engage the jack saddle with the lift area of the sill flange NOTE If the vehicle is too low for jack placement slide the jack on its side and rotate it up into position 060641851 Jacking Locations WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 493 Front Jacking Location Rear Jacking Location 5 Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire and install the spare tire 494 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES WARNING Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire 6 Remove the lug nuts and tire 7 Mount the spare tire CAUTION 060633619 Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem Mounting Spare Tire facing outward The vehicle could be damaged if the NOTE spare tire is mounted incorrectly For vehicles so equipped do not attempt to install a center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 495 Refer to Compact Spare Tire and to Limited Use Spare under Tires General Information in Start ing and Operating for additional warnings cautions and information about the spare tire its use and operation 8 Install the lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the lug nut toward the wheel Lightly tighten the lug nuts WARNING
434. the obstruc tion if this occurs Next press the switch forward and release to Express Close Venting Sunroof Express Press and release the Vent button within one half second and the sunroof will open to the vent position This is called Express Vent and it will occur regardless of sunroof position During Express Vent operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Sunshade Operation The sunshade can be opened manually However the sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens NOTE The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open 282 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window Sunroof Maintenance Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel Ignition OFF Operation For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power sunroof switch will remain active for 45 seco
435. the overhead console headliner or sunvisor designate the three differ ent HomeLink channels The HomeLink indicator is located above the center button 034033576 HomeLink Buttons Overhead Consoles ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 271 034000355 HomeLink Buttons Sunvisor Headliner NOTE HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Secu rity Alarm is active Before You Begin Programming HomeLink Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage before you begin programming For more efficient programming and accurate transmis sion of the radio frequency signal it is recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand held transmitter of the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink system Erase all channels before you begin programming To erase the channels place the ignition in the ON RUN position and press and hold the two outside HomeLink buttons I and III for up 20 seconds or until the red indicator flashes 272 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NOTE e Erasing all channels should only be performed when programming HomeLink for the first time Do not erase channels when programming additional buttons e If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance Programming A Rolling Code For programming garage door openers that were manu factured after 199
436. the single flashing arc and sounds the continuous tone Also the sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly depending on its size and shape giving a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 265 PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on screen image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the shift lever is put into REVERSE The image will be displayed on the touchscreen display along with a cau tion note to check entire surroundings across the top of the screen After five seconds this note will disappear The ParkView camera is located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear License plate When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE the rear camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen appears again When displayed static grid lines will illustrate the width of the vehicle and will show separate zones that will help indicate the distance to the rear of the vehicle The following table shows the approximate distances for each zone Zone Distance to the rear of the vehicle Red 0 1 ft 0 30 cm Yellow 1 ft 3 ft 30cm 1 m Green 3 ft or greater 1 m or greater 266 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING CAUTION Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
437. the sunroof open adjust the sun roof opening to minimize the buffeting 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE The trunk lid can be released from inside the vehicle by pressing the TRUNK RELEASE button located on the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel NOTE The transmission must be in PARK before the button will operate The trunk lid can be released from outside the vehicle by pressing the TRUNK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter twice within five seconds or by using the external release switch located on the underside of the decklid overhang The release fea ture will function only when the vehicle is in the unlock condition Trunk Release Button With the ignition in the ON RUN position the Trunk Open symbol will display in the instrument cluster indicating that the trunk is open The odometer display will reappear once the trunk is closed With the ignition in the OFF position the Trunk Open symbol will display until the trunk is closed Refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for more information on trunk operation with the Passive Entry feature TRUNK SAFETY WARNING WARNING Do not allow children to have access to the trunk either by climbing into the trunk from outside or through the inside of the vehicle Always close the Continued ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICL
438. thorized Dealer Low Beam High Beam Bi Halogen Headlamp Low Beam High Beam Bi Xenon Headlamp Front Turn Signal Lamp Bulb Number HIR2LL D3S Serviced at Authorized Dealer PSY24WSV Rear Tail Stop Turn Lamp LED Serviced at Authorized Dealer Rear Sidemarker Lamp LED Serviced at Authorized Dealer Backup Lamp W21W Center High Mount Stop Lamp CHMSL LED Serviced at Authorized Dealer Front Park Lamp LED Serviced at Authorized Dealer License W5W Rear Fog Lamp If Equipped LED Serviced at Authorized Dealer 560 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of HID headlamps when the headlamp switch is turned BULB REPLACEMENT NOTE Lens fogging can occur under certain atmo spheric conditions This will usually clear as atmospheric conditions change to allow the condensation to change back into a vapor Turning the lamps on will usually accelerate the clearing process Low Beam And High Beam Headlamp High Intensity Discharge Headlamps HID If Equipped The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the headlamp switch off and the ignition turned to the OFF position Because of this you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb yourself If a headlamp bulb fails take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for
439. tion Labels 0 0 466 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 6 Vehicle Loading iss cesia 5248 48 4 4 ems 426 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 7 Vehicle Storage esee eem deme ds 365 Vehicle Theft Alarm Security Alarm 18 Viscosity Engine Oil 1 6 0 2 eee eee 519 Warning Flasher Hazard 06 484 Warning Lights Instrument Cluster Description 312 Warnings and Cautions 0 000 6 Warranty Information 2005 581 Washer Adding Fluid icon cR RR 528 Washers Windshield 0 000000 ae 214 Washing Vehicle eise sisia en Rm aes 543 Water Driving Through 0 0 000005 402 Wheel and Wheel Trim 0005 544 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care 544 Wind Butteting sesepan ket aeea ERR RO DR a 43 Window Pogging e cise eda een 365 MWindoWS s iv3 dk e PLE as evaded CST 40 Power ose ydo md Eme NU RASEN cid 40 Windshield Defroster 0 000 000 cee 100 Windshield Washers 0 0 0000 eee eee 212 Fluid oser oboe and baa Gk exc RASA REG 528 Windshield Wiper Blades 0 527 Windshield Wipers llle 212 Wiper Blade Replacement 00 527 Wipers Intermittent 0 0000 213 Wipers Rain Sensitive llle 215 INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT Special design considerations are incorporated into this vehicle s electroni
440. tion and the risk of injury caused by striking the vehicle Always be sure you and others in your inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should vehicle are buckled up properly be belted at all times Being too close to the Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC and or Seat Mounted Side Air Bag SAB during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or killed 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es Lap Shoulder Belts WARNING Continued All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with e Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous Seat lap shoulder belts belts are designed to go around the large bones of The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during your body These are the strongest parts of your very sudden stops or impacts This feature allows the body and can take the forces of a collision best shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make normal conditions However in an collision the belt will your injuries in a collision much worse You might lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the suffer internal injuries or you could even slide out vehicle or being thrown out of part of the belt Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe too Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt People belted together can crash into one another in
441. tion occurs AWD can also be manually se lected by activating AutoStick mode or activating the windshield wipers for an extended period of time Drive mode RWD or AWD is displayed momentarily in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in the gauge area of the vehicle display when the transmission is first shifted into gear and if the drive mode changes during vehicle operation NOTE If the SERVICE AWD SYSTEM warning mes sage appears after engine start up or during driving it means that the AWD system is not functioning properly and that service is required Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information CAUTION All wheels must have the same size and type tires Unequal tire sizes must not be used Unequal tire size may cause failure of the front differential and or the transfer case E STARTING AND OPERATING 401 DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES Acceleration Rapid acceleration on snow covered wet or other slip pery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull erratically to the right or left This phenomenon occurs when there is a difference in the surface traction under the rear driving wheels WARNING Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the rear wheels You could lose control of the vehicle and possibly have a collision Accelerate slowly and carefully
442. tionary and the outside temperature is below 32 F 0 C unless the wiper control on the multifunction lever is moved the vehicle speed becomes greater than 0 mph 0 km h or the outside temperature rises above freezing e Neutral Wipe Inhibit The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the ignition is placed in the RUN position the transmission shift lever is in the NEU TRAL position and the vehicle speed is less than 5 mph 8 km h unless the wiper control on the multifunc tion lever is moved or the shift lever is moved out of the NEUTRAL position Remote Start Mode Inhibit On vehicles equipped with Remote Starting system Rain Sensing wipers are not operational when the vehicle is in the remote start mode Once the operator is in the vehicle and has placed the ignition switch in the RUN position rain sensing wiper operation can resume if it has been selected and no other inhibit conditions mentioned previously exist ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217 TILT TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column The tilt telescoping control handle is located below the steering wheel at the end of the steering column Tilt Telescoping Control Handle To unlock the steering column pull the control handle down To tilt the steering column move the steering wheel upward or downward as d
443. tions Remove and store the extender when not needed Supplemental Restraint System SRS Air Bags This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems The driver s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel The passenger s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the instrument panel above the glove compartment The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es In addition the vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the steering column 022636842 Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations 1 Driver And Passenger 2 Knee Bolster Advanced Front Air Bags 3 Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag Knee Bolster NOTE The Driver and Front Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags are certified to the new Federal regulations for Advanced Air Bags The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator design This allows the air bag to have different rates of inflation based on several factors including the severity and type of collision This vehicle may be equipped with driver and or front passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon seat position This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and or front passenger
444. tions the vehicle will placement equipment that is not of the same size drive normally and will not require towing type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use tire sealant from a can or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result CAUTION Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL on could cause damage to the engine 8 Malfunction Indicator Light MIL control system It also could affect fuel economy and driveability If the MIL is flashing severe catalytic cy The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is part of converter damage and power loss will soon occur an onboard diagnostic system called OBD that Immediate service is required monitors engine and automatic transmission con trol systems The light will illuminate when the key is in 316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME WARNING A malfunctioning catalytic converter as referenced above can reach higher temperatures than in normal operating conditions This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants wood cardboard etc This could result in death or serious injury to the driver occupants or others 9 Speedometer Indicates vehicle speed 10 Fuel Door Reminder The arrow in this symbol is a reminder that the Fuel Filler Door is located on the left side of the vehicle lt 11 Fuel Gauge
445. to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with your radio Following the expiration of the free services it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information screen in order to re subscribe Touch the Subscription Info soft key to access the Sub scription Information screen Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver To reactivate your service either call the number listed on the screen or visit the provider online NOTE SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription 352 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL SS SETTING THE ANALOG CLOCK iPod USB MP3 CONTROL To set the analog clock at the top center of the instrument This feature allows an iPod or external USB device to be panel press and hold the button until the setting is plugged into the USB port Correc iPod control supports Mini 4G Photo Nano 5G iPod and iPhone devices Some iPod software versions may not fully support the iPod control features Please visit Apple s website for software updates For further information refer to the Uconnect Supple ment Manual Setting The Analog Clock E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 353 HARMAN KARDON Logic7 HIGH PERFORMANCE MULTICHANNEL SURROUND SOUND SYSTEM WITH DRIVER SELECTABLE SURROUND DSS IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle is equipped with a Harman Kardon audio system with GreenEdge technology that offers superior sound quality higher Sound Pressure Levels SPL and
446. tractor Mode ALR R at Doors iss vk o oce RR RO cao RR RO 33 It Equipped css exe nh m e 56 B KEYLESS ENTER N GO M sus sua ts 35 Energy Management Feature 57 B WINDOWS eee nnn 40 Seat Belt Pretensioner 0 00 57 Power Windows lee 40 Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System Wind Buffeng 43 BeltAlert9 cuui iem bru pem kd es 58 E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11 Seat Belts And Pregnant Women 59 BM SAFETY TIPS iecit re er RR 98 Seat Belt Extender 000 59 Transporting Passengers 000 98 Supplemental Restraint System SRS Exhaust Gas 1 ee ee 98 aa Al Bags eue dee yay pde ea ES X Eds 59 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls 65 The Vehicle 2 4 eere E eme we bane 99 Event Data Recorder EDR 73 Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Child Restraints 0 0000000 74 Dutbide The VEE vat een tavia tawny di Hua ll ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS 97 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system This system consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and a Keyless Ignition Node KIN Keyless Enter N Go Feature This vehicle is equipped with the Keyless Enter N Go
447. traints should only be removed by qualified technicians for service purposes only If either of the head restraints require removal see your autho rized dealer WARNING Do not place items over the top of the Active Head Restraint such as coats seat covers or portable DVD players These items may interfere with the operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event of a collision and could result in serious injury or death Rear Head Restraints The center head restraint has two adjustable positions up or down When the center seat is being occupied the head restraint should be in the raised position When there are no occupants in the center seat the head restraint can be lowered for maximum visibility for the driver ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193 To raise the head restraint pull upward on the head Folding Rear Seat restraint To lower the head restraint press the adjust ment button located at the base of the head restraint and push downward on the head restraint The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to provide an additional storage area To fold the rear seatback pull on the loops located on the upper seatback NOTE These loops can be tucked away when not in use mm Adjustment Button NOTE The outboard head restraints are not adjustable 030936862 Rear Seatback Loop 194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING e Be certain that the seatback is securely l
448. u have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after the LEARN button has been pressed 6 Return to the vehicle and press the programmed HomeLink button twice holding the button for two seconds each time If the garage door opener device activates programming is complete NOTE If the garage door opener device does not acti vate press the button a third time for two seconds to complete the training 274 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps ils 2 Cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Do not release the button Without releasing the button proceed with Program ming A Rolling Code Step 2 and follow all remaining steps Programming A Non Rolling Code For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured before 1995 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Place the hand held transmitter 1 to 3 in 3 to 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink button you want to program and the hand held trans mitter button
449. ur New Vehicle Limited Warranty The front 12 Volt power outlet has power available only when the ignition is placed in the ACC or RUN position Front Power Outlet WARNING Do not place ashes inside the cubby bin located on the center console on vehicle s not equipped with the ash receiver tray A fire leading to bodily injury could result UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 289 The center console outlet is powered directly from the There is also a 12 volt power outlet located on the back of battery power available at all times Items plugged into the center console for rear passengers This power outlet this outlet may discharge the battery and or prevent the has power available only when the ignition is placed in engine from starting the ACC or RUN position 034639996 034637608 Center Console Power Outlet Rear Center Console Power Outlet 290 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING To avoid serious injury or death Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet Do not touch with wet hands Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vehicle e If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure 072736619 Power Outlet Fuse Locations 1 12 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel And Power Outlet Console Rear 2 38 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Inside Arm Rest
450. ured so that they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways WARNING Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per sonal injury e Always make sure that floor mats are properly attached to the floor mat fasteners Continued es THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 101 WARNING Continued WARNING Continued Never place or install floor mats or other floor e Always make sure that objects cannot fall into coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly the driver footwell while the vehicle is moving secured to prevent them from moving and interfer Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal ing with the pedals or the ability to control the and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle vehicle control e Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top If required mounting posts must be properly in of already installed floor mats Additional floor stalled if not equipped from the factory mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or pedal area and interfere with the pedals mounting can cause interference with the brake Check mounting of mats on a regular basis Always pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have control of the vehicle been removed for clean
451. use blows again contact an autho i ler e When replacing a blown fuse always use an ap tized dealer propriate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as the original fuse Never replace a fuse with another fuse of higher amp rating Never replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other material Failure to use proper fuses may result in serious personal injury fire and or property dam age Before replacing a fuse make sure that the ignition is off and that all the other services are switched off and or disengaged If a general protection fuse for safety systems air bag system braking system power unit systems engine system gearbox system or steering system blows contact an authorized Dealer MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 549 Front Power Distribution Center Fuses CAUTION The Front Power Distribution Center is located in the engine compartment This module contains fuses and relays When installing the power distribution center cover it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched Failure to do so may allow water to get into the power distribution center and possibly result in an electrical system failure When replacing a blown fuse it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload If a properly rated fuse continues to blow it indicates a pr
452. utton a second time will toggle the unit of measure between mph or km h Press the BACK button to return to the main menu NOTE Changing the unit of measure in the Vehicle Speed menu will not change the unit of measure in the EVIC Trip Info Press and release the UP or DOWN button until Trip Info is highlighted in the EVIC Press and release the SELECT button to display the following three trip fea tures in the next screen e Trip A e Trip B e Elapsed Time 334 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Press the UP DOWN buttons to cycle through all the Trip Computer functions or press the BACK button to return to the main menu The Trip Functions mode displays the following informa tion Trip A Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last reset Trip B Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last reset Elapsed Time Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset Elapsed time will increment when the ignition is in the ON or START position Resetting A Trip Info Function To Reset any of the three Trip Info functions select the function you want to reset using the UP or DOWN buttons Push the SELECT button until the feature dis plays zero Tire PSI Press and release the UP or DOWN button until Tire PSI is highlighted in the EVIC Press and release the SELECT button and one of the following will be displayed If tire pressure is OK for all tires a vehicle
453. vate this feature The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the multifunction lever Wiper delay position 1 is the least sensitive and wiper delay position 4 is the most sensi tive Setting 3 should be used for normal rain conditions Settings 1 and 2 can be used if the driver desires less wiper sensitivity Settings 4 can be used if the driver desires more sensitivity The rain sense wipers will automatically change between an intermittent wipe slow wipe and a fast wipe depending on the amount of moisture that is sensed on the windshield Place the wiper switch in the OFF position when not using the system The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off using the Uconnect System refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further in formation 216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se NOTE The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the wiper speed is in the low or high position The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly when ice or dried salt water is present on the windshield e Use of Rain X or products containing wax or silicone may reduce rain sensor performance The Rain Sensing system has protective features for the wiper blades and arms It will not operate under the following conditions Low Temperature Wipe Inhibit The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the ignition is placed in the RUN position the vehicle is sta
454. ve the driver s seat up or down forward or rearward or to recline the seatback NOTE The passenger s seat will move up or down forward or rearward or if equipped will recline M 7A Power Seat Switches 1 Seat Control 2 Seatback Control ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183 WARNING CAUTION Do not place any article under a power seat or impede e Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death e Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat controls Seat travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat s path belts and while the vehicle is parked Serious Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward seat belt f Push the seat switch forward or rearward the seat will e Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the move in the direction of the switch Release the switch shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest when the desired position has been reached In a collision you could slide under the seat belt which could result in serious injury or death Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down Pull upward or pus
455. vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head restraints raise the head restraint and where possible route the tether strap under the head restraint and between the two posts If not possible lower the head restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard side of the head restraint 022637851 Adjustable Headrest Downward Position 022636837 Adjustable Headrest Release Push Button 96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se 022636908 Tether Strap Mounting 1 Cover A ether Strap Hook 3 Attaching Strap B Tether Anchor 4 Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram 5 Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer s instructions Transporting Pets Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97 ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break in period is not required for the engine and drivetrain transmission and axle in your vehicle Drive moderately during the first 300 miles 500 km After the initial 60 miles 100 km speeds up to 50 or 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are de
456. vehicle power outlets draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use ie cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough without engine operation the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud sand or snow it can often be moved using a rocking motion Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels Then shift back and forth between ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 501 DRIVE and REVERSE while gently pressing the accelera tor Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will maintain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels or racing the engine CAUTION Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to transmission overheating and failure Allow the en gine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every five rocking motion cycles This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle NOTE Press the ESC Off switch to place the Electronic Stability Control ESC system in Partial Off mode before rocking the vehicle Refer to Electronic Brake Control in Starting And Operating for further infor mation Once the vehicle has been freed press the ESC Off switch again to restore ESC On mode CAU
457. vertible child seats The infant carrier is only used rearward facing in the vehicle It is recommended for children from birth until they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier Convertible child seats can be used either rearward facing or forward facing in the vehicle Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward facing direction than infant carriers do so they can be used rearward facing by children who have outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years old Children should remain rearward facing until they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their convertible child seat WARNING e Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an air bag A deploying passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger including a child in a rearward facing infant seat Only use a rearward facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat 78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Ses Older Children And Child Restraints Children who are two years old or who have outgrown their rear facing convertible child seat can ride forward facing in the vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward facing direc tion are for children who are over two years old or who have outgrown the rear facing weight or height limit of their rear facing convertible child seat Chil
458. very bottle filled to MAX level ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 565 FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part We recommend you use MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 10 Year 150 000 Mile Formula OAT Organic Additive Technology We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W 20 Engine Oil meeting the re quirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 such as MOPAR Pennzoil and Shell Helix Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W 20 Engine Oil meeting the re quirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 such as MOPAR Pennzoil and Shell Helix Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade MOPAR Engine Oil Filter or equivalent We recommend you use MOPAR Spark Plugs Gap 0 043 in 1 1 mm We recommend you use MOPAR Spark Plugs Gap 0 043 in 1 1 mm 87 Octane 87 Octane Acceptable 89 Octane Recommended Engine Coolant Engine Oil 3 6L Engine Engine Oil 5 7L Engine Engine Oil Filter Spark Plugs 3 6L Engine Spark Plugs 5 7L Engine Fuel Selection 3 6L Engine Fuel Selection 5 7L Engine 566 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Sa Chassis Component Fluid Lubricant Or Genuine Part Automatic Transmission Use only MOPAR ZF 8 amp 9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid or 8 Speed Transmission equivalent Failur
459. veryone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Exhaust Gas WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO follow these safety tips Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area If you are required to drive with the trunk liftgate rear doors open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed DO NOT use the recirculation mode Continued en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 99 WARNING Continued Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle e If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running adjust your heating or cooling Seat Belts 2 controls to force outside air into the vehicle Set the Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts blower at high speed frays and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a system collision Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged i e bent retractor torn
460. whenever there is likely to be poor traction ice snow wet mud loose sand etc Traction When driving on wet or slushy roads it is possible for a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road surface This is known as hydroplaning and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability To reduce this possibility the following precau tions should be observed 1 Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are slushy 2 Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles 3 Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become visible 4 Keep tires properly inflated 5 Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden stop 402 STARTING AND OPERATING EENENEEEEEEEEMMMMMMMEEC g DRIVING THROUGH WATER Shallow Standing Water Driving through water more than a few inches Although your vehicle is capable of driving through centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure shallow standing water consider the following Caution safety and prevent damage to your vehicle and Warning before doing so Flowing Rising Water CAUTION WARNING Do not drive on or across a road or path where water is flowing and or rising as in storm run off Flow ing water can wear away the road or path s surface e Always check the depth of the standing water before driving through it Never drive through standing water
461. wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper is turned off the wipers will operate for three wipe cycles and then turn off WARNING Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to a collision You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather warm the windshield with the defroster before and during windshield washer use ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215 Headlights On With Wipers Available with Automatic Headlights Only When this feature is active the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position In addition the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature NOTE The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be turned on or off using the Uconnect System refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instru ment Panel for further information Rain Sensing Wipers If Equipped This feature senses moisture on the windshield and automatically activates the wipers for the driver The feature is especially useful for road splash or over spray from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to one of four settings to acti
462. without pressing the Uconnect Voice Command Sve button 1 Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command Sve button 2 Say a command e g Help 3 Use the ON OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Com mand system is speaking Please note the volume setting for Voice Command is different than the audio system Uconnect Voice Commands The Uconnect Voice Command system understands two types of commands Universal commands are avail able at all times Local commands are available if the supported radio mode is active Start a dialogue by pressing the Uconnect Voice Com mand VR button ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171 Starting Voice Recognition VR Session in Disc Radio Mayer Modes To switch to the disc mode say Change source to Disc In this mode you can say the following commands This command can be given in any mode or screen NOTE The commands can be said on any screen whena e Track to change the track call is not active after pushing the Uconnect Voice Command Sve button 172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Sx Voice Tree Uconnect Voice Command AM FM Satellite Radio available commands These commands can be spoken when the AM FM or Satellite radio is playing after pushing the Uconnect voice command button t w on the steering wheel Commands only available Commands available in Commands
463. wn or off during mobile phone operation when not using Uconnect if equipped CLIMATE CONTROLS The air conditioning and heating system is designed to make you comfortable in all types of weather This system can be operated through either the controls on the instrument panel or through the Uconnect system display When the Uconnect system is in different modes Radio Player Settings More etc the driver and passenger temperature settings will be indicated at the top of the display UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 357 General Overview Soft Keys Hard Keys Soft keys are accessible on the Uconnect system screen The hard keys located below the Uconnect screen Uconnect 8 4 Automatic Temperature Controls ft k Automatic Climate Controls Hard keys HOHEM 358 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Button Descriptions Applies To Both Hard keys And Soft keys 1 MAX AIC Button Press and release to change the current setting the indicator illuminates when MAX A C is ON Performing this function again will cause the MAX A C operation to switch into manual mode and the MAX A C indicator will turn off 2 AIC Button Press and release to change the current setting the indicator illuminates when A C is ON Performing this function again will cause the A C operation to switch into manual mode and the A C indicator will turn off 3 Recirculation Button Press and release to change the curren
464. wnward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer In most cases it should not be less than 10 of the trailer load You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle Frontal Area The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the maximum width of the front of a trailer Trailer Sway Control The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling Weight Carrying Hitch A weight carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle These kinds of hitches are the most popular on the market today and they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized trailers Weight Distributing Hitch A weight distributing system works by applying lever age through spring load bars They are typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle s front axle and the trailer axle s When used in accordance with the manufacturer s directions it pro vides for a more level ride offering more consistent steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing safety The addition of a friction hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively t
465. xide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex haust system and adjacent body areas for broken dam aged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 529 CAUTION The catalytic converter requires the use of un leaded fuel only Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control into the passenger compartment In addition have the exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO refer to Safety Tips Exhaust Gas in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system Do not park or operate your ve hicle in areas where your exhaust system can con tact anything that can burn device and may se
466. y to return to the previous menu e Navigation Turn By Turn In Cluster If Equipped When this feature is selected the turn by turn directions will appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a designated turn within a programmed route To make your selection touch the Navigation Turn By Turn In Cluster soft key until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 339 e Fuel Saver Display In Cluster If Equipped The ECO message is located in the instrument cluster display this message can be turned on or off To make your selection touch the Fuel Saver Display soft key until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Clock After pressing the Clock soft key the following settings will be available e Sync with GPS Time If Equipped When in this display you may automatically have the radio set the time To change the Sync with GPS Time setting touch the Sync with GPS Time soft key until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Set Time Hours When in this display you may adjust the hours The Sync with GPS Time soft key must be unchecked To make your selection touc
467. y an authorized dealer The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON RUN position NOTE This light shows only that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application 18 Electronic Stability Control ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light If Equipped Lal ee The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position It should go out with the engine running If the ESC Activation Malfunction In dicator Light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected NOTE e The ESC Off Indicator Light and the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to ON RUN Each time the ignition is turned to ON RUN the ESC system will be ON even if it was turned off previously e The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation 320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR IN
468. y downshift as the vehicle slows to a stop to prevent engine lugging and will display the cur rent gear Tapping the paddle at a stop will allow starting in second gear After a stop the driver should manually upshift the transmission as the vehicle accelerates To disengage AutoStick mode press and hold the shift paddle until D or S is once again indicated in the instrument cluster You can shift in or out of the AutoStick mode at any time without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal 398 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface The drive wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid causing a collision or personal injury Operation Five Speed Transmission When the shift lever is in the DRIVE position the transmission will operate automatically shifting between the five available gears To engage AutoStick simply tap the shift lever to the right or left while in the DRIVE position or tap one of the steering wheel mounted shift paddles if equipped Tapping to enter AutoStick mode will downshift the transmission to the next lower gear while using to enter AutoStick mode will retain the current gear When AutoStick is active the current transmission gear is displayed in the instrument cluster In AutoStick mode the transmission will shift up or down when is manually select
469. y in the lane There may not be sufficient distance to the lane changing vehicle Always be atten tive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary 032400173 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 249 Narrow Vehicles Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they have moved fully into the lane There may not be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead RA ao 032400174 Uz fl 9 Stationary Objects And Vehicles ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary vehicles For example ACC will not react in situations where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and the vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary A 250 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se General Information FCC Requirements For Vehicular Radar Systems Classification Specifications 47 C F R Part 15 47 C E R Part 15 515 Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control Mode In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode a normal fixed speed Cruise Control mode is available for cruis ing at fixed speeds The normal Cruise Control mode is designed to maintain a set cruising speed without requir ing the driver to operate the accelerator Cruise Control can only be operated if the vehicle speed is above 20 mph 32 km h To change modes press the MODE button when the system is in

2014 Chrysler 300 Owner`s Manual - Dealer e

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents